company hse for wc welding services 2014

2014 Edition

Health, Safety & Environmental Handbook WC Welding Services Inc.

WC Welding Services Inc.

2 Modify only under the supervision of the safety officer

Table of Contents

Corporate Policy Statement Page. 3 Hand & Power Tools Page. 252

Substance Abuse Policy Page. 4 Mobile Equipment Page. 264

Behavioral Based Safety Page. 19 Crane Safety Page. 269

Disciplinary Program Page. 22 Forklift Safety Page. 278

Job Competency Page. 27 Elevated Platform Safety Page. 286

Short Service Employee Page. 28

Driving Safety Page. 30

Incident investigation Page. 32

Stop Work Authority Page. 37

Personal Protective Equipment Page. 40

Hearing Conservation Page. 48

Respiratory Protection Page. 52

First Aid Page. 62

Fire Prevention Page. 65

Emergency Action Plan Page. 70

Heat & Cold Stress Page. 74

Fatigue Management Page. 82

Back Safety Page. 86

Lockout Tagout Page. 93

Electrical Safety Page. 105

Fall Protection Page. 127

Abrasive Blasting Page. 136

Rigging Page. 141

Walking & Working Surfaces Page. 144

Scaffold Page. 152

Stairway and Ladder Page. 159

Confined Space Page. 173

Welding and Hot Work Page. 186

Waste Management Page. 196

Hazard Identification Page. 198

Hazard Communication Page. 210

Benzene Awareness Page. 213

Hydrogen Sulfide Awareness Page. 216

Hexavalent Chromium Awareness Page. 223

Cadmium Awareness Page. 227

Lead Awareness Page. 230

Bloodborne Pathogens Page. 233

Exposure Control Page. 241



WC Welding Services Inc., Occupational Health and Safety Program

Corporate Policy Statement

The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 clearly states our common goal of safe and healthful working conditions. The safety and health of our employees continues to be the first consideration in

the operation of this business.

Safety and health in our business must be a part of every operation. Without question it is every

employee's responsibility at all levels.

It is the intent of this company to comply with all laws. To do this we must constantly be aware of conditions in all work areas that can produce injuries. No employee is required to work at a job he or she knows is not safe or healthful. Your cooperation in detecting hazards and, in turn, controlling them is a condition of your employment. Inform your supervisor immediately of any situation beyond your

ability or authority to correct.

The personal safety and health of each employee of this company is of primary importance. The prevention of occupationally-induced injuries and illnesses is of such consequence that it will be given precedence over operating productivity whenever necessary. To the greatest degree possible, management will provide all mechanical and physical facilities required for personal safety and health in

keeping with the highest standards.

We will maintain a safety and health program conforming to the best management practices of organizations of this type. To be successful, such a program must embody the proper attitudes toward injury and illness prevention not only on the part of supervisors and employees, but also be tween each employee and his or her coworkers. Only through such a cooperative effort can a safety program in the

best interest of all be established and preserved.

Our objective is a safety and health program that will reduce the number of injuries and il lnesses to an absolute minimum, not merely in keeping with, but surpassing, the best experience of operations similar to ours. Our goal is nothing less than zero accidents and injuries.

________________________________

President and CEO

WC Welding Services



Statement of Workplace Drug Policy

WC Welding Services, hereafter known as WC Welding, strives to provide a safe work

environment and encourage personal health. In this regard, WP Resources considers the abuse of drugs on the job to be an unsafe, counterproductive work practice. Furthermore, we see

substance abuse as a serious threat to our staff and customers. With these objectives in mind, the company has established the following policy with regard to the use, possession, and the sale of illegal drugs and alcohol at work.

Drug addiction is a complex, yet treatable disease. For this reason, our substance abuse program

is targeted at alleviating the problem at the community level by involving our employees. Our commitment to eradicating substance abuse in the community reflects our firm belief that by building this community, we build our company.

The ultimate goal of this policy is to balance our respect for individual privacy with our need to

keep a safe and drug free environment. Our intention is to prevent substance abuse. We would like to encourage those who use drugs or abuse alcohol to seek help in overcoming the problem.

It is the policy of WC Welding that an employee found with the presence of illegal drugs and/or alcohol in his/her system, in possession or, using, selling, trading, or offering for sale illegal drugs during working hours, or on company premises(including parking lots), may be subject to

disciplinary action up to and including discharge. It also includes reporting to work under the influence of alcohol or with illegal drugs in an employee system.

Drugs prescribed by employee’s physician may be taken during work hours. The employee may not be disclosed except in accordance with procedures allowed under the Federal/State Statute,

professional licensing regulations, or company policy.

As a condition of employment, employees must abide by the terms of this policy and must notify the company in writing of any conviction of a violation of a criminal drug statute occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) calendar days after such a conviction.



Policy and Work Rules

WC Welding policy is to employ a workforce free from the use of illegal drugs, wither on or off the job, and the abuse of alcohol in the workplace. Any employee determined to be in violation

of this policy is subject to disciplinary action, which will include termination, even for the first offense. It is a Standard of Conduct of the Employees of “WC Welding” that employees shall not use illegal drugs or abuse legal ones. In order to maintain this policy the company shall

establish and maintain the following programs.

General Procedures

Confidentiality:

All information received in regard to drug testing results will be maintained in separate, confidential files and only be used for the purpose stated.

Education:

Employee and supervisor education will be conducted annually and documented. Discrimination:

This company will not discriminate against applicants for employment because of past substance abuse. It is their current abuse of drugs which prevents employers from properly performing

their jobs and which the company will not tolerate. Employee Drug Testing:

It shall be a condition of employment for all employees to refrain from reporting to work, or working with the presence of drugs or alcohol in his or her body and to submit to drug screening.

Refusal to take a drug and alcohol test may result in the employee forfeiting his or her eligibility for medical and indemnity benefits under State Workers’ Compensation law. Also, such refusal is cause for automatic termination of the employee which may also cause denial of

unemployment compensation.

Drug Screening Testing:

All testing will be done in accordance with state and federal laws. Initial Testing will be done using a Rapid Drug Screen. Positives will be sent to a Substance Abuse and Mental Health

Service Administration (SAMHSA) Lab, Approved site following Chain of Custody protocols and/or state certified lab: positive results will be checked by a Medical Review Officer in

accordance with state and federal laws to assure accuracy. All testing, sample collection, storage, handling, and chain of custody will be done in accordance with appropriate State and Federal rules and regulations.

Drugs that will be tested:

Amphetamines (biphetamine, desoxyn, Dexedrine, speed)



Cannabinoids (marijuana, hashish, hash, hash oil, pot, joint, grass, weed)

Cocaine (coke, blow, nose candy, snow, flake, crack)

Phencyclidine (PCP, angel dust, hog)

Opiates (opium, Dover’s powder, paregoric, parepectolin)

Alcohol (booze, drink)

Synthetics (K2, spice, herbal incense, potpourri, and bath salts)

Initial Test

The initial screen for all drugs except alcohol shall be tested in accordance with state law. The

following cutoff levels shall be used when first screening specimens to find whether they are negative or need to be sent for further testing using GC/MS confirmatory test.

INITIAL CONFIRMATION CUTOFF Amphetamines 1000 ng/ml 250 ng/ml Cocaine 300 ng/ml 150 ng/ml

Opiates 2000 ng/ml 2000 ng/ml Phencyclidine 50 ng/ml 25 ng/ml

Marijuana 50 ng/ml 15 ng/ml Breath Alcohol .02 gm% .02 gm%

Confirmation Test: A positive finding will generate a confirmation test through the GC/MS method and the results

will be kept confidential. A copy of any positive results can be received by the employee submitting his/her request in writing.

If a test is not collectable because of a possible tampering or adulteration, a second test will be requested. The second test may be observed. If a test is rejected because of purposeful

adulteration, the employee will be terminated. Documentation of a positive drug test result will be placed in the employee’s confidential file within five working days of receipt of the positive result. If an employee is tested for reasonable suspicion, documentation of this test will be

placed in the employee’s confidential file within five working days of the reasonable suspicion test.

All testing will be done by a Substance Abuse and Mental Health Service Administration (SAMHSA) certified lab, and a random positive test result will be checked by a Medical Officer

to assure accuracy, pre-employment in some cases. All testing, sample collection, storage, handling, and chain of custody will be done in accordance with the Health Care Administrator’s

rules and regulations.



Post Accident Drug Testing:

When there is any mishap or accident involving, caused by, or contributed to by an employee in which injury to a person or persons occurs. Where there is damage to property in the amount of

$750 or greater has occurred, we will perform a drug test. Workers' Compensation State law denies worker's compensation benefits coverage to employees who are injured or killed in an accident while under the influence of illicit drugs or alcohol

where the intoxication or controlled substance was the proximate cause of the injury. Ohio Rev. Code § 123.54

Random Drug Testing:

All regular full-time and regular part-time employees will be eligible for random testing. We will select 20% of our workforce every month for drug testing. A computer program will be

used to ensure that employees to be tested are randomly selected.

Reasonable Suspicion:

An employee reporting for work visibly under the influence who is unable to properly or safely

perform required duties will not be allowed to work. If possible, the supervisor should first seek another supervisor’s opinion of the employee’s status. Then the supervisor should consult privately with the employee to determining the cause of the observation, including whether

substance abuse has occurred. If, in the opinion of the supervisor, the employee is unfit for duty, the employee should be taken to a collection facility to be tested using a safe method of

transportation and, depending on the extent of the observed impairment, be accompanied by the supervisor or another employee. An employee such as this should not be allowed to drive to the testing facility or to their home. It is the responsibility of a WC Welding supervisor to confront

an employee whenever the supervisor sees a change in the performance that suggests a problem. If reasonable suspicion exists to believe that an employee is using or has used illegal drugs, a

drug test will be performed. Employees tested for reasonable suspicion may be suspended without pay or placed in non-safety sensitive jobs pending the results of the required test and/or investigation. An employee with a negative result will be reinstated, if suspended, with full

back-pay and/or return to previous duties. A positive test will result in immediate action up to and including termination. Circumstances that could be, but are not limited to, indicators of a

drug problem and considered reasonable suspicion are: (1) observed drug use during work hours on company premises; (2) incoherent mental state;

(3) marked changes in personal behavior that are otherwise unexplainable; (4) deteriorating work performance that is otherwise unexplainable;

(5) accidents or other actions that provide reasonable cause



WC Welding will provide to an employee (upon their request) within seven days, a written

report regarding the circumstances that formed the basis for reasonable suspicion. The original and signed report will be maintained in the confidential human resources records for one year.

Results of Drug Possession and/or Usage

WC Welding is a Drug Free Workplace for the benefit of all employees, customers, and the community.

State law provides for the possible denial of workers’ compensation benefits

for employees who are injured while working and subsequently test positive and the denial of unemployment compensation.

An employee bringing onto WC Welding premises or property, having possession of, possessing

in the employee’s body, blood or urine an amount above the threshold levels established by the Substance Abuse and Mental Health Service Administration (SAMHSA) or using, consuming,

transferring, selling, or attempting to sell or transfer any form of illegal drug while on company business or at any time during the hours between the beginning and ending of the employee’s working day, whether on company property or not, is guilty of misconduct and is subject to

discipline including discharge, even for a first offense. Failure to submit to required medical or physical examinations or tests is misconduct and is grounds for discharge.

The use of illegal drugs will not be tolerated or subsidized. Employees who test positive will be terminated for violation of this policy.

Medical Review Officer:

A qualified medical review officer shall review test results in accordance with state laws concerning that employee/applicant. An employee/applicant may consult with the MRO before or after being tested in order to report any prescription or non-prescription drug use. The

employee/applicant may use the phone in any office or room to ensure privacy.

Employee Assistance Program: With proper treatment, many troubled employees can be restored to a satisfactory level of job performance. No information regarding the nature of the personal problem will be made

available to a supervisor, nor will it be included in the permanent personnel file. Participation in



an EAP, or another mental health or substance abuse counseling program, will not affect the employee’s future career advancement or employment, nor will it protect an employee from

disciplinary action if substandard job performance continues. The Human Resource Officer has a list of EAP and other mental health facilities available in your area. The employee has the

right to review the EAP file discreetly (use the phone in private). The cost of these services will

be borne by the employee.

Grounds for Discipline or Termination: An employee bringing onto WC Welding premises or property, having possession of, being

under the influence of, possessing in the employee’s body, blood, or urine in the amount set forth, purposefully tampering or adulterating specimen, or using, consuming, transferring, selling, or attempting to sell or transfer any form of illegal drug as defined above while on

company business or at any time during the hours between the beginning and ending of the employee’s working day. Whether on duty or not, whether on WC Welding business, property or

not, is guilty of misconduct and subject to discipline including discharge, even for the first offense.

Responsibilities of the Employee: As a condition of employment, employees must abide by the terms of this policy and must notify

the company in writing of any conviction of a violation of a criminal drug statute occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) calendar days after such a conviction.

The employees must notify his/her supervisor that his/her prescription drug or medication may affect or impair his/her judgment, job performance, or safety.

The employee of job applicant must notify the employer and laboratory of any administrative or civil action planned as a result of a positive test within five (5) working days from receipt of

notification.

The employee has the right to contest the result of a positive drug test, in writing, within five (5) working days of being notified in writing of the positive test result. The employee has a right to a copy of the test result, upon request, and to have the sample taken to a certified lab to be

retested at the employee’s expense.

Conclusion



WC Welding Drug Free Workplace Policy is not intended to be abusive or discriminatory or to come into conflict with any public policy. This company considers drug testing to be only one of

several steps to achieve a safe, healthy, and productive atmosphere for its employees. This policy is available for inspection by the job applicant or employees during regular business

hours. This policy supercedes any information provided to applicants and/or employees either written or oral and the company reserves the right to change the provisions of this policy and testing program at any time in the future without prior notice and does not constitute a contract

of employment.

Definitions:

1) “Legal Drug” – includes prescribed drugs and over-the-counter drugs which have been legally obtained and are being used solely for the purpose for which they were prescribed or manufactured.

2) “Illegal Drug” – any drug which: (a) is not legally obtainable; (b) may be legally obtainable, but has not been legally obtained; or (c) is being used in a manner or for a

purpose other than prescribed. 3) “Job Applicant” – a person who has been offered employment. 4) “Detectible Amount” – the cut off levels established by D.H.H.S. and or A.H.C.A. for

screening and confirmation. 5) “Safety Sensitive” – positions determined by law, usually include positions that involve

national security, health, safety, functions that require a high degree of trust and confidence, or operation of company vehicles, machinery or equipment

6) “Notification of Prescription and Over-the-Counter Medication” – should the results of

the laboratory tests for the specimen identified by this form be confirmed positive, the Medical Review Officer will contact you to ask you about prescriptions and over-the-

counter medications you may have taken. 7) “Donor Release” – signing step 4 in the Chain of Custody Form is your certification that

you provided a urine specimen to the collector, that they have not adulterated it in any

manner, that each specimen bottle used was sealed with a tamper-evident seat in the collector’s presence and the information provided on the Chain of Custody Form and on

the label affixed to each specimen bottle is correct. 8) “Medical Review Officer (MRO)” – a licensed physician (medical doctor or doctor of

osteopath) responsible for receiving laboratory results generated by an employer’s drug

testing program. The MRO must have knowledge of substance abuse disorders and appropriate medical training to interpret and evaluate an individual’s confirmed positive

test, medical history, and other relevant biomedical information. 9) “Unfit for Duty” – any worker who is unable to perform his/her assigned duties with

reasonable skill and safety due to physical, emotional, or chemical purposes.



Over-the-Counter and Prescription Medications Which Could Affect the Drug Test Result

Alcohol

All liquid medications containing ethyl alcohol (ethanol). Please read the label for alcohol content. For example, Vick’s Nyquil is 25% (50 proof) ethyl alcohol; Comtrex, 20% (40 proof); Listerine, 26.9% (54 proof).

Amphetamines

Obetral, Biphetamine, Desoxyn, Dexedrine, Didrex

Cannabinoids

Marinol (Dronabinol, THC) Cocaine

Cocaine HCI topical solution (Roxanne) Phencyclidine

Not legal by prescription Methaqualone

Not legal by prescription

Opiates

Paregoric, Parepectolin, Donna gel PG, Morphine, Tylenol with Codeine, Empirin with

Codeine, APAP with Codeine, Aspirin with Codeine, Robitussin AC, Guiatuss AC, Novahistine DH, Novahistine Expectorant, Dilaudid (Hydromorphine), M-S Contin and Roxinol (morphine sulfate), Percodan, Vicodin, etc.

Barbituates

Phenobarbital, Tuinal, Amytal, Nembutal, Seconal, Lotusate, Fiorinal, Fiorecet, Esgic,

Butisol, Mebarbal, Butabarbital, Phrenilin, Triad, etc. Benzodiazepines

Ativan, Azene, Clonopin, Dalmane, Diazepam, Librium, Xanax, Serax, Tranxene, Valium,

Verstran, Halcion, Paxipam, Restoril, Centrex Methadone

Dolophine, Methadose Propoxyphene

Dervocet, Darvon N, Dolene, etc.



Notice of Drug Free Workplace Program

{DATE} Dear Employees,

The use of drugs is a national problem that seriously affects every American. Drug abuse not

only affects individual users and their families, but also presents dangers in the community. Business and labor must take leadership roles in the nationwide efforts to reduce the use of illegal drugs and alcohol abuse.

As you are aware, WC Welding has always been committed to providing a safe workplace

and fostering the well-being and health of our employees. Illegal drug use jeopardizes this commitment and undermines the capability of WC Welding to produce quality products and services.

Therefore, we have developed a policy regarding the illegal use of drugs and the abuse of

alcohol that we believe serves the interest of all employees. Our policy formally and clearly states that the illegal use of drugs will not be tolerated.

We will test 20 % of our workforce every month to identify drug users.

We will also test for drugs after an injury to an employee in the workplace. Drug testing will commence July 6, 2012We fully expect your cooperation with the

implementation of this important policy.

Sincerely,

_________________

Supervisor Name WC Welding



Authorization for Limited Use and Disclosure of Medical Information

To ensure the confidentiality, accuracy, and prompt availability of medical information, we

request this authorization to be signed.

I hereby authorize the Medical Review Officer, any counselor or treatment facility I am referred to, and the testing laboratories to furnish this company with the results of all tests run. I further authorize any doctor that has written a prescription which I may be using to

disclose the purpose of the prescription, the conditions under which it is to be taken, and any other pertinent information to the Medical Review Officer to assist in the MRO’s

determination of my fitness for duty. WC Welding may use the medical information authorized only for the following purposes:

To determine my ability to do my job or my qualifications for employment or continued employment and to defend in any legal proceedings in which my employment or actions are

at issue. This authorization shall become effective immediately and shall remain in effect throughout the duration of employment with the company and any post-employment legal matters or proceedings.

I understand that WC Welding may further use or disclose the medical information unless

further authorization is given by me or in case of post accident testing or disclosure is required or permitted by law or licensing authority. I further understand that I have a right to receive a copy of this authorization upon my request. I further agree that a reproduced copy

of this form shall have the same force and effect as the original.

I hereby authorize the hospital, clinic, or laboratory, its physicians and technicians, specified by the company, to obtain a sample of my urine, blood, or breath to be analyzed for the presence of controlled substances.

Signature: _____________________________________ Date: _________________



WC Welding Drug Free Workplace Education Documentation

This form acknowledges the required training and education on Drugs and Workers’

Compensation required in by state law. Our company is a drug free workplace for the benefit of all employees, customers, and the

business entity. State law provides for the possible denial of workers’ compensation benefits for employees who are injured while working and subsequently test positive. The use of

illegal drugs will not be tolerated or subsidized. The following drugs are among those tested for under our company policy:

Cannabis Cocaine

Amphetamines PCP Opiates

These are the multiple sub-families of individual drugs under the Substance Abuse and

Mental Health Service Administration (SAMHSA) requirements. These are known by many names. As adults, we all know that it is ill-advised for anyone to take pills or medication that has not been prescribed by a physician. Improper use of prescription medication can place

you in a position of forfeiting your job, workers’ compensation benefits and unemployment benefits as well.

I understand to not misuse prescribed, non-prescribed or over-the-counter medication and to not use illegal drugs or misuse alcohol. The company has a written policy on drug abuse. It

is posted and available to you to read, understand, and follow. It is your responsibility to know the provisions of this policy.

Employee:________________________________________ Date:_______________



WC Welding Notice of Positive Test Results

To:

The drug test that you took has been determined to be positive. The test was confirmed positive in accordance with Substance Abuse and Mental Health Service Administration

(SAMHSA) standards.

Our Medical Review Officer has conferred with you. Nonetheless, you have five (5) working days to contest the test results to the company. In accordance with our company policy you are hereby (discipline, as stated in policy).

Because you tested positive, you may forfeit medical and indemnity benefits in accordance

with State Workers’ Compensation Act. You are suspended for three (3) days without pay for violation of our drug policy.

You may appeal this decision or challenge it legally or administratively, at your expense. Also, in accordance with the administrative provisions of the Workers’ Compensation Act,

you may have the sample in question retested at your own expense at another qualified laboratory.

Sincerely,

_____________________ Supervisor Name WC Welding



Termination Letter

Dear:

Pursuant to the Drug Free Workplace Policy of the company, it has been determined that you have a positive confirmed drug test result. As a consequence of this positive drug test, you are being terminated from employment, effective immediately.

Enclosed is a copy of the Consent and Release form that you originally signed which

explained your rights, duties, and obligations under this company’s Drug Free Workplace Program. You have the right to contest the results of the test within five (5) working days after you receive this letter notifying you of the test result. Your contest must be in writing

and should state why the test results do not constitute a violation of the company’s Drug Free Workplace Program.

You have the right to consult this testing laboratory for technical information regarding prescription and non-prescription medications or other relevant information. You have a

right to the copy of the drug test results upon request and to have any portion of any sample or specimen taken to be retested at your expense, at the laboratory of your choice. The

retesting should be done within 180 days at a Substance Abuse and Mental Health Service Administration (SAMHSA) approved laboratory.

By administrative rule, this employer has fifteen (15) days to respond to your explanation of why your positive drug test is not a violation of the Drug Free Workplace Program. If your

explanation is not accepted, you have the right to administratively challenge this position by filing a claim with a judge of compensation within thirty (30) days after the receipt of this employer’s response to your explanation. If you intend to challenge the drug test, it is your

responsibility to inform the above stated laboratory at the address and telephone number shown to ensure that the specimen sample is retained.

Sincerely,

_____________________________ Supervisor Name WC Welding



WC Welding Acknowledgement of Receipt & Understanding of Drug Policy

I understand the company’s Drug Abuse and Drug Testing Policy and consent to the terms

set forth in the policy. I further understand that the program has been publicly posted in an appropriate and conspicuous place on the company’s premises and copies of this policy are

available for the inspection by me or the general public in the administrative office or other designated place during regular business hours. By the signing of this agreement, I herewith acknowledge that I have read this instrument and fully understand that the company can

establish other work rules related to possession, use, sale or solicitation of drugs, including policies concerning arrest of convictions for drug or alcohol-related offenses, and can

suspend or terminate my employment or deny employment for such conduct.

_________________________________________

Employee

_________________________________________ Printed Name



WC Welding

Drug Test Consent and Release Form

I hereby consent to submit to urinalysis and or/other tests as shall be determined thereof by the company as a condition of employment and for the purpose of determining specific drug

content. I agree that a Substance Abuse and Mental Health Service Administration (SAMHSA)

certified lab may collect these specimens for these tests and may use them or forward them to a testing laboratory designated by the company for analysis.

I further agree to have these results reviewed by a Medical Review Officer. I hereby release to the company, the results of the test(s) to which I have consented. I further authorize the

company to discuss the results with medical/personnel collecting the specimen, the testing facility, it’s directors, officers, agents, and employees responsible for administering the

aforementioned test(s) or evaluating the results thereof and any of them herein and to use the test results in conjunction with employment actions, professional licensing procedures, and as a defense to any legal action to which I am a party.

I further release any testing facility or any physicians who have tested me from any liability

arising from a release of any and all results, written reports, medical reports, and data concerning my test(s) to the appropriate company officials or government agencies.

I further agree that a reproduced copy of this consent form shall have the same force and effect as the original.

I have carefully read the foregoing and fully understand its contents. I acknowledge that my signing this consent and release form is a voluntary act on my part and that I have not been

coerced into signing this document by anyone.

Printed Name: ________________________________________________________

Signature: ___________________________________ Date:____________________



WC Welding Services Inc. Behavior Based Safety

1. Purpose: The purpose of the Behavior Based Safety section is to provide all employees with the basic behavior principles and the behavior-based process in which to maintain a safe workplace.

2. Policy: It is the Policy of the WC WELDING that no employee is permitted to work in the field or in the shop without first being properly trained in our Behavior Based Safety Program. This training will be provided during New-Hire Orientation and annually during a refresher course. 2.1 Training will include:

Program Objectives

How to conduct observations

How to complete observation forms What the Behaviors mean

Feedback training and mentoring

Observations can be conducted at anytime.

3. Procedures: Behavior-Based Safety is a process that helps employees identify and choose a safe behavior over an unsafe one.

4. Basic Behavior Principles:

4.1 Safety in the workplace is a combination of three measurable components:

• The person

• Their environment

• Their behavior 4.2 Only when these three elements are combined can workplace accidents be eliminated.

5. The Person:

5.1 Consists of:

Physical capabilities

Experience, and

Training

6. The Environment:



6.1 Represents:

Engineering Controls,

Equipment, Job task, and

The work culture

7. Behavior:

7.1 This is the final, most often overlooked component-what the employee does on the job.

8. Four Key Components to Behavior Based Safety:

1. A behavioral observation and feedback process;

2. A formal review of observation data;

3. Improvement goals, and

4. Reinforcement for improvement and goal attainment.

9. Behavioral Observation & Feedback Process: This is one of the most important components of the process. Observations provide direct, measurable information on employees’ safe work practices.

9.1 All employees will be trained in making observations: • Management • New hire • Refresher

9.2 Records are kept to document who has been trained in BBS 9.3 Employees can be observed at any time during his/her work shift 9.4 Employees are observed performing their routine task. The observer documents both

safe and unsafe behaviors. 9.5 After observations are made it is important to have a discussion with the observed. 9.6 Observer will review the observation. 9.7 The employee is then provided positive feedback on the safe behaviors and non-

threatening feedback on the unsafe behaviors. They are also provided with suggestions on correcting the unsafe behaviors.

10. Formal Review of Observation Data:

10.1 The data is then analyzed to determine the employee’s (or department’s) improvement in safe behaviors. It can be looked at as an overall percentage.

10.2 The improvement between observations could be graphed and displayed for employees to view.



10.3 When graphs show improvement, it provides positive reinforcing feedback to employees and management. i.e. if a worker was observed for 20 acts ad 17 were done correctly then the employee would get an 85%

10.4 After taking many different observations the department or specific worker could be given an average safety score.

11. Improvement Goals:

11.1 Annually observations for each crew will be used to make a trend of safe and un-safe behaviors.

11.2 Once this trend is complete an action plan will be developed by WC Welding Services Safety Manager documenting safe and un-safe behaviors.

11.3 The Action Plan will include: Un-safe behaviors from observations trend analysis Un-safe behaviors from comments on observation cards and feedback Timeframes and responsibilities will be assigned to employees to improve safe

work practices. Any questions on this process should be directed to WC Welding Services Safety

Manager 11.4 It is essential to have an annual examination of how the items created in the previous

Action Plans are being addressed (i.e. how are the identified safe and un-safe work practices being followed)

11.5 WC Welding Services Safety Manager will evaluate and archive all Action Plans for annual review.

11.6 Setting improvement goals increases the effectiveness of feedback and the success of the behavior-based safety process.

11.7 These goals usually take several different forms:

Percent safe goals Process goals Implementation goals

12. Reinforcement for Improvement and Goal Attainment:

12.1 Management must provide immediate, positive feedback to reinforce safe behavior. Rewards can be an effective means of reinforcing goal attainment.

13. Results:

Increased efficiency

Increased productivity Increased morale

Increase profitability



WC Welding Services Inc. Disciplinary Program

1. Executive:

Top Management's duties and responsibilities include:

Maintaining competent safety-minded supervision to ensure compliance with safe working practices.

Providing proper equipment and safe layout for its use.

Providing employees best suited for the job.

Developing safe working practices.

Planning and arranging company operations with careful attention to safety.

Encouraging employee's interest in and contributing to safety procedures.

Enlisting supervisory participation in carrying out safety procedures.

Selecting protective equipment.

Maintaining a system of company equipment and tool inspection for the purpose of correcting hazards and improving operations.

Enlisting all employees in active participation in the safety program.

Designating an individual to monitor, administer, and record all aspects of the company safety program.

Prevent the loss and/or destruction of company properties by fires, storms, hurricanes and/or other disasters.

Provide protection for all company and contract personnel against accidents, industrial injuries and/or fatal accidents.

Prevent any type of pollution.



2. Supervisor:

The Supervisor is one of the most important individuals in any accident prevention program. Because of this close association with the operations, he/she is a key person and must be charged with the responsibility. He/she must be a good leader, teacher and set a good example for the workers in all phases of work. The safety duties of the Supervisor are as follows:

Insure that all new employees are taught company procedures and policies. Explain the company's personnel and safety program and make every effort to get the employees interested in safety procedures, stressing the point that each employee is an important part of the team, and give him/her every opportunity to learn.

Follow up on all safety violations. Items to be discussed include: Meet with employee to ensure he/she is informed of all safety rule and procedures. Discuss corrective actions of the violation that occurred. Determine if more training is needed.

Respond to all employee recommendations, either by implementation or explanation.

Encourage and give credit to employees who report unsafe conditions or practices.

Investigate and discuss all accidents and injuries with the workers to develop complete information as to cause and corrective measures.

Constantly study the guidelines so that all work and equipment will be up to company standards and policies.

Insure that all safety equipment is used, is in proper working condition, and that safe practices are followed.

Be knowledgeable of all rules and regulations of the Federal Government pertaining to the company. Be sure these rules and regulations are strictly followed.

Insure all new and inexperienced employees are instructed in safe operating procedures and the hazards of their jobs.

Instruct the employees to inspect their equipment regularly to ensure that it is in good and safe working condition.

Do pre-job planning to help foresee any problems or danger.

Take necessary steps to correct hazardous conditions and incorrect practices.

Insure that protective devices are in good condition and are being utilized.

Anticipate hazardous conditions and remove the causes.



Promptly report any unsafe equipment that cannot be corrected by the employees.

Encourage all employees to make safety suggestions.

Stress the importance of teamwork. We must work as a team to prevent accidents and get the job done safely.

Recognize the intelligence of workers and their ability to contribute to accident prevention.

Insure that employees complete each job in an orderly way and do not leave any hazardous conditions.

Develop correct working practices for the employees so that careless procedures will be eliminated.

Insure that employees are mentally and physically fit for the job.

Remind employees frequently how accidents affect them personally and cause hardships on their families -- pain, suffering, loss of income, etc.

Maintain good housekeeping on all job locations.

3. Safety Coordinator: The scope and function of the Safety Coordinator is fourfold: To identify and appraise the organizational needs and the needs of the employee; to develop the safety plan; to implement or communicate with those involved; and to monitor or re-evaluate the safety plan's weakness and strengths. Responsibilities included are:

Serve in a staff capacity without line authority

Coordinate safety activities within the company by advising and assisting the various levels of supervision with their responsibility for the safety of their employees.

Assist in implementing the required recommendations set forth through the Occupational Safety and Health Act, as well as other approved codes, standards, and recommended practices. Keep abreast with such codes, and inform management of areas of noncompliance.

Conduct periodic audits to ensure employees follow safety protocol

Plan, organize, and conduct Supervisory meetings on safety management and their responsibilities.



Keep and analyze accident records to insure that proper action has been taken to prevent a reoccurrence of a similar type of accident. Also, inform other areas of the company where similar conditions exist so that necessary actions will be taken to prevent similar accidents.

Serve on the Executive Safety Committee.

Assist in scheduled facility inspections.

Assist and attend scheduled safety meetings.

Assist in providing safety orientations to new employees.

Audit departments, sections, and units in order to determine compliance with all required safety rules, policies and procedures. Submit findings to the Executive Safety Committee.

Assist in establishing procedures and guidelines for the Safety Program and keep it updated.

Develop safety recommendations for specific operations.

Attend training schools and/or seminars that provide current methods and/or systems training in accident prevention and safety development.

Investigate accidents, as considered by management.

Submit a monthly written report to top management regarding status and also proper statistics involving accidents in order to keep management informed of the overall results.

Assist and advise on the selection and purchase of safety equipment.

Keep in contact with organizations like A.S.S.E., N.S.C., I.A.C.C., A.P.I., L.A., W.C., O.S.H.A., operators or customers to stay abreast of changes, trends, and development in the safety field.

Obtain and/or render prompt first-aid to injured employees.

Other areas of assistance include: special hazards or unusual jobs; security measures; vehicular safety; occupational disease; damage control; emergency or disaster control plans; promotional aids; and special-emphasis campaigns.

4. Employees:



Working safely is an integral part of a worker's job. The mutual cooperation with fellow employees toward developing proper procedures is essential. Elimination of accidents is of prime importance. It is very important to follow all safety rules, avoid taking unnecessary chances, use all safeguards and safety equipment provided and make safety a part of the job. Violation of established safety rules will not be tolerated. The employees’ responsibilities include:

Review the Safety Program and read and follow the safety rules.

Employees are expected to follow safe procedures and to take an active part in the work of protecting themselves, their fellow employees, and the equipment. They shall be encouraged to detect and report hazardous conditions and unsafe behavior in their work places to their supervisor and to make suggestions for their correction.

Support and participate in the Safety Program.

Perform their jobs in the safest manner prescribed.

Reports to the job sober and physically fit.

Assist the entire workforce to maintain good job housekeeping.

Be alert; always keep your mind on your job; know your job and the proper way to perform it. Be alert constantly for any unsafe conditions or practices.

Work according to good safety practices as instructed, discussed or posted by supervision.

Refrain from engaging in horseplay.

Request and use personal protective equipment provided for specific tasks.

Report all injuries and/or accidents to your supervisor immediately, even if you deem them to be minor.

Refrain from taking unsafe shortcuts in your work practices.

Attend all safety meetings and take an active part in the discussions.

Do not start any work under conditions not believed to be safe without calling these conditions immediately to the attention of the supervisor.



WC Welding Services Inc. Job Competency

1. Objective The measure of effectiveness of a comprehensive safety program relies heavily upon the management support directed toward education, implementation, and enforcement. Since the goal of thi s organization is to provide a complete safe environment, an essential element must be the development of safe working habits. This can only be accomplished by establishing a systematic deliberate approach toward safety facilitated by a written plan that delineates policies and procedures regarding safety. The safety, welfare, and health of all employees is a prime consideration of WC WELDING Emphasis on safety procedures will be followed and "short cuts" or time expedient practices that abridge establi shed safety procedures will be avoided. The total working environment will be continuously evaluated in an effort to reduce the possibility of accidents. The management, supervisors, and employees of WC WELDING must actively participate in support and adherence to safety rules and regulations. Reducing accidents and related insurance costs and unnecessary losses will help us to be more competitive in our industry, thus helping to safeguard our jobs. By providing an organizational chart or list of job titles everyone should know all responsibilities within the organization. 2. Policy All employees shall meet the minimum requirements that have been predetermined for the position he or she has applied. All certifications and/or college degree shall be submitted as proof of qualification to perform the job at task. New or transferred employees will receive further training if determined necessary by their supervisor. The training will be job specific to ensure competency in the related field. The employees direct supervisor must deem the employee competent to perform his daily duties before being allowed to work independently



WC Welding Services Inc. Short Service Employee

1. Purpose: Several customers require the identification and management of Short-Service Employees (SSE),

when working within their facilities. A SSE is any employee of WC WELDING that has less than six months of experience in the same job type. This also would include WC WELDING employees that have been working with WC WELDING for several years, but recently changed jobs or responsibilities. Ultimately, any worker expected to perform duties off-site must have a minimum of six months experience with WC WELDING in the job to be performed off -site.

2. Procedure: 2.1 SSE Work Restrictions 2.1.1 For every SSE there must be at least one mentor, assembled to conduct off -site work for a customer. 2.1.2 Crews of 3 to 5 people, assembled to conduct off-site work for a customer, shall have a maximum of 1 SSE. 2.1.3 Crews 6 and greater, assembled to conduct off-site work for a customer, shall maintain a maximum of 20 % SSEs (1 SSE for every 5 experienced laborers). 2.1.4 Crews containing more than 20% SSEs are not permitted for any off -site tasks completed by WC WELDING for a customer/client. 2.2 SSE Identification 2.2.1 If required, a Customer SSE Form may need to be completed. This form will be provided by the customer and must be completed, submitted and approved by the customer prior to the SSE commencing any activities at their facility or location. 2.2.2 Based on the particular site requirements, SSEs may be required to keep a copy of the SSE approval notice with them at all times when working in the customers facility. 2.2.3 All SSEs working off-site at a customer’s facility or location, shall be identified with a SSE tag to be clipped to their lapel or shirt. This tag shall be readily visible, a bright color and shall have the letters S S E in large font printed on the front. 2.24 SSE’s will wear a bright orange hard-hat with the letters “SSE” printed on it. 2.25 Project Manager, WSM, DSM or on-site supervisor will determine the approval status of the crew. 2.3 Mentoring

All off-site SSEs must be assigned a mentor. A mentor can only be assigned one SSE. A Mentor must have at least 12 months job experience with WC WELDING and within the specific job task being performed. Each mentor must closely supervise his SSE to ensure that safe and quality work is being performed onsite per the scope of work outlined.

2.4 Roles and Responsibilities of the SSE



All SSEs are responsible for ensuring proper identification is worn at all times, maintaining paperwork authorization, working with a mentor and ensuring that any and all concerns or questions raised are answered, and conducting all work in a safe and efficient manner. 2.5 Completion of SSE Program:

All SSE employees will be monitored for his/her 6month term; at the end of this period if the employee has demonstrated sufficient knowledge of his/here workload in an incident-free manner than the title of SSE will be removed.

If the SSE employee has not performed his/her workload in an incident-free manner than WC WELDING requires that the employee continue under the title of SSE until removal is deemed necessary by WC WELDING Management.

Also written consent by any clients is required for that employee to return to work at any of their work locations

3. Monitoring SSE’s

3.1. WC WELDING is responsible for monitoring it’s own SSE personnel as well as any other subcontractor SSE’s which are utilized.

3.2. All subcontractors will adhere to the policies that have been just described



WC Welding Services Inc. Driving Safety

1. Policy All company vehicles are to be utilized for company business only. Vehicles are not to be used for

personal use under any circumstances. Driving to and from an off -site office to a job site is considered

business use. If a vehicle is assigned to you or in your possession, you are the ONLY person authorized to

operate the vehicle. No family members or outside parties are allowed to operate the vehicle.

Employees operating company vehicles are to obey all local and state laws and to drive courteously.

Employees are also responsible and required to pay for all fines incurred due to any parking or moving

violation. All traffic violations or collisions while driving on company time must be reported to the

supervisor immediately. Employees may not operate company or personal vehicles while intoxicated or

under the influence of any controlled substance. Our policy is zero tolerance with respect to alcohol and

substance abuse while operating any company vehicle. Any DUI may not allow you to continue driving

for the company and could lead to termination. If a vehicle is assigned to you, it is your responsibility to

maintain and keep clean the vehicle.

Employees operating company vehicles must be focused and free from distraction. Use of hands-free

device is mandatory if using a cell phone while driving. Also state-specific: Cell phone use is only

permitted to the extent and under the conditions of the federal, state or locale in which you are

operating the vehicle.

Loads shall be secure and shall not exceed the manufacturer’s specifications and legal limits of the

vehicle. Vehicles shall be used for its specific use.

2. Company Driver Qualifications: 1. All employees driving a company vehicle shall have valid driver’s license. 2. Seat belts shall be used by all occupants at all times. 3. No personnel shall ride on a vehicle except within the passenger compartment. 4. Vehicles shall not be re-fueled with the engine running. 5. Leaving a vehicle running while parked is not recommended. If necessary, the vehicle’s

transmission shall be in park (automatic) or in neutral (standard), and the parking brake shall be set.

6. The driver of a company vehicle is responsible for the condition of that unit and shall regularly

inspect the vehicle to assure that it is in good mechanical condition and properly equipped



7. Equipment should not be carried in the occupant’s compartment unless properly secured. 8. Drivers shall not operate a motor vehicle while under the influence of alcohol, illegal drugs, or

prescription or over the counter medications that might impair their driving skills.



WC Welding Services Inc. Incident Investigation

1. General:

If an employee is injured, regardless of the seriousness, he/she must report the injury to

his/her supervisor immediately.

An accident report shall be filled out completely as soon as possible. If possible, the injured person should sign the accident report.

The supervisor will notify the Safety Coordinator as soon as practical of any accident that may have occurred.

All employees conducting accident investigations must be properly trained I investigation techniques and reporting. All items necessary to conduct an investigation will be provided by the employer.

After the accident report has been completed, it is the supervisor's responsibility to investigate the accident as soon as possible after the accident because delays could allow information or items of importance to be removed, destroyed or forgotten. The purpose of this investigation is to obtain information in order to make recommendations for corrective action for the prevention of similar or other accidents, either in the area affected or elsewhere in the organization. Evidence shall be collected, preserved and secured by the supervisor conducting the investigation. Information shall be stored to not be tampered with or disturbed before the investigation is closed out.

The supervisor should:

1. State what unsafe conditions contributed to the accident. Give reason for its existence, if possible.

2. List any unsafe acts involved. Why did they occur? Was it due to lack of skill, poor attitude, misunderstanding, etc.?

3. Secure statements of witnesses, when possible. 4. Take corrective action to prevent reoccurrence of the accident.

After the supervisor knows or learns of any questionable circumstances regarding an injured employee, he/she should notify the Safety Coordinator.

If required OSHA will be contacted within the 8 hours and the client will be contacted within 24 hours of the accident.

2. Reporting Injuries of Employees of Other Companies:

Although we may not be responsible for injuries to employees of other companies that occur on our equipment or on location, it is necessary that we have information on such



injuries on file in the event that any inquiries are made.

The supervisor will make a written report to the Safety Coordinator whenever an employee of another company is injured on our equipment or on location.

This report shall be made immediately after the accident and will include the injured person's name, age, address, employer, and all other factual information concerning the accident and injury, including names and addresses of witnesses.

3. Reporting Vehicle Accidents:

Accidents to company-owned vehicles should be reported promptly and completely.

Do not leave the scene of the accident until police have investigated and completed their report.

If damage is serious, and people are injured, carry out the following procedures:

1. Call or send for an ambulance and/or doctors to care for the injured.

2. Notify the police.

3. While waiting for the police, get all pertinent information such as the name of the driver and owner of the other vehicle, occupants of the other car, witnesses, license number and model of the vehicle.

4. If information is requested, give only your name, address, the company's name

and address.

You must, of course, give your version of the accident to the police, but you are not required to give your version to any other person.

Do not offer to pay for or settle damages to property or injury to persons.

As soon as possible, contact the Safety Coordinator or management giving them full particulars of the accident.

As soon as possible, complete the accident report and return it to the Safety Coordinator.

4. Accident Investigation:

Accident investigations should be a vital part of any safety program. A thorough accident investigation is a necessary tool for the prevention of reoccurring accidents.

It is important to remember that an accident investigation is not a trail to find fault or blame. Its



purpose is to find accident causes so that physical or mechanical improvement or employee training or motivation may prevent similar accidents.

For an accident investigation program to be successful, all accidents should be investigated. An accident is an unplanned happening or event that may or may not result in personal injury, property damage, or both.

Who should make the investigation? The supervisor will be charged with this responsibility. A supervisor who is

responsible for an accident should be interested in preventing future occurrences. The Safety Coordinator may also assist in or perform a supplementary investigation.

When should an investigation be made? An investigation should be made as soon after the accident as possible. Facts

should be gathered while the accident is fresh in the minds of those involved. If possible, every employee who is involved in or witnessed the incident should be questioned. Each individual should be questioned separately to avoid distorted or elaborated facts. When conflicts are discovered in information, the investigator should re-interview individuals separately, to achieve most accurate results. All possible causes should be studied. While gathering the facts of the accident, the investigator should encourage employees to give ideas about how this accident could have been prevented.

5. Preparing a Report:

A report should be prepared describing the investigation in detail. All possible questions regarding the accident should be listed. The following questions should be he lpful in completing the report:

Who was involved? Accidents usually affect more than just the injured person, and very often, more

than just the injured person contributed to the cause. It should also be determined who told the employee to do what he/she was doing? Who trained the employee? Who failed to report an unsafe condition or procedure?

Where did the accident occur? A detailed description of the accident site should be included with the

department. Also, determine if the people involved were where they were supposed to be. Was the equipment in its proper location?

What happened? What was being done? What things were involved? What was the result?

When did the accident occur?

Please not the time and date the event occurred. Was it early or late in the day,



and when did the employee start working?

How did the accident occur? The answer to HOW is a description of people, things, places, and time as they

all combine into a complete event. The exact sequence of events that led to the accident should be reported. This should be carefully written in step-by-step sequence, according to how the accident happened and should include everything that contributed to the sequence of the incident.

Why did the accident occur? Was the injured person inattentive? Poorly trained? Did someone fail to report

an unsafe condition or procedure? Why did, what happened cause an accident? Why did the event result in anything other than an ordinary, everyday occurrence?

Recommend corrective action After evaluating the facts of an accident, most likely the findings will show that

the accident was caused by a combination of unsafe acts and/or unsafe conditions. Recommendations to prevent a reoccurrence should be directed toward correcting all contributing factors leading to an unsafe condition and/or unsafe act. After the report has been submitted to management, it is very important to follow up with the people involved to be sure that recommended changes have been implemented.

6. Summary:

All accidents should be investigated as soon after the accident as possible. All people involved should be interviewed in an effort to determine exactly how the accident occurred. Once all the facts have been put together, a report should be submitted to top management. The report should answer the questions WHO, WHEN, WHERE, HOW, and WHY.



SUPERVISOR'S ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT

Date: Time:

Employee Involved: Age:

Position: Date Employed:

Supervisor: Department:

How long was the employee performing this operation?

Was the employee instructed?

Did the accident result in an injury?

Nature and extent of the injury:

Date injury reported: Was First Aid given?

If so, when and by whom?

How did the accident occur?

Cause of accident:

Recommendations to prevent re-occurrence:

What action has been taken?

Employee Signature: Department:

Supervisor Signature: Date:

Safety Committee Comments:

Signed: Date:

Executive Special Orders:

Signed: Date:



WC Welding Services Inc. Stop Work Authority

1. Purpose: The purpose of the SWA section is to explain to all WC WELDING employees the concept of STOP WORK AUTHORITY, and the importance of running incident free operations (IFO). 2. Policy: It is WC WELDING’s policy that all employees will be trained with this segment prior to being able to work in the shop or field. All employee training is to be signed and documented at the WC WELDING main office including:

1. Employee Name

2. Date of Training

3. Subject Matter

3. Procedures:

Everyone is responsible and authorized to stop any work that does not comply with HSE requirements. Never feel rushed, and take your time!

WC WELDING operates solely on this principal

o If something doesn’t feel right or something doesn’t look right, STOP WORK Have a tailgate meeting and clarify to all involved parties what work is about to

take place Keep all involved parties informed of actions. Work as a team!

Once a job is stopped, operations will not be continued until a tail-gate meeting has occurred and all discrepancies have been resolved.

All SWA interventions will be documented to learn from operational mistakes, and prevent future mishaps from occurring.

4. SWA Steps:

1. STOP- a. Work intervention initiated, b. Coordinated through the supervisor, c. Initiated in a positive manner.

2. NOTIFY- all affected personnel and supervision of the issue



3. CORRECT- the issue 4. RESUME- when issue has been resolved and it is safe to do so.

5. Roles & Responsibilities: 5.1 Field/Shop Personnel:

Personnel’s responsibility is to utilize SWA whenever deemed necessary.

It is important for all WC WELDING personnel to understand that no punishment will be inflicted for using SWA intervention.

Daily make observations and at the end of your shift make note on your SWA card

o In the morning at the safety meeting each employee is expected to have made at least

one observation and noted it on a SWA card and have verbally relayed during the meeting.

o These cards are to be collected by the safety man on location and turned into management.

5.2 Management:

The main responsibility of Management is to insure that wherever the work location may be that an environment of SWA can be used without retribution.

Will review SWA reports to:

Measure personnel participation Determine the type of interventions Type of follow-ups required Trend common issues Improvement Opportunities Share ideas of continual improvement

SWA follow-ups are an important part of the SWA process.

Management will ensure that the SWA Intervention has been addressed by: Making sure that the safety concern has resolved and all

involved parties are satisfied. If necessary any corrective action has been completed. And finally the root cause has been identified.

6. IFO:

This is the most important goal of every job! o TO GET EVERYONE HOME SAFELY AND WORK EFFICIENTLY!

Operators grade contractors in various ways; o Primarily contractors are graded by hours of operation without

recordable incident.



o Each company is either given a color or grade level dependent upon this value that is assigned.

o Operators have certain requirements to use only contractors with certain grades or colors.



WC Welding Services Inc. Personal Protection Equipment

1. Policy The Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Policy and Procedure provides WC WELDING with a means to ensure that its employees wear the proper personal protective equipment to perform their duties and responsibilities safely, and remain healthy while in the workplace. It is the policy of WC WELDING to ensure that its employees are protected while in the workplace. [The web address for a current copy of the standard is www.osha.gov; search “1910.132”; click “1910.132 – General requirements” (1910.133-1910.138)]

2. Procedure

Safety glasses with side shields, goggles and face shields, gloves, aprons, hearing protectors, hard hats, protective clothing, and respiratory devices are provided, used and maintained in a sanitary and reliable condition to ensure that employees are protected from the affects of hazards through absorption, inhalation, ingestion, or physical contact. Prescription safety glasses must have side shields, but are not provided by Scott; protective footwear is not provided but required, and used and maintained similar to other PPE.

1. HSE Department and Safety Officer conduct a hazard assessment of the shops, warehouse, yards, and offices by determining if hazards are present, or are likely to be present, which necessitate the use of PPE (see Hazard Assessment Table attached).

2. HSE Department and Safety Officer certify the assessment in writing and with signature and

date according to the Standard (see Certificate of Assessment attached).

3. HSE Department and Safety Officer identify and select the specific Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) that best provides the protection for each hazard identified in the assessment.

4. Safety Officer discusses the results of the latest hazard assessment and the selection of PPE for

each hazard with the employees, shortly after the annual assessment at a safety meeting or training session.

5. Safety Officer ensures that PPE is issued to employees based on their job duties/activities and

related hazards; newly-hired employees receive their PPE when they first arrive in the workplace.

6. Safety Officer replaces PPE upon verbal request by employees when the PPE is damaged,

defective, or in some way not able to provide the best protection possible.

7. Safety Officer verifies the proper use and condition of PPE by conducting and documenting regular inspections of the employees wearing the PPE in the workplace. Any discrepancies found are corrected immediately; this includes providing PPE, cleaning PPE that is dirty, disposing of defective and damaged PPE, etc.

http://www.osha.gov/



8. Safety Officer takes an inventory of PPE in the workplace regularly to determine if the PPE

stocks are in need of replenishing.

9. If the stocks are in need of replenishing, Safety Officer ensures that the required PPE is purchased and made available the affected employee.

10. If an employee has his/her own personal PPE it is WC WELDING's responsibility to ensure that the PPE is adequate for the job, properly maintained and sanitary.

The assessment and certification are accomplished annually or when significant changes occur in the workplace. The new Hazard Assessment Table and Certificate of Assessment are included with this procedure and place in the appropriate HSE file. Prior to a new job a hazard assessment (HA) will be conducted by the safety officer to determine associated hazards, and the appropriate PPE to be required for that job. This HA will include: Certifier's name, signature(s), date(s) & identifi cation of assessment documents. Once the Safety Officer has selected the associated hazards for that work environment and the appropriate PPE has been chosen, the employee(s) will be explained why that specific PPE is required and the HA will be thoroughly gone over and signed. 3. Training: The HSE Department and Safety Officer ensures that all employees are trained in Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) when first employed and annually thereafter; the HSE Department and Safety Officer accomplish the following:

Review all sections of the Hazard Assessment Table that apply to employees; explains that this Table identifies “what” PPE is necessary, “when” PPE is necessary, and the “limitations” of the PPE specifically for the hazard(s) described.

Review steps to properly don, doff, adjust and wear the PPE.

Review steps to properly care for, maintain, and dispose of the PPE. Explain that PPE is never repaired; PPE or parts of the PPE are replaced.

Explain that damaged PPE is never used.

Explain that the useful life of any PPE is dependent upon its care and maintenance.

Observe employees as they don, doff, adjust, and wear the PPE; ask employees to describe the proper care, maintenance, and disposal of the PPE during the demonstration.

Administer tests to verify understanding of training.

All training is documented and stored at WC WELDING's main office. 3.1 Retraining: Is required when:

The workplace changes

Type of PPE changes Employee demonstrates lack of use

o Improper use o Insufficient skill or understanding



Certification must include: o Employee name o Date of training o Certification subject

The HSE Department and Safety Officer must verify that employees have an understanding of the training and have the ability to use the PPE properly. The Hazard Assessment Table identifies what PPE is necessary to protect employees from the affects of the hazards; the PPE is limited to the use identified for the specific hazard(s), nothing else. Re-training is provided if there are changes in the type(s) of PPE that render previous training or equipment obsolete, or if an employee has not retained the requisite understanding or skill. 4. Hard Hats Company or employee provided hard hats comply with ANSI Standard Specification Z89.1, latest edition. The hard hat is a type that reduces electrical shock; aluminum and “bumper” type hard hats are not acceptable. Hard hats consist of two parts: the outer shell and the suspension. The suspension co nsists of a cradle attached to a headband that keeps the shell away from the head and cushions any blows. Wear the hard hat when working at different levels or where there is a possibility of a falling object that could cause a head injury, and when working in plants.

1. Adjust the suspension and try the fit (repeat) until the hat fits comfortably and does not shift from side to side; the design of the suspension indicates the front of the hat, and the brim of the hat should be parallel with the ground or walking surface when donned.

2. Visually examine the hard hat regularly for any foreign material; if present, wash with soap and water, rinse thoroughly and allow to dry.

3. Visually examine for damage and brittleness; if it is damaged or brittle, if it has dril led or punched holes or if it is painted, dispose of it by separating the shell from the suspension and discarding both separately to discourage others from using it, and obtain a new hard hat.

4.1 Eye and Face Protection Safety Glasses Safety glasses (including prescription safety glasses) must have side shields and meet ANSI Z87.1, latest edition, to be considered “safety glasses”. This code is stamped or embossed on the frame of the glasses. Safety glasses are worn whenever there is the possibili ty of casual or random exposure of the eyes to particles in the air (not usually resulting in injury).

1. Adjust the arms and try the fit (repeat) until the glasses fit comfortably and do not slip off the face; the glasses should feel snug on the face.

2. Visually examine the glasses regularly for foreign material; if present, wash with water and wipe dry with a non-abrasive cloth or paper.

3. Visually examine the glasses for scratches, missing side shields, and damage; if the visibility is bad or if they are damaged, replace them.



Impact and Chemical Goggles Goggles consist of the goggles, one lens and an elastic band, with two adjustment clasps; the band is loosened or tightened to give the most comfortable fit. Impact goggles are worn whenever there is danger of exposing the eyes to flying fragments, particles, or other conditions that could result in injury to the eyes. Chemical goggles with indirect venting are worn when working with and around hazardous chemicals. Only goggles meeting ANSI Z87.1, latest edition, are worn.

1. Adjust the bands and try the fit (repeat) until the goggles fit comfortably and do not slip off the face; the design of the goggles indicates which part fits over the bridge of the nose, and the edges of the goggles should fit tightly against the face.

2. Visually examine the goggles regularly for any foreign material; if present, wash with soap and water, rinse thoroughly and allow to dry.

3. Visually examine the goggles, lens and bands for scratches, damage and brittleness; if the visibility is bad or they are damaged or brittle, replace them.

Employees who wear prescription lenses while engaged in operations that involve eye hazards wear eye protection that incorporates the prescription in its design, or wear eye protection that is worn over prescription lenses without disturbing the proper position of the prescription lenses or the protective lenses. 4.2 Face Shields Face Shields consist of a heat or chemically treated clear plastic shield attached to a headband or hard hat that fits over the head. The headband is adjusted in a manner similar to the hard hat. Face shields are worn whenever there is danger of exposing the eyes and face to flying objects, hazardous chemicals, or other conditions that could result in injuries to the eyes and face. Only face shields meeting ANSI Z87.1, latest edition, are worn.

1. Adjust the suspension and try the fit (repeat) until the headband or hard hat attached to the shield fits comfortably and does not shift from side to side; the face shield is at the f ront, and the brim of the hat or edge of the headband should be parallel with the ground or walking surface when donned.

2. Visually examine the face shield regularly for any foreign material; if present, wash with soap and water, rinse thoroughly and allow to dry.

3. Visually examine the headband/hard hat and shield for scratches, warping, damage and brittleness; if the vision is not clear because of scratches or warping, or the shield, hard hat or headband are damaged or brittle, replace them.

4.3 Gloves (Work, Chemical and Electrical) Gloves provide protection for the hands and forearms, and are worn whenever there is a reason to protect the hands from sharp objects, hazardous chemicals, electricity or other conditions.

1. Try the fit (repeat) until the gloves are close fitting and feel comfortable. 2. Visually examine the gloves regularly for soiling and foreign material; if present, wash, rinse

thoroughly and allow to dry.



3. Visually examine the gloves regularly before each use for excessive wear, holes, tears, and other damage, and replace as needed; replace damaged or soiled gloves.

5. Hearing Protection The plugs protect against hearing loss through air conduction; the muffs protect against hearing loss through air conduction and bone conduction. Hearing protection is worn whenever there is the possibility of an exposure to noise of more than 85 decibels during 8-hours of work (TWA). In selecting and inspecting earplugs, the employee observes the “noise reduction rating” NRR on the package; the higher the rating, the better the protection. Earplugs are disposable or reusable; the type of plug is identified on the package. Disposable earplugs are a “one time use” only item (one day maximum). Employees wash their hands thoroughly before handling earplugs.

1. When inserting ear plugs, twist the plug until it is compressed and narrow, place into the ear point first, release it and allow it to untwist and expand until it conforms to the interior shape of the ear. (Plugs are constructed of foam and conform to the inner ear.)

2. When donning ear muffs, adjust the band connecting the muffs and try the fit (repeat) until each muff fits completely and comfortably over each ear with an air tight seal; if the seal is not air tight, the noise reduction rating is nullified.

3. If used more than once, clean after every use using soap and water or mild disinfecting solution to remove the wax, dirt and/or bacteria; rinse thoroughly and allow to dry.

4. Examine hearing protection before each use; if there is noticeable damage, or i f the material is hard or brittle, replace the protection.

6. Protective Footwear Protective footwear protects against a variety of hazards: impact and penetration hazards, compression hazards, chemical exposure and electrical shock. Protective footwear includes rubber boots, leather boots, steel-toed boots and shoes, and other footwear specifically designed to protect personnel from hazards in the workplace. Safety footwear meets the current ANSI Z-41, latest edition, for 75 foot-pound impact test. The Safety Officer determines the type and/or style of safety footwear appropriate for worksite locations. Impermeable rubber or neoprene boots are worn when working with corrosive or hazardous chemicals.

1. Ensure that the protective footwear is the proper size and fits comfortably when donned. 2. Visually examine the footwear regularly for foreign material (varies with use); if present, clean

using soap and water, rinse thoroughly and allow to dry (rubber footwear) or clean using a damp rag (leather boots, steel-toed boots/shoes).

3. Visually examine the footwear for damage (tears, excessive wear, broken stitching, holes); if damaged, replace the footwear.

7. Protective Clothing (including Aprons, Slicker Suits, Rain Gear) Protective clothing protects against a variety of hazards, including chemical exposure, temperature extremes, burns, lacerations, abrasions, etc.



1. Ensure that all protective clothing is the proper size and feels comfortable when donned; ensure aprons are knee-length and sleeves reach the wrist.

2. Visually examine the protective clothing regularly for foreign material (varies with use); if present, wash, rinse thoroughly and allow to dry.

3. Visually examine the clothing for damage (tears, holes, excessive wear); if damaged, replace the clothing.

4. Employees involved in hot work such as welding, torch cutting, brazing or soldering wear long sleeve shirts, leather gloves, leather boots and long pants with the pant leg fitted over the shank of the boot to prevent hot slag or metal fragments from entering the boot.

8. Welding and Cutting Protective Eyewear Welding helmets, welding face shields, welding goggles and spectacles protect against optical radiation and glare from electric arc welding, gas welding, cutting (torch brazing, torch soldering), and the glare from these activities.

1. The welding helmet, shield and goggles are donned the same as the hard hat, face shield and goggles previously mentioned; the spectacles are donned the same as the safety glasses previously mentioned.

2. Visually examine the helmet for foreign material; if present, wash with soap and water, rinse thoroughly and allow to dry.

3. Visually examine the shield, goggles and spectacles regularly for foreign material; if present, wash with soap and water and wipe dry with a non-abrasive cloth or paper.

4. Visually examine the helmet for damage or brittleness; if the helmet is damaged, either replace the damaged part or dispose of the helmet.

5. Visually examine the shield, goggles and spectacles for scratched lenses, warping, damage or brittleness; if the visibility is poor or the item is in poor condition, replace it.

9. Respirators (including Masks, Filter and Cartridge Respirators, Hoods and SCBAs) Chemical cartridge respirators protect against gases, organic vapors and pesticides; mechanical filters protect against dusts, mists, fumes, smoke and aerosols. Particulate masks filter air-born dust particles. Air-supplying respirators include hoods, egress respirators, SCBAs and air-supplying fixed systems. The fit test is not conducted if there is any facial hair between the skin and the face piece sealing surface. Any type of apparel that interferes with a satisfactory fit is altered or removed. The employee identifies the hazard involved when selecting a respirator and reads the label and application recommendations on the respirator package.

1. Select a respirator size and shape most likely to provide the best fit: a. Hold respirator up to face without positioning and tightening straps. b. Repeat process until respirator feels comfortable on face: position on nose, room for

eye protection, room to talk, and position on face and cheeks. 2. Don the respirator using a mirror to evaluate the fit and posi tioning of the mask:

a. Ensure fit under chin is comfortable. b. Position and tighten straps; set with adequate tension, not overly tight. c. Ensure fit over bridge of nose is comfortable. d. Ensure respirator is properly sized to span between chin and nose.



e. Ensure respirator does not slip off face. 3. Conduct a user seal check, either negative or positive pressure:

a. If cartridge-type respirator, place non-porous paper in cartridge holder to make face piece air-tight.

b. Seat the mask by moving it up and down and side to side while taking slow deep breaths.

c. If seal is broken (air gets in), select another face piece and repeat the process. 4. Perform the following one-minute test exercises while in a normal standing position and without

adjusting the face piece during the tests. If cartridge-type respirator, remove paper and install cartridges; if supplied air respirator, turn on air:

a. Breathe normally without talking. b. Breathe deep and slow, taking care to prevent hyperventilation. c. Turn head slowly from side to side and inhale when head is at each extreme. d. Move head up and down and inhale in the extreme up position. e. Talk slowly but loudly enough to be heard (read, count, etc.). f. Smile or frown (15 seconds only). g. Bend over at the waist as if to touch the toes. h. Breathe normally without talking. i. Answer questions with acceptable results regarding fit; if not acceptable, repeat using

another face piece. 5. Visually examine the respirator for foreign material; if present, wash with soap and water, rinse

thoroughly, allow to dry, then disinfect with a mild antiseptic spray. 6. Visually examine after each use for scratches and damage; if visibility bad or respirator damaged

or in poor condition, replace affected parts or discard and replace respirator.

Note: For additional application and selection information, see the customer information panel on the respirator package and call the technical assistance telephone number indicated. This allows you to identify a specific chemical exposure to the technician who will advise you on the best respirator to use. (see www.3m.com )

If the user exhibits difficulty in breathing during the tests, the user is evaluated medically to determine if he/she is capable of wearing a respirator while performing related duties. Note: Additional fit testing may be required to meet the Standards.

Hazard Assessment Table: Physical and Health Hazards for Employees

Hazard Source Assessment of Hazard Protection

IMPACT/PENETRATION/

COMPRESSION: Chipping, grinding,

driving, machining, drilling, sanding,

operating, chiseling, slipping

Impact tools, compressed air, hand saws,

hand grinders, drill press, pressure washing,

lifting heavy parts

Flying fragments, falling

objects, large chips, crushing,

pinching, striking, particles of

sand, rolling over, falling down

Spectacles with side protection,

protective footwear, hand

protection, hard hats, See notes (1),(5),(6),(10)

http://www.3m.com/



HEAT: Welding, cutting, burning, brazing,

soldering

Electric arc welding, gas welding, gas

cutting, torch brazing, torch soldering

SHOCK: Electricity

Electrical power cords, tools, receptacles

Hot sparks, burns, optical

radiation, splash, slag

High temperature exposure

Face shields, goggles, spectacles

with side protection, screens,

protective clothing See notes (1), (2)

Gloves/mats See notes (1), (2)

CHEMICALS: Acid and chemicals

handling, painting

Lubricants, fuels, paints, corrosives, cleaning

agents, degreasers, batteries

Splash, inhaled vapors,

irritating mists, burns

Respirators, aprons, gloves,

protective clothing, goggles,

footwear

HARMFUL DUST: Dusty conditions,

buffing,

Silica (natural), working under vehicles

Nuisance dust Particulate dust masks, spectacles

with side protection

LIGHT/RADIATION:

Electric arc welding………

Gas welding…………...….

Cutting, torch brazing,

torch soldering…............

Glare……………………...

Electric arc welding, gas welding, gas

cutting, torch brazing, torch soldering

Optical radiation………….…

Optical radiation……….……

Optical radiation………….…

Poor vision………………..…

Typical shades: 10-14

See notes (12) ………….…….. Typical shades:

gas welding 4-8, cutting 3-6,

brazing 3-4 ………………….… Typical shades 1.5-3 ……………..

Spectacles with shaded or special

purpose lenses, as suitable ………………….

Notes:

(1) Care should be taken to recognize the possibility of multiple and simultaneous exposure to a variety of hazards. Adequat e protection against the highest level of each of the hazards should be provided. Protective devices do not provide unlim ited protection. (2) Operations involving heat may also involve light radiation. As required by the standard, protection from both hazards must be provided. (3) Face shields should only be worn over primary eye protection (spectacles or goggles).

(4) As required by the standard, filter lenses must meet the requirements for shade designations in 1910.133(a)(5). Tinted and shaded lenses are not filter lenses unless they are marked or identified as such. (5) As required by the standard, persons whose vision requires the use of prescription (Rx) lenses must wear either protective devices fitted with

prescription (Rx) lenses or protective devices designed to be worn over regular prescription (Rx) eyewear. (6) Wearers of contact lenses must also wear appropriate eye and face protection devices in a hazardous environment. It should be recognized that dusty and/or chemical environments may represent an additional hazard to contact lens wearers. (7) Caution should be exercised in the use of metal frame protective devices in electrical hazard areas.

(8) Atmospheric conditions and the restricted ventilation of the protector can cause lenses to fog. Frequent cleansing may be necessary. (9) Welding helmets or face shields should be used only over primary eye protection (spectacles or goggles). (10) Non-side shield spectacles are available for frontal protection only, but are not acceptable eye protection for the sources and o perations listed for “ impact”.

(11) Ventilation should be adequate, but well protected from splash entry. Eye and face protection should be designed and used so that it provides both adequate ventilation and protects the wearer from splash entry. (12) Protection from light radiation is directly related to filter lens density. See note (4). Select the darkest shade that allows task performance.



WC Welding Services Inc. Noise Exposure & Hearing Conservation

1. Purpose: The purpose of the Noise Exposure/Hearing Conservation Section is to provide all WC WELDING employees with the hazards of working in an environment with high noise levels. Also in this section the means to protect themselves in high noise level situations will be presented and methods to conserve hearing will be presented. 2. Policy: It is WC WELDING’s policy that hearing protection will be worn wherever you see a high noise warning sign, or wherever noise levels are high, as directed by hazard assessment per OSHA 29 CFR 1910.95. Hearing protection is readily available to all personnel in the shop or out in the field free of charge. In this training section all personnel will be trained how to properly use the different types of hearing protection. WC WELDING management will evaluate the specific areas in which hearing protection is to be used to ensure that the proper protection is used at each location. The noise exposure/hearing conservation training will be taught during new hire orientation, annually during a refresher course, and in the event of changes in PPE or position change. This information is available in the employee handbook. In the main office a copy of this program is posted for anyone to read. WC WELDING personnel information is kept in the main office in accordance with OSHA CFR 1910.95(m) – Record Keeping. 3. The records are to include:

Exposure Measurements

Audiometric Tests Name and title

Date of audiogram

Examiners name

Date of last acoustic or exhaustive calibration of the audiometer. Most recent exposure assessment.

Noise exposure measurement records shall be retained for at least 2yrs.

Audiometric test records will be stored for the duration of employment. Records are available to employees, ex-employees, and any other qualified person.

4. Procedures: What is Sound?

Hertz (HZ)- frequency a high or low pitch

Decibel (dB)- the loudness of sound

Humans can hear from 20-20,000hz, and 0-180dB

Anatomy of the Ear:

Ear drum



Ear bone

Cochlea Semi-circular canals

How do we hear?

Outer ear collects sound waves Waves hit ear drum and cause vibrations

Vibrations are sent through the ear bones to the cochlea

Inside the cochlea small hair cells vibrate to different frequencies

Hair cells detect the vibration and send a signal to the brain LOUD SOUND DESTROYS HAIRS CELL AND THEY STOP FUNCTIONING FORVER!

Additional Functions:

Also the semi-circular canals are filled with fluid and hairs When a person tilts his/her head the fluid moves these hair cells and a signal is sent to the brain

This signal is decoded to control a person’s balance. 5. How can we measure noise?

dB’s are measured on a logarithmic scale

Every time you add 5dB you double the sound

An addition or reduction of 5dB causes either an addition or reduction of 100% of noise according to OSHA.

A Sound Level Meter- determines the loudness (dB) of noise at any given moment.

A Personal Dosimeter-

Worn by employees Measures the average loudness in an 8hr work shift (8hr TWA-time weighted average)

Can also measure noise dose 5.1 At 85dB:

50% dose

Train employees

Make hearing protection available Sample for noise levels

Perform hearing tests-develop/maintain a hearing conservation program

Notify employees of results 5.2 At 90dB or higher:

100% dose

We must keep levels at or below 90dB



Or require hearing protection that will keep levels below 90dB *Notes-

If sound monitoring indicates that a crew or person may have been exposed to more than the 8hr time weighted average (TWA) of 85dB, then WC WELDING will establish and maintain an audiometric testing program for all employees, to assist with the identification of potential personnel to be included in the hearing conservation program.

Within 6months of exposure above the AL the employee should have established a valid baseline audiogram.

A baseline may be established within 1yr if a mobile van is used.

In order to establish an accurate baseline all personnel is instructed to have at least 14hrs without exposure to workplace noise.

Hearing protection may be used to meet this requirement. Personnel will be instructed to remain away from areas of loud noise.

6. Hearing Test:

Any employee that is exposed to 85dB or higher will be included in these testing procedures.

Determine a baseline audiogram Annual test to determine if any hearing loss has occurred (Standard Threshold Shift-STS)

STS- a loss of 10dB or more at 2000, 3000, or 4000Hz

If a STS has occurred then that person will be informed of this occurrence in writing within 21days.

In the event that a STS occurs:

PPE will be inspected- replace or modified if necessary

A medical exam may be necessary to quantify the amount of personal injury. 7. Hearing Loss:

Impact- One loud Bang

Cumulative- years of a noisy environment. Tinnitus- ringing in the ears

Presbycusis- hearing loss due to aging. 8. Hearing Protection:

Noise Reducing Rating (NRR)

Ear Plug 25 NRR

Ear Plug 29 NRR Ear Plug 30 NRR

OSHA says that hearing protection is designed to reduce the noise by the NRR, but that is unlikely happen due to:

Leaks in the seal Vibration

Improper insertion



Example:

Exposed to 110dB sound Have 25dB ear plugs

Are you under the 90dB limit? Must include safety factor in calculation

25 – 7 = 18 (7 is safety factor) 18/2 = 9 (take result and divide by 2)

110 – 9 = 101

So we are still exposed to higher than 90dB Hearing very important

Continued exposure to levels of 85dB or higher can cause permanent damage to your hearing.

Wear hearing protection both at home and at work to conserve your hearing.

Choose the proper the NRR rated hearing protection for the job.



WC Welding Services Inc. Respiratory Protection

1. Introduction: Respiratory protective equipment is effective in protecting the employee from the inhalation of hazardous amounts of airborne contaminants. The respirator's effectiveness is dependent on it being properly fitted, cleaned and maintained in good condition, and most importantly, the employee knowing its proper uses and limitations. Employees must wear respiratory protective equipment when the atmosphere in which they are required to work contains hazardous concentrations of toxic contaminants or is oxygen de ficient. Exposure to high concentrations of a toxic substance, even for a short time, can cause serious injury or death: and exposure to lower concentrations of certain toxic substances for long periods of time can cause permanent damage to critical body organs such as lungs, liver and kidneys. Work environments where the oxygen content of the air the employee breathes is below acceptable levels can also be hazardous. Only those employees that have management's approval and have been cleared medically are allowed to enter an atmosphere (using a respirator) which may contain hazardous concentrations of toxic contaminants or is oxygen deficient. Dust or paint masks shall be used for protection during intermittent exposure to objectionable or paint particles. These are not to be used in fumes, gas vapors or in oxygen-deficient atmospheres. Supervisors must make certain that employees fully understand the seriousness of following company procedures on safe practices in the use of respiratory protective equipment. Policy regarding beards, mustaches, sideburns, and prescription glasses for employees who wear respiratory protective equipment A tight face-to-face seal is required for the safe use of most types of respiratory protective equipment. Inhaling can create a negative pressure (vacuum) in the mask and allow contaminants to enter if the seal is not tight. Positive pressure units maintain a slightly higher pressure inside the mask than outside. This is usually sufficient to prevent inward leakage. This feature should be used only as backup protection and not relied upon for primary protection to compensate for a poor seal caused by improper fit, facial hair, glassed, or other preventable causes. Employees who be required to wear respiratory protection e ither in their normal duties or under emergency conditions will not be permitted to have beards, mustaches, or sideburns in the face area contacted by the mask. Employees who must wear prescription glasses and whose normal duties require them to wear full face piece respiratory protection will be provided with units designed for use with glasses. 2. PURPOSE: The purpose of this operating procedure is to ensure the protection of all employees from respiratory hazards, through proper use of respirators. Respirators are to be used only where engineering control of respirator hazards is not feasible, while engineering controls are being installed, or in emergencies.



3. Policy It is WC WELDING’s policy that all personnel will be trained in our Respirator Program during new hire orientation and annually during a refresher course. This course will educate employees on how respirators:

Fit

Are used

Limitations Emergency situations

Wearing

Fit checks

Maintenance & storage Exposure symptoms

To understand the OSHA Standard All personnel who require a respirator will be given training, a medical evaluation, fit test, and respirator unit free of charge. 4. Respiratory Protection Plan:

Designed per Standard 29 CFR 1910.134 (now OSHA 29 CFR 1910.139) Respiratory protection.

Contains procedures pertaining specifically to different work-site locations. CFR 1910.134-

“Assess the workplace and provide respirators when necessary to protect the health of employees.

Develop and implement a written respiratory protection program

Provide training on how to properly use respirators

Provide medical evaluations at no cost to the employee.” Selecting the correct Respirator: What needs to be known?

Chemical & physical properties of the contaminant

Toxicity & concentration of hazardous material

Amount of oxygen present

Limitations & characteristics of available respirators

5.Types of Respirators:



1. Air purifying

2. Supplied Air

3. Combination

6. Medical Evaluations:

Medical evaluations must be provided to determine each employee’s fitness to wear a respirator.

The employee will be provided his/her confidential exam during the normal business day and will be under the influence of no alcohol or drugs of any kind.

These evaluations are required for all respirator users except for employees who voluntarily use dust masks and for the use of escape-only respirators.

Medical evaluation records will be retained for 30 years beyond the employee’s employment.

Any medical evaluation is provided free of charge to all WC WELDING personnel. The exam will be convenient and understandable. All employees have the right to discuss the results with the physician or other licensed health care professionals.

7. Respirators (including Masks, Filter and Cartridge Respirators, Hoods and SCBAs) Chemical cartridge respirators protect against gases, organic vapors and pesticides; mechanical filters protect against dusts, mists, fumes, smoke and aerosols. Particulate masks filter air-born dust particles. Air-supplying respirators include hoods, egress respirators, SCBAs and air-supplying fixed systems. The fit test is not conducted if there is any facial hair between the skin and the face piece sealing surface. Any type of apparel that interferes with a satisfactory fit is altered or removed. The employee identifies the hazard involved when selecting a respirator and reads the label and application recommendations on the respirator package.

7. Select a respirator size and shape most likely to provide the best fit: a. Hold respirator up to face without positioning and tightening straps. b. Repeat process until respirator feels comfortable on face: position on nose, room for

eye protection, room to talk, and position on face and cheeks. 8. Don the respirator using a mirror to evaluate the fit and positioning of the mask:

a. Ensure fit under chin is comfortable. b. Position and tighten straps; set with adequate tension, not overly tight. c. Ensure fit over bridge of nose is comfortable. d. Ensure respirator is properly sized to span between chin and nose. e. Ensure respirator does not slip off face.



9. Conduct a user seal check, either negative or positive pressure: a. If cartridge-type respirator, place non-porous paper in cartridge holder to make face

piece air-tight. b. Seat the mask by moving it up and down and side to side while taking slow deep

breaths. c. If seal is broken (air gets in), select another face piece and repeat the process.

10. Perform the following one-minute test exercises while in a normal standing position and without adjusting the face piece during the tests. If cartridge-type respirator, remove paper and install cartridges; if supplied air respirator, turn on air:

a. Breathe normally without talking. b. Breathe deep and slow, taking care to prevent hyperventilation. c. Turn head slowly from side to side and inhale when head is at each extreme. d. Move head up and down and inhale in the extreme up position. e. Talk slowly but loudly enough to be heard (read, count, etc.). f. Smile or frown (15 seconds only). g. Bend over at the waist as if to touch the toes. h. Breathe normally without talking. i. Answer questions with acceptable results regarding fit; if not acceptable, repeat using

another face piece. 11. Visually examine the respirator for foreign material; if present, wash with soap and water, rinse

thoroughly, allow to dry, then disinfect with a mild antiseptic spray. 12. Visually examine after each use for scratches and damage; if visibility bad or respirator damaged

or in poor condition, replace affected parts or discard and replace respirator.

Note: For additional application and selection information, see the customer information panel on the respirator package and call the technical assistance telephone number indicated. This allows you to identify a specific chemical exposure to the technician who will advise you on the best respirator to use. (see www.3m.com )

If the user exhibits difficulty in breathing during the tests, the user is evaluated medically to determine if he/she is capable of wearing a respirator while performing related duties. *Note(s):

1. Additional fit testing may be required to meet the Standards.

2. Fit testing is required for all employees using negative or positive pressure tight-fitting respirators.

3. Must be repeated annually and whenever a different respirator is used.

8. Types of Testing:

http://www.3m.com/



The employee must be fit tested with the same make, model, style, and size of respirator that will be used.

WC WELDING will ensure that employees use a tight-fitting face piece respirator to pass one of these tests.

1. Qualitative fit test (QLFT)

Used only to fit negative pressure air-purifying respirators that must achieve a fit factor of 100 or less.

QLFT will be completed by temporarily converting the respirator user’s actual face piece into a negative pressure respirator with appropriate filters, or by using an identical negative pressure air-purifying respirator face piece with the same sealing surfaces as a surrogate for the atmosphere-supplying or powered air-purifying respirator face piece.

2. Quantitative fit test (QNFT)

If the fit factor, as determined through an OSHA-accepted QNFT protocol, is equal to or greater than 100 for tight-fitting half face pieces, or equal to or greater than 500 for tight-fitting full face pieces, the QNFT has been passed with that respirator.

Quantitative fit testing of these respirators shall be accomplished by modifying the face piece to allow sampling inside the face piece in the breathing zone of the user, midway between the nose and mouth. This requirement shall be accomplished by installing a permanent sampling probe onto a surrogate face piece, or by using a sampling adapter designed to temporarily provide a means of sampling air from inside the face piece.

Either test shall be administered using an OSHA-accepted QLFT or QNFT protocol.

Fit testing of tight-fitting atmosphere-supplying respirators and tight-fitting powered air-purifying respirators shall be accomplished by performing quantitative or qualitative fit testing in the negative pressure mode, regardless of the mode of operation (negative or positive pressure) that is used for respiratory protection.

Any modifications to the respirator face piece for fit testing shall be completely removed, and the face piece restored to NIOSH-approved configuration, before that face piece can be used in the workplace (all above content from the OSHA standard).

8.1 Taste Threshold Testing:

Helps to evaluate the adequate fit of the respirator.

If the test fails, a different respirator must be tried. 9. RESPONSIBILITY:



The Safety Coordinator is responsible for all facets of this program, has full authority to make decisions to ensure success of this program, and is properly trained to conduct evaluations. This authority includes hiring personnel and equipment purchases necessary to implement and operate the program. The Safety Coordinator will develop written detailed instructions covering each of the basic ele ments in this program, and is the sole person authorized to amend these instructions. WC WELDING has expressly authorized the Safety Coordinator to halt any operation of the company where there is danger of serious personal injury. This policy includes respiratory hazards. Necessary means will be provided to maintain surveillance to ensure that all personnel leave the contaminated area to wash, change cartridges, or if an emergency break-through or resistance occurs. 10. Program Elements: 1. The Safety Coordinator will develop detailed written operating procedures governing the

selection and use of respirators, using the NIOSII Respirator Decision Logic as a guideline. Outside consultation, manufacturer's assistance, and other recognized authorities wi ll be consulted if there is any doubt regarding proper selection and use. These detailed procedures will be included as appendices to this respirator program. Only the Safety Coordinator may amend these procedures.

2. Respirators will be selected on the basis of hazards to which the worker is exposed. All

selections will be made by the Safety Coordinator. Only MSHA/NIOSH-Certified Respirators will be selected and used.

3. The user will be instructed and trained in the proper use of respirators and their

limitations. Both supervisors and workers will be so instructed by the Safety Coordinator. Training should provide the employee an opportunity to handle the respirator, having it fitted properly, test its face piece-to-face seal, wear it in normal air for a long familiarity period, and finally to wear it in a test atmosphere. Every respirator wearer will receive fitting instructions, include demonstrations and practice in how the respirator should be worn, how to adjust it, and how respirators should be worn when conditions prevent a good face seal. Such conditions may be a growth of beard, sideburns, a skull cap that projects under the face piece or to temple pieces on glasses. No WC WELDING personnel who are required to wear respirators, may wear beards. Also the absence of one or both dentures can seriously affect the fit of a face piece. The worker's diligence in observing these factors will be evaluated by periodic checks. To assure proper protection, the face piece fit will be checked by the wearer each time the wearer puts on the respirator. This will be done by following the manufacturer face piece -fitting instructions.

4. Where practicable, the respirators will be assigned to individual workers for their exclusive use. 5. Respirators will be regularly cleaned and disinfected. Those issued for the exclusive use of one

worker will be cleaned after each day's use, or more often if necessary. Those used by more than one worker will be thoroughly cleaned and disinfected after each use. The Safety Coordinator will establish a respirator cleaning and maintenance facility and develop detailed written instructions.

6. The central respirator cleaning and maintenance facility will store respirators in a clean and



sanitary location. 7. Respirators used routinely will be inspected during cleaning. Worn or deteriorated parts will be

replaced. Respirators for emergency use such as self-contained devices will be thoroughly inspected at least once a month and after each use. Inspection for SCBA bre athing gas pressure will be performed weekly.

8. Appropriate surveillance of work area conditions and degree of employee exposure or stress will

be maintained. 9. There will be regular inspection and evaluation to determine the continued effectiveness of the

program. The Safety Coordinator will make frequent inspections of all areas where respirators are used to ensure compliance with the respiratory protection programs.

10. Persons will not be assigned to tasks requiring use of respirators unless it has been determined

by a physician what health and physical conditions are pertinent. The respirator user's medical status will be reviewed annually.

11. Only certified respirators will be used. 12. Only oxygen that is grade D or better is available to be used, and oxygen is not used in

compressed air units. 13. Cylinder must meet DOT requirements. 14. Compressors must be located in a sanitary environment with in-line purification and they must

have a tag present to indicate the date or change out. 15. Also a Carbon Monoxide (CO) monitor must be installed with the alarm set at 10ppm. 16. Check all fittings and general assembly of the respirator unit to ensure safe operation. 11. Respirator Uses & Limitations:

The respirator is the last control measure to ensure safety to the employee.

The respirator is necessary to prevent the inhalation of aerosols and contaminants.

Employees must be familiar with the respirator and its operations.

The respirator must have a proper seal and effective valves in order to perform its job.

12. Information for the respirators utilized in this program includes the following:

Employees must leave the area if the contaminant can be detected by dizziness.



If the respirator is damaged or breathing becomes difficult, the employee must leave the area.

Not all respirators supply oxygen to employees.

The manufacturer’s operation manual should be used as a reference for additional use.

13. In the event of a Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (IDLH) Situation:

An observer will be placed just outside the IDLH environment.

All possible types of communication should be maintained between observer and personnel inside IDLH area.

The observer must be trained in emergency response, and if possible a trained and certified first responder.

Personnel who enter the IDLH site for rescue should notify the observer prior to entering or exiting.

The observer along with any other safety representative should armed with:

Pressure demand or

other positive pressure SCBA’s or

a pressure control or other positive pressure supplied-air respirator with auxiliary SCBA

retrieval equipment that does not increase the risk of entry/exit

14. Respiratory Protection Plan Program Evaluation:

The Respiratory Protection Program should be evaluated annually.

Personnel will be interviewed of his/her assessment of:

the provided training and respiratory gear condition (Including fit, selection, use, inspection, maintenance, and storage).

Factors that to be assessed should include:

Respirator fit



Appropriate respirator selection for the hazards to which the employee is exposed.

Proper respirator use under the workplace conditions the employee encounters.

Proper respirator maintenance.



ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF SAFETY INSTRUCTION OF RESPIRATOR

PROTECTION EQUIPMENT

I, _______________________________________, verify that I have read or have had read to me the company safety rules regarding the use and maintenance of respirator protection

equipment. I understand and completely support these rules.

___________________________________________________

_________________________ Employee Signature Date

___________________________________________________

_________________________ Supervisor Signature Date

Copies to: Personnel file



WC Welding Services Inc. First Aid

1. Purpose: The purpose of the First Aid Section is to educate all WC WELDING employees on what first aid measures are to be taken prior to beginning work. 2. Policy: It is WC WELDING’s policy prior to the start of work; arrangements shall be made for medical facilities and personnel to provide prompt attention to inured employees and for consultation concerning occupational safety, and health matters. 3. Procedures:

An effective means of communication (hard-wired or cellular telephone, 2 way radio, etc…) with 911# access or other emergency response source, and transportation to effectively car for injured workers shall be provided. Communication devices shall be tested in the area of use to assure functionality

The telephone #’s of physicians, hospitals, or ambulances shall be conspicuously posted at a minimum on the safety bulletin board and near the onsite project office telephones. Medical facilities and personnel expected to treat injured employees shall be informed of the nature of the work to be performed and the injuries/illnesses prevalent on such jobsites.

Prior to any job beginning an WC WELDING supervisor will designate at the safety meeting: o Identify all certified First-Responders on -site o A driver/automobile to transport potential injured to hospital o Discuss which hospital/ER is closest and show map of quickest route.

A highly visible map delineating the best route to the nearest medical facility shall be prepared and posted on the safety bulletin board.

4. First-Aid and CPR Availability:

When a medical facility or physician is not accessible within 5 minutes of an injury to a group of 2 or more employees for the treatment of injuries, at least 2 employees on each shift shall be qualified to administer first-aid and CPR.

Individuals who are required to work alone in remote areas shall be trained in first-aid and shall be provided with an effective means of communication to call for assistance in the event of an emergency.

Personnel responsible for providing first-aid will be trained and certified through American Red Cross.

5. First-Aid and Medical Facility Requirements:

All projects, activities, installations, or contracts for which fewer than 100 persons are employed at the site of the work and where neither a first-aid station nor an infirmary is available, shall be



provided with a first-aid kit complying with the criteria contained in ANSI Z308.1. There shall be on first-aid kit for every 25 employees. In addition to the basic fill requirements of the first-aid kit the employer, in consultation with a health care professional or competent first-aid person, shall evaluate the hazards found in the work environment to determine the necessity of optional fill contents.

First-Aid Kits will be easily available and assessable in the event that an incident occurs. Should work activities present any potential exposure to corrosive or toxic materials and rinsing

and flushing station will be provided.

Before commencing the use of epoxy resins, concrete, or other dermatitis-producing substances, employees shall be made aware of the manufacturer’s skin protection recommendations.

Employees designated as responsible for rendering first-aid or medical assistance shall be included in their employer’s blood-borne pathogen program in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1030 and shall:

Be instructed in the sources, hazard, and avoidance of blood-borne pathogens and be provided the training specified in 29 CFT 1910.1030

Be provided with, and shall use and maintain, PPE when appropriate for rendering first-aid or other medical assistance to prevent contact with blood or other potentially infectious materials.

Institute a site-specific blood-borne pathogen prevention program to include a site specific exposure control plan with provisions for engineering and administrative controls, hepatitis B vaccination, PPE, training, record keeping, and a post exposure control plan in the event of a blood-borne exposure. Post exposure protocol shall include a plan to ensure immediate medical evaluation of exposed individuals per current recommendations of the center for disease control for HIV, Hepatitis B, Hepatitis C, and Hepatitis A.

Prior to the start of work outside the employee’s normal geographical area, the employer shall inform employees of parasitic, viral, and environmental diseases endemic to the work location. Common diseases to consider are: Lyme disease, West Nile Virus, Hantavirus, Histoplasmosis, Rocky-Mountain Spotted Fever, Dengue Fever, and Malaria.

For guidance on the potential biological and environmental diseases in the work location, the employer shall consult the CDC travel webpage, the US Army Center for Health Promotion and Preventive Measures website, and the health department in the local area.

Information to be provided to the employee traveling in the areas where such diseases are endemic shall include:

Modes of disease transmission Specific health risks associated with the disease Preventive measures such as available vaccines and PPE Appropriate work practices to prevent contact with infected agents, such as

watering areas prior to dust-generating activities. Vaccine information, to include information on the effectiveness, risk, and e p Safe removal of source where applicable Symptom recognition and medical referral.



6. First-Aid Kits: The performance requirements of the first-aid containers shall be based on the storage area location of the first-aid kit and shall conform to ANSI Z308.1. First-Aid Kits will contain items deemed necessary for the type of work environment they are being used. They will be stored in a weather-proof box with each item individually wrapped. The materials shall be checked prior to going on each job, and once on a job will be they will be checked weekly to ensure that all products remained stocked. Annually management will reevaluate the materials being used in First-Aid Kits to ensure that these materials are readily available. 7. Accident Procedure: In the event of an accident

do not panic,

Calmly notify the supervisor (or first-responder that was identified in the Safety Meeting), and allow he/she to make the necessary decisions.

If the injured worker needs immediate medical attention then either:

The designated person and auto will be used to transport that worker to the closest ER/hospital.

Or Call 911 or the local ambulance service will be used to get the injured medical attention.

If the injured worker just needs minor cuts cleaned and bandaged then the First-Aid Kit will be used.

Incidents or near misses are very important to report. These actions are used to further develop standard operation procedures (SOP). Please report accidents and near misses as soon as they occur.



WC Welding Services Inc. Fire Prevention Plan

1. Fire Hazards The fire hazards of our operations include, but are not limited to, various pieces of machinery, hand and power tools, cleaning solvents, vehicle fuels and oils, flammable and combustible materials, and various wood products. Proper care must be taken in the handling or operation of any of these items. Smoking will only be permitted in the designated smoking area. 2. Ignition Sources Ignition sources include, but are not limited to, forklifts, vehicles, welders, cutting torches, miscellaneous hand power tools, and all machinery and electrical panels and wiring. All ignition sources will be secured and operated in a clear area away from potential fire hazards. Open Yard Storage

Combustible materials will be stored with regard to the stability of piles and in no case higher

than 10 feet.

Driveways, between and around combustible storage piles, will be at least 15 feet wide and

maintained free of accumulations of rubbish, equipment, or other articles or materials.

Driveways will be spaced to produce a maximum grid system unit of 50 feet by 150 feet.

The entire storage site will be kept free from accumulations of unnecessary, combustible

materials. Weeds and grass will be maintained and procedures will be established for periodic

cleanup of the entire area.

The method of piling combustible materials will be solid and in orderly, regular piles.

No combustible material will be stored outdoors within 10 feet of a building or Structure.

Portable fire extinguishing equipment, suitable for the fire hazard involved, will be provided at

convenient, conspicuously accessible locations in the yard area. Portable fire extinguishers,

rated not less than 20 ABC, shall be placed to assure maximum travel distance to the nearest

unit will not exceed 100 feet.

Portable fire extinguishers will be visually inspected monthly and an annual maintenance check.

Indoor Storage

Storage shall not obstruct, or adversely effect means of exit.

Materials will be stored, handled, and piled with regard to their fire characteristics.

Non-compatible materials, which may create a fire hazard, will be segregated by a barrier having

a fire resistance of at least 1 hour.



Materials shall be piled to minimize the spread of fire internally and to permit convenient access

for firefighting. Stable piling shall be maintained at all times. Aisle space shall be maintained to

safely accommodate the widest vehicle used within the building for firefighting purposes.

Clearance of at least 36 inches shall be maintained between the top level of the stored material

and the sprinkler deflectors.

Clearance shall be maintained around lights and heating units to prevent ignition of combustible

materials.

A clearance of 24 inches shall be maintained around the f ire doors path of travel, unless a

barricade is provided, in which case no clearance is needed. Material shall not be stored within

36 inches of a fire door.

Portable fire extinguishing equipment, suitable for the fire hazard involved, will be provided at

convenient, conspicuously accessible locations in the facility. Portable fire extinguishers, rated

not less than 20 ABC, shall be placed to assure maximum travel distance to the nearest unit will

not exceed 100 feet.

Portable fire extinguishers will be visually inspected monthly and an annual maintenance check.

3. Flammable and Combustible Liquids General Requirements

Only approved containers and portable tanks shall be used for storage and handling of

flammable and combustible liquids. Approved metal safety cans shall be used for the handling

and use of flammable liquids in quantities greater than one gallon. This requirement will not

apply to those flammable liquid materials which are highly viscous (extremely hard to pour),

which may be used and handled in original shipping containers.

For quantities of one gallon or less, only the original container or approved metal safety cans

will be used for storage, use, and handling of flammable liquids.

Flammable or combustible liquids shall not be stored in areas used for exits, stairways, or

normally used for the safe passage of employees.

Storage Outside Building

The storage area shall be graded in a manner to divert possible spills away from buildings/other

exposures, or be surrounded by a curb/earthen dike tall enough to impound the total gallons of

liquids stored within the earthen dike. When curbs or dikes are used, provisions shall be made

for draining off accumulations of ground or rain water, or spills of flammable or combustible

liquids. Drains will terminate at a safe location and will be accessible to operation under fire

conditions.



At least one portable fire extinguisher, having a rating of not less than 20 ABC, shall be located

outside of, but not more than 10 feet from the door opening into any room used for storage of

more than 60 gallons of flammable or combustible liquids.

At least one portable fire extinguisher having a rating of no less than 20 ABC shall be located no

less than 25 feet, no more than 75 feet, from any flammable liquid storage area located outside.

Dispensing Liquids

Areas in which flammable or combustible liquids are transferred at one time, in quantities

greater than 5 gallons from one tank or container to another tank or container shall be

separated from other operations by 25 feet distance or by construction having a fire resistance

of at least 1 hour. Drainage or other means shall be provided to control spills. Adequate natural

or mechanical ventilation shall be provided to maintain the concentration of flammable vapor at

or below 10 percent of the lower flammable limit.

Transfer of flammable liquids from one container to another shall be done only when containers

are electrically interconnected (bonded).

Flammable or combustible liquids shall be drained from or transferred into vessels, containers,

or tanks within a building or outside only through a closed piping system; from safety cans, by

means of a device drawing through the top; or from a container, or portable tanks, by gravity or

pump, through an approved self-closing valve. Transferring by means of air pressure on the

container of portable tanks is prohibited.

The dispensing units shall be protected against collision damage.

Dispensing devices and nozzles for flammable liquids shall be of an approved type.

At least one portable fire extinguisher having a rating of no less than 20 ABC shall be available.

Handling Liquids at Point of Final Use

Flammable liquids shall be kept in closed containers when not actually in use.

Leakage or spillage of flammable or combustible liquids shall be disposed of promptly and

safely.

Flammable liquids may be used only where there are no open flames or other sources of ignition

within 50 feet of the operation, unless conditions warrant greater clearance.

Service and Refueling Areas

Flammable or combustible liquids shall be stored in approved closed containers, in tanks located

underground or in aboveground portable tanks.



The tank truck shall comply with the requirements covered in the Standard for Tank Vehicles for

Flammable and Combustible Liquids, NFPA No.385.

The dispensing hose shall be of an approved type.

The dispensing nozzle shall be an approved automatic closing type with a latchopen device.

Clearly identified and easily accessible switch(es) shall be provided at a location remote from the

dispensing devices to shut off the power to all dispensing devices in the event of an emergency.

Heating equipment of an approved type may be installed in the lubrication or service area

where there is no dispensing or transferring of flammable liquids, provided the bottom of the

heating unit is at least 18 inches above the floor and is protected from physical damage.

Heating equipment installed in lubrication or service areas, where flammable liquids are

dispensed, shall be of any approved type for gauges and will be installed at least 8 feet above

the floor.

There shall be no smoking or open flames in the areas used for fueling, servicing fuel Systems

for internal combustion engines, receiving or dispensing of flammable or combustible liquids.

Conspicuous and legible signs prohibiting smoking shall be posted.

The motors of equipment being fueled shall be shut off during the fueling operation.

Each service or fueling area shall be provided with at least one fire extinguisher having a rating

of not less than 20 ABC located so that an extinguisher will be within 75 feet of each pump,

dispenser, underground fill pipe opening, and lubrication or service area.

4. Responsibilities The General Contractor will be responsible for providing fire extinguishers in common areas. Each subcontractor shall be responsible for additional fire protection required by statutes, f or their respective work, and areas including office, storage, and refueling areas. In the event fire extinguishers are discharged, they shall be replaced immediately.

Gasoline and other flammable liquids shall be stored in an OSHA-approved safety can that is

properly labeled with its contents.

All equipment should be shut off before attempting refueling.

There shall be no smoking or open flame in the vicinity of a refueling area. A fire extinguisher

shall be readily available at each refueling area.

Fuel storage areas shall be diked to contain accidental fuel spills.

Storage of materials within 10 feet of fire hydrants is prohibited.



Open fires or burning of debris is prohibited.

If hot work, such as welding and/or cutting, is performed on site, all combustible materials shall

be removed from the area, or protected from spark or flame. The General Contractor may elect

to require a cutting/welding permit if in its opinion operations require it.

A fire extinguisher shall be readily available when there are open flames, welding, and/or

cutting.

If temporary heat is utilized for any scope of work on site, a fire watch during non-work hours is

required. Responsibility for fire watch will be assigned by the General Contractor.

All subcontractors will brief their individuals on fire prevention

Subcontractors will inspect all fire extinguishers on a monthly basis.

WC welding and all Subcontractors are responsible for removal all waste material from their

respective work site daily.

Medical and Fire can be reached by calling 911 .

The PSHM, or his designated representative will frequently inspect the job sites.

5. Training

Initial training shall be provided and documented and given annually thereafter. Training shall familiarize employees with the general principles of fire extinguishers use and the hazards involved in incipient stage firefighting.



WC Welding Services Inc. Emergency Action Plan

1. PURPOSE

An emergency action plan describes the actions employees should take in case of fire or other emergency situations. Most workplaces must have an emergency action plan. For workplaces with more than 10 employees, the plan must be in writing. For low hazard industries, the plan can be simple. Workplaces with hazardous materials will require more complex emergency plans.

2. POLICY

It is the policy of this company to take every possible action to comply with all emergency regulations and protect employees in emergency situations.

3. EMERGENCY PLAN COORDINATOR

Christopher Schmidt is responsible for making sure this emergency action plan is kept up to date, practices, and reviewed periodically.

The Emergency Plan Coordinator can be reached at (570)-677-7848

4. REPORTING PROCEDURES

Type of Emergency How to Report (Phone Numbers)

Fire 911

Explosion 911

Weather 911

Bomb threat 911

Chemical Spill/Leak 911

Violence 911

Medical 911

Other (list) (N/A)

Reporting procedures are posted in all company locations.

5. EVACUATION PROCEDURES

A. Emergency Escape Procedures and Routes

Emergency escape routes shall be assigned to each person and an emergency escape route chart is posted on the workplace bulletin board, indicating by Department, a primary and a secondary exit or escape route in the event emergency evacuation is necessary.

Department supervisors are to insure all employees within their department are familiar with this plan.



B. Employee Accountability Procedures after Evacuations

When an evacuation signal is given, each supervisor involved will assume a station in the vicinity of the designated exit. The supervisor will insure all personnel are evacuated and will provide assistance to employees requiring same.

Once evacuated, all employees will then proceed to a previously designated accounting area for an additional head count by their supervisor. Supervisors will then report their department’s status to the workplace manager or individual in charge. No one is to re-enter the building for any reason until the Fire Department or other responsible agency has

notified us the building is safe for re-entry.

C. Alarm System

The alarm system shall provide warning for necessary emergency action. The alarm shall be capable of being perceived above ambient noise or light levels of noise. The alarms used for different actions should be distinctive and might include horn blasts, sirens, or even public address systems.

Alarm systems for notifying all employees in case of an emergency are:

Action to be taken Alarm system

Pull Alarm Emergency Alarm

E. Severe Weather/Tornado

When a hazardous weather alert is announced, all employees should immediately go to their designated tornado refuge area. All employees should stay in the tornado refuge area until given the all clear sign.

The designated tornado refuge area is Company Conex

F. Training

The following personnel have been trained to assist in the safe and orderly emergency evacuation of other employees.

Name Title Work Area Special Assignment

John Thayne Supervisor Shop(PA) Evacuation

Joe Carnes Supervisor Shop(PA) Evacuation

Jimmy King Supervisor Shop(OH) Evacuation

Josh Cantrell Supervisor Shop(OH) Evacuation

Training is provided for employees when:



1. The plan was initiated

2. Responsibilities change

3. New employees are hired or transferred

4. At least annually

6. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

Employees may use fire extinguishers to fight small infant fires and may only respond in accordance with their level of training.

7. RESCUE AND MEDICAL DUTIES

It may become necessary in an emergency to rescue personnel and perform some specified medical duties, including first-aid treatment. All employees assigned to perform such duties will have been properly trained and equipped to carry out their assigned responsibilities properly and safely.

8. EMPLOYEE TRAINING

Training is provided to employees:

• When the plan is initiated • When employee’s required actions and responsibilities change • When there are any changes to the plan

• Initially for new employees • Refresher training annually

Items reviewed during training:

• Emergency escape procedures

• Escape route assignments • Fire extinguisher locations and training

• Procedures to account for employees • Major workplace fire hazards • Employee training programs • Fire prevention practices

• Means of reporting fire and other emergencies • Alarm system/s • Proper housekeeping • Emergency action plan availability

• Hazardous Weather Procedures • Medical Emergencies



• Any other emergency procedures needed for this facility (bomb threat, workplace

violence, etc).

Emergency drills for fire, evacuation, tornado, medical, etc., will be conducted approximately every six months. Everyone is expected to participate to ensure they know exactly what to do

should an emergency situation arise. Chain of Command and Emergency Phone Numbers

9. CONTACTS

For more information about this plan, contact the Emergency Action Coordinator.

The following people should be contacted during off-hours emergencies (names and phone numbers):

1. Wes Carnes (936)676-69699

2. John Thayne (832)692-7512

3. Jimmy King (601)416-6345

3. Chris Schmidt (570) 677-7848



WC Welding Services Inc. Heat and Cold Stress

Purpose: The primary purpose of this procedure is to define temperature extreme disorders or conditions

and to provide the guidance necessary for protection of WC Welding employees and contractors

from the occurrence of temperature extreme related disorders or conditions.

Responsibilities:

It is the responsibility of the Supervisor to ensure that all employees are continually aware of

possible temperature extreme symptoms so that appropriate action can be taken before it

becomes a medical emergency.

Policy:

GENERAL INFORMATION

Disorders or conditions associated with work conducted in temperature extreme conditions

can be controlled through proper planning and effective monitoring of personnel. The added

burden of PPE required for hazardous waste operations in a temperature extreme condition

increases the potential for worker disorders or conditions that can result in injury or illness. Factors that could affect a worker's ability to function in extreme temperatures include, but

are not limited to:

• Physical fitness

• Acclimatization • Age • Obesity • Alcohol consumption • Drug use • Infections

• Disease

The Site Specific Health and Safety Plan should contain whether extreme temperature condition exists. The use of the medical surveillance program can identify those employees with pre-existing health conditions that could be adversely effected during extreme

temperatures. Workers should be pre-screened prior to beginning operations. Once baseline values are obtained, they can be used to effectively assess the health of workers during and immediately after operations (e.g., pulse, blood pressure, body temperature, body weight).

Personnel who are not required to wear PPE are not immune to the potential hazards of heat-related disorders or conditions and should be included in the monitoring program.

HEAT STRESS

Increased physical demands on workers occur as a result of increased air temperature and

humidity. Wearing PPE also increases the demands on workers, due to:



• Added weight of the equipment

• Reduced visibility • Reduced mobility • Loss of the body's natural cooling processes

• Increased energy consumption by the body • Lack of sufficient fluid replenishment

Other factors that influence the occurrence of heat related disorders or conditions include

environmental conditions, clothing, workload, and the individual characteristics of workers.

Assessing Heat Stress Conditions

The guidance for workers wearing permeable clothing is specified in the current version of the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists' (ACGIH) Threshold Limit Values for Heat Stress. If actual clothing differs from the ACGIH standard ensemble in insulation value and/or wind and vapor permeability, changes should be made to the monitoring requirements and work rest period to account for these differences. The Table below provides the suggested frequency of physiological monitoring for fit and acclimatized workers. The ACGIH TLV guide

contains a separate table for workers wearing semipermeable and impermeable encapsulating clothing. In these situations, refer to Table I.

TABLE I Suggested Frequency of Physiological Monitoring for Fit and Acclimatized Workers

Adjusted Temperature Normal Work Clothing Impermeable Clothing Calculation

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - 90 F (32.2 C) or After each 45 minutes After each 15 minutes

above of work of work

87.5 - 90.0 F After each 60 minutes After each 30 minutes

(30.8 - 32.2 C) of work of work







PHYSIOLOGICAL MONITORING OF WORKERS

The following physiological readings should be taken to assess employees and to



determine the work-rest cycle:

Heart rate - Count the radial pulse as early as possible in the rest period to ensure a

more accurate reading. If the heart rate exceeds 110 beats per minute at the beginning of the rest period, shorten the next work cycle by one-third and keep the

rest period at the same length. If, at the end of the following work period, the heart rate still

exceeds 110 beats per minute, shorten the work period again by one-third.

Oral Temperature - The utilization of oral temperature applies to the time immediately

after the worker leaves the contamination reduction zone. Using a clinical thermometer, take the temperature for three minutes. If the oral temperature exceeds

99.6 F (37.6 C), shorten the next work cycle by one-third, without a change to the rest period. If the oral temperature still exceeds 99.6 F (37.6 C) at the end of the following

work period, shorten the next work cycle by one-third. Do not permit a worker to

perform duties requiring a semipermeable or impermeable garment if the oral

temperature exceeds 100.6 F (38.1C).

Ear Canal Readings - Ear canal readings are a valid method to monitor the temperature

of workers who remain in the contamination reduction zone.

Body Water Loss - Measure body weight to see if enough fluids are being consumed

to prevent dehydration.

TRAINING OF WORKERS

Worker training is an essential element of an effective temperature extreme

program. Workers who are able to identify the symptoms of early heat stress will be

able to prevent heat related disorders or conditions and possible death to themselves and their fellow workers. Workers should be trained initially and

continually reminded during safety meetings to identify the following symptoms of heat stress:

Heat Rash - Caused by continuous exposure to heat or humid air. Can be recognized

by the occurrence of small red pimples on the skin. Typically found in sensitive areas

of the body where the potential for rubbing can occur (e.g., underarm, groin area).

Heat Cramps - Caused by heavy sweating and inadequate electrolyte replacement.

Signs to look for include muscle spasms and pain in the extremities, such as hands and

feet, and in the abdomen.

Heat Exhaustion - Caused by increased stress on various parts of the body, including inadequate blood circulation due to cardiovascular insufficiency or dehydration.



Signs to look for include: • Pale, cool, moist skin

• Heavy sweating

• Dizziness • Nausea

• Fainting

Heat Stroke - This is the most serious of all temperature related disorders or conditions since temperature regulation fails and the body temperature rises to critical levels. Immediate action should be taken to cool the body before serious injury or death occurs. Competent medical help should be obtained. Signs to look for include:

• Red, hot, usually dry skin

• Lack of or reduced perspiration

• Nausea • Dizziness and confusion • In extreme situations, coma

COLD STRESS

Extreme low temperatures may not be the only element necessary to create the potential for

cold exposure disorders or conditions; strong wind accompanied by cold temperatures can lead

to these types of disorders or conditions.

ASSESSING COLD STRESS CONDITIONS

The windchill factor is the cooling effect of any combination of temperature and wind velocity or

air movement. The windchill index (Table II) should be consulted when planning for exposure to low temperatures and wind. The windchill index does not take into account the specific part of

the body exposed to cold, the level of activity, which affects body heat production, or the amount of clothing being worn.



TABLE II: Windchill Index

ACTUAL THERMOMETER READING (F)

Wind Speed

in mph 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 ------------------------------------------------------------------------

EQUIVALENT TEMPERATURE (F) -------------------------------------------------------------

calm 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 -20 | -30 -40

|------ |

5 48 37 27 16 6 -5 -15 | -26 -36 -47

|------ |

10 40 28 16 4 -9 -21 | -33 -46 -58 -70 |----- | |-----

15 36 22 9 -5 -18 | -36 -45 -58 -72 | -85 |----- | | ------ |

20 32 18 4 -10 | -25 -39 -53 -67 | -82 -96

| |------ |

25 30 16 0 -15 | -29 -44 -59 | -74 -88 -104 | |

30 28 13 -2 -18 | -33 -48 -63 | -79 -94 -109 | |

35 27 11 -4 -20 | -35 -49 -67 | -82 -98 -113 | |

40 26 10 -6 -21 | -37 -53 -69 | -85 -100 -116 --------------------------------------------------------------------- Over 40 | LITTLE | INCREASING | GREAT

(little | DANGER | DANGER | DANGER

added | (for properly clothed | |

effect) | person) | (Danger from freezing of exposed flesh) ---------------------------------------------------------------------

The human body senses "cold" as a result of both the air temperature and the wind velocity.

Cooling of exposed flesh increases rapidly as the wind velocity goes up. Frostbite can occur at

relatively mild temperatures if wind penetrates the body insulation.

The generally recognized cold disorders or conditions are frostbite and hypothermia.

Contributing factors to these disorders or conditions are:



• Exposure to humidity

• High winds

• Contact with wetness • Inadequate clothing • Poor worker health

The physical conditions that effect cold exposure disorders or conditions are the same as those

associated with heat disorders or conditions, such as physical fitness, alcohol or drug use, and

disease.

The presence of dead air space between the warm body and clothing and the outside air is essential. Many layers of relatively light clothing with an outer shell of windproof material

maintains body temperature much better than a single heavy outer garment worn over ordinary indoor clothing. The more air cells each clothing layer has, the more efficient it

insulates against body heat loss. Clothing also needs to allow some venting of perspiration. In addition to adequate clothing, whenever possible, full use should be made of windbreaks and heat tents.

Table III gives the recommended time limits for working in various low temperature ranges.

TABLE III

Maximum Daily Time Limits for Exposure at Low Temperatures

Temperature Range Maximum Daily Exposure -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Celsius Fahrenheit

0 to -18 30 to 0 No limit, providing that the person is properly clothed.

-18 to -34 0 to -30 Total work time: 4 hours. Alternate 1hour in and 1 hour out of the

low-temperature area.

-34 to -57 -30 to -70 Two periods of 30 minutes each at least 4 hours apart. Total low

temperature work time allowed is 1 hour.

-57 to -73 -70 to -100 Maximum permissible work time is 5 minutes during an 8-hour working day. At these extreme temperatures, completely enclosed headgear,

equipped with a breathing tube running under the clothing and down the

leg to preheat the air, is recommended.

TRAINING OF WORKERS

Early recognition of the symptoms of cold exposure stress is essential in preventing serious or permanent disorders or conditions. Workers and managers involved in cold weather operations



should be adequately trained to recognize the following conditions and related symptoms:

Hypothermia - The first symptoms of this condition are uncontrollable shivering and the

sensation of cold, irregular heart beat, weakened pulse, and change in blood pressure.

Severe shaking of rigid muscles may be caused by a burst of body energy and changes in the

body's chemistry. Vague or slow and slurred speech, memory lapses, incoherence, and drowsiness are some of the additional symptoms. Symptoms noticed before complete collapse are cool skin, slow and irregular breathing, low blood pressure, apparent exhaustion, and fatigue even after rest.

As the core body temperature drops, the victim may become listless and confused, and may

make little or no attempt to keep warm. Pain in the extremities can be the first warning of dangerous exposure to cold. If the body core temperature drops to about 85ø F, a significant and dangerous drop in the blood pressure, pulse rate, and respiration can occur. In extreme cases, death will occur.

Frostbite - Frostbite can occur, in absence of hypothermia, when the extremities do not receive sufficient heat from central body stores. This can occur because of inadequate circulation

and/or insulation. Frostbite occurs when there is freezing of fluids around the cells of the body tissues due to extremely low temperatures. Damage may result, including loss of tissue around

the areas of the nose, cheeks, ears, fingers, and toes. This damage can be serious enough to require amputation or result in permanent loss of movement.

The potential for both heat and cold related disorders or conditions can occur in many

common situations. Cold early morning temperatures can give way to warm daily

temperatures, resulting in heavy perspiration within protective clothing. As temperatures

cool again in the evening, the potential for cold related disorders or conditions can occur. Managers should be aware of the potential for this occurrence and should monitor

workers accordingly.

PREVENTION MEASURES FOR HEAT AND COLD STRESS

Preventive measures are the best approach to avoiding the types of disorders or conditions

associated with temperature extreme conditions. Many of the measures are similar for both heat and cold extremes. Proper training and preventive measures are critical in temperature

extreme conditions to avert illness, injury and potential loss of worker productivity.

The following steps should be followed in order to ensure workers involved in temperature

extreme conditions are properly protected:

1) Closely monitor and modify/adjust work-rest work schedules

2) Maintain proper worker body fluids in both cold and hot weather by:

• Maintaining drinking water temperature at 50 to 60 F (10 to15.6 C),

• Urging workers to drink 16 ounces of fluid before beginning work, and urging

workers to drink at least 4 ounces of water every 15 to 20 minutes at each



monitoring break (1 to 1.6 gallons of water a day is recommended);

3) Weigh workers before and after each work session to determine if fluid intake and

replenishment is adequate.

4) Encourage workers to maintain an optimal level of physical fitness

5) Encourage workers to maintain normal/constant weight (significant weight loss can be a

strong indication of physical problems).

6) Advise workers that heavy alcohol intake may significantly increase their risk of heat

stroke (i.e., dehydration) and drinking alcohol on WC Welding jobsites is prohibited.

7) Use cooling/heating devices that aid in natural body heat exchange, such as heating or

cooling tents, showers or hoses, and cooling vests, jackets, or suits.

ACCLIMIZATION OF WORKERS

Site Supervisors need to be aware of the importance of acclimatizing workers before they can be added to a regular work schedule. Although the phenomenon of acclimatization is an

important consideration for heat stress, it has not been recognized for cold stress. The added burden of PPE may increase the time to acclimatize workers. The worker's ability to physiologically adjust to work under temperature extreme conditions affects his/her ability to

perform work. Acclimatized workers have lower heart rates and body temperatures, sweat more profusely than unacclimatized workers, and are, therefore, better able to function in these specific working conditions.

Acclimatization can occur within a few days. NIOSH recommends a progressive, 6-day acclimatization period for workers before allowing them to perform a full work load. Under this

regimen, the first day of work should be conducted using only 50% of the anticipated workload

and exposure time. This level should be increased 10% each day for the following 5 days.

Workers can lose their acclimatization so the work regimen will need to be adjusted to

accommodate these changes



WC Welding Services Inc. Fatigue Management

1. Purpose: The purpose of the Fatigue Management Section is to educate all WC WELDING employees on what fatigue is and to lay out a procedure to minimize and maintain fatigue in the workplace. 2. Policy: It is WC WELDING’s policy that no employee is to work longer than 12 hours without taking a break for at least 4 hours. 3. Procedures: Major Legislative Requirement:

OSHA Safe Work Act (1985) Section 21 Provide and maintain so far as practicable a working environment that is safe and

without risks.

Fatigue Management Training is taught during New-Hire Orientation and annually a refresher course is scheduled to implement any changes that may have been made.

What is fatigue?

The temporary inability, decrease in ability, or strong disinclination to respond to a situation, because of previous over-activity either mental or physical.

Weariness from bodily or mental exhaustion, a cause of weariness, or labor exertions. 4. Symptoms of Fatigue:

Subjective feelings or weariness, solemness, and distaste for work.

Sluggish thinking

Reduced alertness Poor and slow perception

Unwillingness to work

Decline in both bodily and mental performance. 5. Effects of Fatigue:

Can cause safety hazards particularly in safety critical jobs-

Loss of concentration, awareness

Long term effects can include: Cardiovascular disease

Gastrointestinal disorders

Social and Family Life- Work schedules may influence the time available for employees to participate in family



and social events. 6. Methods in which to manage Fatigue:

AS/NZS 4360: Risk Assessment Define the organizational and strategic context in which the activity will occur.

Identification and documentation of the physical and legislative environments, various stakeholders, political environment.

Establish the goals of the risk assessment study Scope and limits of any analysis

Specific nature of the risk management study

WC WELDING will provide ergonomic devices to assist employees to control fatigue such as:

o Anti-fatigue mat o Lift assist devices

Employees will be allowed a 15minute break every 2hrs during a standard work shift.

An annual evaluation of fatigue management will be performed to ensure that a safe work environment is being achieved.

Reporting fatigue is a very important factor in minimizing or eliminating it entirely from the work place – WC WELDING employees will never be put in a situation where they are not given the opportunity to take a break or rest. It is the responsibility of employees to report fatigue or lack of mental acuity to supervision. It is the supervisors role to recognize these conditions and take appropriate actions to prevent them.

Management uses these fatigue observations to make the necessary changes to the fatigue management plan.

7. Hazards and Risk Associated with Fatigue:

Hazard- the potential to cause harm, ill health or injury, damage to property, plant, products or the environment, production losses or increased liabilities.

Risk- a combination of likelihood of harm (or potential harm)

Consequence- the (potential) ultimate outcome of the release of the hazard.

Risk Treatment- selection and implementation of appropriate options for dealing with risk, in this case fatigue management.

8. Identify Hazard and Potential Risk Factors:

The structure of work rosters

Workload Irregular and unplanned work schedules

Potential call outs for break downs

Shift length, night shift, extended work routines Planned and unplanned overtime

Proximity of accommodation or residence

Method of travel to and from work-risk of commuting incidents



Environmental factors- exposure to heat, humidity, noise, vibration

Increased exposure to other hazards (noise, dust, etc…) Access to balanced diet and rest

Employees may not use over the counter drugs, prescription drugs or any other substance that may increase fatigue or make them unable to perform his/her job safely.

9. Fatigue Preventive Methods:

Primary Prevention:

Creating a healthy place of work and controlling work organizational risk factors

Secondary Prevention: Focuses on improving the goodness of fit between people and tasks.

Tertiary Prevention:

Focuses on helping the person who is regularly exposed to the risk factors and is suffering the effects of fatigue.

Primary Prevention: Designing work so that it is safe and healthy.

Creating a workplace so that the work is within a person’s capabilities

Creating flexible, balanced work schedules Providing family friendly work

Hazard identification systems for the identification and reporting of risk factors. Secondary Prevention: Improving the fit between the person and the job.

Providing training

Providing mentoring and support

Providing feedback Assessing workload- ability match

Moving the person to a more suitable job

Using best practice personnel procedures Monitoring of issues

Tertiary Prevention: Helping the individual cope.

Controlling the timing and duration of the exposure to the risk factors

Inducting/training persons into ways of dealing with the risk factors.

Training in time management Temporary reduction of workloads

Providing contact details for support services.



To further help minimize and cope with fatigue it is a good idea to develop a Healthy Work Program (HWP). A HWP is a planned and measurable program that aims to identify:

A. Features of healthy work B. Workplace risk factors that reduce people’s coping abilities

A HWP develops measures to manage risk factors and involves:

Confirming good things about work

Identifying further good things that can be added to work identifying risk factors in the workplace

Developing ways to eliminate isolate or minimize those risk factors.

Training and supporting employees to deal with risk factors

Monitoring the success of the program Revising the program if necessary.



WC Welding Services Inc. Workplace Back Safety

1. Written Program. WC Welding Services, Inc. will review and evaluate this standard practice

instruction:

• On an annual basis • When changes occur to 29 CFR, that prompt revision of this document • When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document • When there is an accident or close-call that relates to this area of safety • Review the program any time these procedures fail Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of

work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals and objectives.

2. Training.

2.1 Types of training. Supervisors will determine whether training required for specific jobs will be conducted in a classroom or on-the-job. The degree of training provided shall be determined

by the complexity of the job and the associated hazards.

2.1.1 Initial Training. Prior to job assignment, this employer shall provide training to ensure that the hazards associated with predesignated job skills are understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application and usage of work place procedures and

equipment. are acquired by employees. The training shall include the following:

2.1.1.1 Each affected employee shall receive training in the recognition of back injury hazards

involved with a particular job, and the methods and means necessary for safe work.

2.1.1.2 Training course content. All new and current workers, who work in areas where there is reasonable likelihood of back injury. will be kept informed through continuing education

programs.

Initial and refresher training will, as a minimum cover the following:

• Back hazards associated with the job. • Lifting techniques. • Potential health effects of back injury. • Back injury precautions. • Proper use of protective clothing and equipment. • Use of engineering controls.

2.1.1.3 Responsibility. Employees are responsible for following proper work practices and control procedures to help protect their health and provide for the safety of themselves and fellow employees, including instructions to immediately report to the Site Safety Officer any

significant back injury.

2.1.2 Refresher Training. Scheduled refresher training will be conducted on an annual basis.



2.1.2.1 Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in equipment or processes that present a new

hazard, or when their work takes them into other hazard areas.

2.1.2.2 Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in

the employee's knowledge of known hazards, or use of equipment or procedures.

2.1.2.3 The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new equipment, new

lifting procedures or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary.

2.1.3 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain a synopsis of the training conducted,

each employee's name, and dates of training.

3. New Employee Acclimatization Period. Supervisors will ensure that new or transferred employees are allowed an appropriate acclimatization period. New and returning employees will be gradually integrated into a full work schedule as appropriate for specific jobs and individuals. Employees will be assigned to an experienced trainer for job training and evaluation during this period. Employees

reassigned to new jobs should also have an acclimatization period.

Important - Supervisors will closely monitor employees that fall into this category throughout their

acclimatization period.

4. Back Disorder Risk Factors. Identification of hazards will be based on risk factors such as, conditions of a job process, work station, or work methods that contribute to the risk of developing problems associated with back disorders. Not all of these risk factors will be present in every job containing stressors, nor is the existence of one of these factors necessarily sufficient to cause a back injury.

Supervisors will use the following known risk factors to isolate and report suspected problem areas:

4.1 Back Disorder Risk Factors.

• Repetitive and or prolonged activities • Bad body mechanics such as

•• Continued bending over at the waist •• Continued lifting from below the knuckles •• Continued lifting above the shoulders •• Twisting at the waist •• Twisting at the waist while lifting •• Lifting or moving objects of excessive weight •• Lifting or moving 'object of asymmetric size •• Prolonged sitting with poor posture •• Lack of adjustable

••• Chairs ••• Footrests ••• Body supports ••• Work surfaces at work stations



•• Poor grips on handles •• Slippery footing •• Frequency of movement •• Duration and pace •• Stability of load •• Coupling of load

••• Type of grip •• Reach distances •• Work height

5. Job Hazard Analysis. Job hazard analyses will be routinely performed by a qualified person(s) for jobs that put workers at risk. This analysis will help to verify risk factors and to determine if risk factors for a

work position have been reduced or eliminated to the extent feasible.

5.1 The following personnel or job positions are qualified to perform job hazard analysis surveys

for this company.

Personnel Qualified to Perform Job Hazard Analysis

Name Title (1) Wess Carnes Program Manager (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 5.2 Work Station Analysis. Work station analysis will be conducted to identify risk factors

present in each job or workstation.

5.2.1 Upper extremities. For upper extremities, three measurements of repetitiveness will be

reviewed, they are:

5.2.1.1 Total hand manipulations per cycle.

5.2.1.2 The cycle time.

5.2.1.3 The total manipulations or cycles per work shift.

5.2.2 Force measurements. Force measurements will be noted as an estimated average effort, and a peak force (unless quantitative measurements are feasible). They will be recorded as

"light," "moderate," or "heavy."

5.2.3 Tools. Tools will be checked for excessive vibration and weight.

(The NIOSH criteria document on hand/arm vibration, should be consulted.)

5.2.4 The tools, personal protective equipment, and dimensions and adjustability of the work station will be noted for each job hazard analysis.



5.2.5 Postures. Hand, arm, and shoulder postures and movements will be assessed for levels of

risk.

5.2.6 Lifting Hazards. Work stations having tasks requiring manual materials handling will have

the maximum weight-lifting values calculated.

(The NIOSH Work Practices Guide for Manual lifting, should be used for basic calculations.)

5.2.7 Videotape Method. The use of videotape, where feasible, will be used as a method for analysis of the work process. Slow-motion videotape or equivalent visual records of workers performing their routine job tasks will used where practical to determine the demands of the task on the worker and how each worker actually performs each task. A task analysis log/form

will be used to break down the job into components that can be individually analyzed.

6. Hazard Prevention and Control. This company understands that engineering solutions, where feasible, are the preferred method of control for ergonomic hazards. The focus of this program is to make the job fit the person, not to make the person fit the job. This is accomplished whenever possible by redesigning the work station, work methods, or tool(s) to reduce the demands of the job, including high force, repetitive motion, and awkward postures. This program will whenever possible research into currently available controls and technology. The following examples of engineering controls will be used as

models for work station design and upgrade.

6.1 Work Station Design. Work stations when initially constructed or when redesigned will be adjustable in order to accommodate the person who actually works at a given work station; it is not adequate to design for the "average" or typical worker. Work stations should be easily adjustable and either designed or selected to fit a specific task, so that they are comfortable for the workers using them. The work space should be large enough to allow for the full range of required movements, especially where

hand held tools are used. Examples include:

6.1.1 Adjustable fixtures on work tables so that the position of the work can be easily manipulated.

6.1.2 Work stations and delivery bins that can accommodate the heights and reach limitations of

various-sized workers.

6.1.3 Work platforms that move up and down for various operations.

6.1.4 Mechanical or powered assists to eliminate the use of extreme force.

6.1.5 Suspension of heavy tools.

6.1.6 The use of diverging conveyors off of main lines so that certain activities can be performed at

slower rates.

6.1.7 Floormats designed to reduce trauma to the legs and back.

6.2 Design of Work Methods. Traditional work method analysis considers static postures and repetition rates. This will be supplemented by addressing the force levels and the hand and arm postures involved. The tasks will be altered where possible to reduce these and the other stresses. Examples of methods

for the reduction of extreme and awkward postures include the following:



6.2.1 Enabling the worker to perform the task with two hands instead of one.

6.2.2 Conforming with the NIOSH Work Practices Guide for Manual Lifting.

6.3 Excessive force. Excessive force in any operation can result in both long term problems for the worker and increased accident rates. Ways to reduce excessive force will be continually emphasized by

first line supervisors and employees. Examples of methods to reduce excessive force include:

6.3.1 The use of automation devices.

6.3.2 The use of mechanical devices to aid in removing scrap from work areas.

6.3.3 Substitution of power tools where manual tools are now in use.

6.3.4 The use of articulated arms and counter balances suspended by overhead racks to reduce

the force needed to operate and control power tools.

6.4 Repetitive motion. All efforts to reduce repetitive motion will be pursued.

Examples of methods to reduce highly repetitive movements include:

6.4.1 Increasing the number of workers performing a task.

6.4.2 Lessening repetition by combining jobs with very short cycle times, thereby increasing

cycle time. (Sometimes referred to as "job enlargement.")

6.4.3 Using automation where appropriate.

6.4.4 Designing or altering jobs to allow self-pacing, when feasible.

6.4.5 Designing or altering jobs to allow sufficient rest pauses.

7. Administrative Controls. Company administrative controls will be used to reduce the duration, frequency, and severity of exposures to ergonomic stressors which can cause back injury. Examples of administrative controls include the following:

7.1 Reducing the total number of repetitions per employee by such means as decreasing

production rates and limiting overtime work.

7.2 Providing rest pauses to relieve fatigued muscle-tendon groups. The length of time needed

depends on the task's overall effort and total cycle time.

7.3 Increasing the number of employees assigned to a task to alleviate severe conditions,

especially in lifting heavy objects.

7.4 Using job rotation, used with caution and as a preventive measure, not as a response to symptoms. The principle of job rotation is to alleviate physical fatigue and stress of a particular set of muscles and tendons by is utilized, the job analyses must be revie wed to ensure that the

same muscle tendon groups are not used when they are rotated.

7.5 Providing sufficient numbers of standby/relief personnel to compensate for foreseeable

upset conditions on the line (e.g., loss of workers).



7.6 Job enlargement. Having employees perform broader functions which reduce the stress on

specific muscle groups while performing individual tasks.

8. Safe Lifting Techniques. First, use a pushcart or other material -handling device Second, ask a co-worker for help if no device is available! If you must lift alone here are some tips. Before starting to lift or carry anything, check your entire walkway to make sure your footing will be solid. Your shoes should give you good balance, support and traction. Keep loads as close to your body as possible. The following

situations show basic lifting techniques to avoid injury:

8.1 Lifting or lowering from a high place

• Stand on a platform instead of a ladder • Lift the load in smaller pieces, if possible • Slide the load as close to yourself as possible before lifting • Grip firmly and slide it down • Get help when you need it to avoid injury

8.2 Lifting from hard-to-get-at places

• Get as close to the load as possible • Keep back straight, stomach muscles tight • Push buttocks out behind you • Bend your knees • Use leg, stomach, and buttock muscles to lift -- not your back

8.3 Lifting drums, barrels, and cylinders

• Use mechanical assists • Be aware that loads can shift • Get help if load is too heavy

8.4 Awkward objects

• Bend your knees with feet spread • Grip the top outside and bottom inside corners • Use your legs to lift, keeping back straight

8.5 Shoveling

• Make sure your grip and balance are solid • Tighten your abdomen as you lift • Keep the shovel close to your body • Use the strength of your thigh muscles to bring you to an upright position • Increase your leverage by keeping your bottom hand low and toward the blade.



8.6 General safety tips

• Don't lift objects over your head • Don't twist your body when lifting or setting an object down • Don't reach over an obstacle to lift a load • Pace yourself to avoid fatigue



WC Welding Services Inc. Lock out Tag out

1. Written Program:

WC WELDING will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.147, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to

establish clear goals, and objectives.

2. General Requirements:

WC WELDING will establish lockout/tagout procedures through the use of this document. This standard practice instruction covers the servicing and maintenance of machines and equipment in which the unexpected energization or start up of the machines or equipment, or release of stored

energy could cause injury to employees.

2.1. Application. This instruction applies to the control of energy during servicing and/or maintenance of machines and equipment. Normal production operations are not covered. Servicing and/or maintenance which takes place during normal production operations is covered if:

2.1.1 An employee is required to remove or bypass a guard or other safety device.

2.1.2 An employee is required to place any part of his or her body into an area on a machine or piece of equipment where work is actually performed upon the material being processed (point of operation) or where an associated danger zone exists during a

machine operating cycle.

Exception: Minor tool changes and adjustments, and other minor servicing activities, which take place during normal production operations, are not covered if they are routine, repetitive, and integral to the use of the equipment for production, provided that the work is performed using alternative measures

which provide effective protection in accordance with company operational procedures.

2.1.3 This instruction does not apply to the following:

2.1.3.1 Work on cord and plug connected electric equipment for which exposure to the hazards of unexpected energization or startup of the equipment is controlled by the unplugging of the equipment from the energy source and by the plug being under the exclusive control of the employee performing the

servicing or maintenance.

2.1.3.2 Hot tap operations involving transmission and distribution systems for substances such as gas, steam, water or petroleum products when they are performed on pressurized pipelines, provided it is demonstrated that (1) continuity of service is essential; (2) shutdown of the system is impractical; and (3) documented company procedures are followed, and special equipment is used which will provide proven effective protection for our employees.



3. Program Implementation:

This employer will establish a program and utilize procedures for affixing appropriate lockout devices or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, and to otherwise disable machines or equipment to prevent

unexpected energization, start-up or release of stored energy in order to prevent injury to employees.

3.1 Energy control program. This employer shall establish a program consisting of energy control procedures, employee training and periodic inspections to ensure that before any employee performs any servicing or maintenance on a machine or equipment where the unexpected energizing, start up or release of stored energy could occur and cause injury, the machine or

equipment shall be isolated from the energy source, and rendered inoperative.

3.1.1 Tagout. If an energy isolating device is not capable of being locked out, this

employer's energy control program shall utilize a tagout system.

3.1.2 Lockout. If an energy isolating device is capable of being locked out, this employer's energy control program shall utilize lockout. unless it is can be demonstrated

that the utilization of a tagout system will provide full employee protection.

3.1.3 Future requirements. Whenever replacement or major repair, renovation or modification of a machine or equipment is performed, and whenever new machines or equipment are installed, energy isolating devices for such machine or equipment shall

be designed to accept a lockout device.

4. Full Employee Protection:

4.1 Tagout location. When a tagout device is used on an energy isolating device which is capable of being locked out. The tagout device shall be attached at the same location that the lockout device would have been attached, and this employer shall demonstrate that the tagout program

will provide a level of safety equivalent to that obtained by using a lockout program.

4.2 Lockout equivalency demonstration. In demonstrating that a level of safety is achieved in the tagout program which is equivalent to the level of safety obtained by using a lockout program, this employer shall demonstrate full compliance with all tagout-related provisions together with such additional elements as are necessary to provide the equivalent safety available from the use of a lockout device. Additional means to be considered as part of the demonstration of full employee protection shall include where possible the implementation of additional safety

measures such as the:

4.2.1 Removal of an isolating circuit elements.

4.2.2 Blocking of a controlling switches.

4.2.3 Opening of an extra disconnecting devices.

4.2.4 Removal of a valve handles to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent energization.

5. Energy Control Procedure Exceptions:



Once a facility evaluation has been accomplished, documented procedures will not be developed when

the following conditions exist:

5.1 The machine or equipment has no potential for stored or residual energy or re -accumulation

of stored energy after shut down which could endanger employees.

5.2 The machine or equipment has a single energy source, which can be readily identified and

isolated.

5.3 The isolation and locking out of that energy source will completely de -energize and

deactivate the machine or equipment.

5.4 The machine or equipment is isolated from that energy source and locked out during servicing or maintenance.

5.5 A single lockout device will achieve a locked-out condition.

5.6 The lockout device is under the exclusive control of the authorized employee performing the


5.7 The servicing or maintenance does not create hazards for other employees.

5.8 This employer, in utilizing this exception, has had no accidents involving the unexpected activation or re-energization of the machine or equipment during servicing or maintenance in

the event of such occurrences, energy control procedures will be developed.

6. Energy Control Procedures:

6.1 Once a facility evaluation has been accomplished, procedures shall be developed,

documented and utilized for the control of potentially hazardous energy.

6.2 Procedural format. The following format will be followed for each machine requiring procedures. The Project manager will be responsible for the implementation of these procedures. The procedures shall clearly and specifically outline the scope, purpose, authorization, rules, and techniques to be utilized for the control of hazardous energy, and the

means to enforce compliance including, but not limited to, the following:

6.2.1 A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure.

6.2.2 Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking and securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy (manufacturers specification will

be followed whenever possible).

6.2.3 Specific procedural steps for the placement, removal and transfer of lockout

devices or tagout devices and the person(s) responsible for them.

6.2.4 Specific requirements for testing a machine or equipment to determine and verify

the effectiveness of lockout devices, tagout devices, and other energy control measures.

7. Facility/Department Evaluation:



This employer shall evaluate our facility(s) by department to determine which machines or pieces of equipment require steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking and securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy. A complete listing of machines/equipment having procedures will be

maintained.

8. Protective Materials and Hardware:

Appropriate lockout devices such as; locks, tags, chains, wedges, key blocks, adapter pins, self-locking fasteners, or other hardware shall be provided by this employer for isolating, securing or blocking of machines or equipment from energy sources based on the individual machine/equipment evaluation

conducted by the following personnel authorized to evaluate lockout/tagout requirements:

Duty title

1. ____________________________________________________ _

2. ____________________________________________________ __

3. ____________________________________________________ __

4. ____________________________________________________ __

8.1 Selection criteria.

8.1.1 Lockout/tagout devices shall be singularly identified; shall be the only devices(s) used for controlling energy; shall not be used for other purposes; and shall meet the

following requirements:

8.1.2 Selected lockout and tag out devices shall be capable of withstanding the environment to which they are exposed for the maximum period of time that exposure is expected.

8.1.3 Selected tagout devices shall be constructed and printed so that exposure to weather conditions or wet and damp locations will not cause the tag to deteriorate or the message on the tag to become illegible.

8.1.4 Tags shall not deteriorate when used in corrosive environments such as areas

where acid and alkali chemicals are handled and stored.

8.1.5 Standardization within the facility. Lockout and tagout devices shall be standardized within the facility in at least one of the following criteria: Color; shape; or size; and additionally, in the case of tagout devices, print and format shall be

standardized.

8.1.6 Removal requirements.

8.1.6.1 Lockout devices. Lockout devices shall be Substantial enough to prevent removal without the use of excessive force or unusual techniques, such as with

the use of bolt cutters or other metal cutting tools.



8.1.6.2 Tagout devices. Tagout devices, including and their means of attachment, shall be Substantial enough to prevent inadvertent or accidental removal. Tagout device attachment means shall be of a non-reusable type, attachable by hand, self-locking, and non-releasable with a minimum unlocking strength of no less than 50 pounds and having the general design and basic characteristics of being at least equivalent to a one-piece, all environment- tolerant nylon cable tie.

8.1.7 Identification requirements.

8.1.7.1 Lockout/tagout devices shall indicate the identity of the employee applying the

device(s).

8.1.7.2 Tagout devices shall warn against hazardous conditions if the machine or equipment is energized and shall include a legend such as the following: Do Not Start,

Do Not Open, Do Not Close, Do Not Energize, Do Not Operate, etc.

9. Periodic Inspections and Certifications:

9.1 Inspections. This employer shall conduct a periodic inspection of the energy control procedure for each machine or piece of equipment at least annually to ensure that the

procedure and the requirements of this instruction are being followed.

9.1.1 The periodic inspection shall be performed by an authorized employee other than

the ones(s) utilizing the energy control procedure being inspected.

9.1.2 Inspections will be conducted by the following personnel authorized to evaluate lockout/tagout requirements:

Duty title

1._______________________________________

2._______________________________________

3.________________________________________

4.________________________________________

5.________________________________________

6.________________________________________

9.1.3 The periodic inspection shall be conducted to correct any deviations or

inadequacies identified.·

9.1.4 Lockout inspections. Where lockout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized employee,

of that employee's responsibilities under the energy control procedure being inspected.



9.1.5 Tagout inspections. Where tag out is used for energy control, the periodic inspection shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized and affected employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy control

procedure being inspected.

9.2 Certifications. This employer shall certify that the periodic inspections have been performed.

The certification shall as a minimum identify:

9.2.1 The machine or equipment on which the energy control procedure was being

utilized.

9.2.2 The date of the inspection.

9.2.3 The employees included in the inspection.

9.2.4 The person performing the inspection.

10. Initial Training:

1 0.1 This employer shall provide training to ensure that the purpose and function of the energy control program are understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, usage, and removal of the energy controls are acquired by employees. The

training shall include the following:

10.1.1 Each authorized employee shall receive training in the recognition of applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of the energy available in the

workplace, and the methods and means necessary for energy isolation and control.

10.1.2 Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use of the energy

control procedure.

10.1.3 All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where energy control procedures may be utilized, shall be instructed about the procedure, and about the prohibition relating to attempts to restart or reenergize machines or

equipment which are locked out or tagged out.

10.2 When tagout systems are used, employees shall also be trained in the following limitations

of tags:

10.2.1 Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating devices, and do

not provide the physical restraint on those devices that is provided by a lock.

10.2.2 When a tag is attached to an energy isolating means, it is not to be removed without authorization of the authorized person responsible for it, and it is never to be

bypassed, ignored, or otherwise defeated.

10.2.3 Tags must be legible and understandable by all authorized employees, affected employees, and all other employees whose work operations are or may be in the area, in order to be effective. Non-legible or missing tags will be reported to Project Manager

immediately.



10.2.4 Tags and their means of attachment must be made of materials which will

withstand the environmental conditions encountered in the workplace.

10.2.5 Tags may evoke a false sense of security, and their meaning needs to be

understood as part of the overall energy control program.

10.2.6 Tags must be securely attached to energy isolating devices so that they cannot be

inadvertently or accidentally detached during use.

11. Refresher Training:

11.1 Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in machines, equipment or processes that present a

new hazard, or when there is a change in the energy control procedures.

11.2 Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in

the employee's knowledge or use of the energy control procedures.

11.3 The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised control

methods and procedures, as necessary.

11.4 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain each employee's name and dates of

training.

12. Energy Isolation:

Lockout or tagout shall be performed only by the authorized employees who are performing the


13. Notification of Employees:

Affected employees shall be notified of the application and removal of lockout devices or tag out devices. Notification shall be given before the controls are applied, and after they are removed from the

machine or equipment.

14. Application of Control:

The lockout or tagout procedures shall cover the following elements and actions and shall be done in

the following sequence:

14.1 Preparation for shutdown. Before an authorized or affected employee turns off a machine or equipment, the authorized employee shall have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the energy, the hazards of the energy to be controlled, and the method or means to control the

energy.



14.2 Machine or equipment shutdown. The machine or equipment shall be turned off or shut down using the procedures established for the machine or equipment. An orderly shutdown must be utilized to avoid any additional or increased hazard(s) to employees as a result of the

equipment stoppage.

14.3 Machine or equipment isolation. All energy isolating devices that are needed to control the energy to the machine or equipment shall be physically located and operated in such a manner

as to isolate the machine or equipment from the energy source(s).

14.4 Lockout device application.

14.4.1 lockout or tagout devices shall be affixed to each energy isolating device by

authorized employees.

14.4.2 Lockout devices, where used, shall be affixed in a manner to that will hold the

energy isolating devices in a safe" or off" position.

14.4.3 Tagout devices, where used, shall be affixed in such a manner as will clearly indicate that the operation or movement of energy isolating devices from the safe or off

position is prohibited.

14.5 Tagout device application.

14.5.1 Where tagout devices are used with energy isolating devices designed with the capability of being locked, the tag attachment shall be fastened at the same point at

which the lock would have been attached.

14.5.2 Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy isolating device, the tag shall be located as close as safely possible to the device, in a position that will be immediately

obvious to anyone attempting to operate the device.

14.6 Stored energy.

14.6.1 Following the application of lockout or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, all potentially hazardous stored or residual energy shall be relieved, disconnected,

restrained, and otherwise rendered safe.

14.6.2 If there is a possibility of reaccumulation of stored energy to a hazardous level, verification of isolation shall be continued until the servicing or maintenance is

completed, or until the possibility of such accumulation no longer exists.

14.7 Verification of isolation. Prior to starting work on machines or equipment that have been locked out or tagged out, the authorized employee shall verify that isolation and deenergizat ion

of the machine or equipment have been accomplished.

15. Release from Lockout or Tagout:

15.1 Before lockout or tagout devices are removed. Before lockout or tagout devices are removed and energy is restored to the machine or equipment, procedures shall be followed and

actions taken by the authorized employee(s) to ensure the following:



15.1.1 The machine or equipment. The work area shall be inspected to ensure that nonessential items have been removed and to ensure that machine or equipment

components are operationally intact.

15.1.2 Employees. The work area shall be checked to ensure that all employees have

been safely positioned or removed.

15.2 After lockout or tagout devices are removed. After lockout or tagout devices are removed and before a machine or equipment is started, affected employees shall be notified that the

lockout or tagout device(s) have been removed.

15.3 Lockout or tagout devices removal. Each lockout or tag out device shall be removed from each energy isolating device by the employee who applied the device. When the authorized employee who applied the lockout or tag out device is not available to remove it, that device may be removed under the direction of the Project Manager, provided that specific procedures and training for such removal have been developed, documented and incorporated into this employer's energy control program. This employer shall demonstrate that the specific procedure provides equivalent safety to the removal of the device by the authorized employee

who applied it. The specific procedure shall include at least the following elements:

15.3.1 Verification that the authorized employee who applied the device is not at the

facility.

15.3.2 Making all reasonable efforts to contact the authorized employee to inform

him/her that his/her lockout or tagout device has been removed.

15.3.3 Ensuring that the authorized employee has this knowledge before He/she

resumes work at that facility.

16. Testing of Machines, Equipment, or Components:

16.1 Testing or positioning of machines, equipment or components thereof. In situations in which lockout or tagout devices must be temporarily removed from the energy isolating device and the machine or equipment energized to test or position the machine, equipment or

component thereof, the following sequence of actions shall be followed:

16.1.1 Clear the machine or equipment of tools and materials.

16.1.2 Remove employees from the machine or equipment area.

16.1.3 Remove the lockout or tagout devices as specified as part of the individual

machine procedures.

16.1.4 Energize and proceed with testing or positioning.

16.1.5 De-energize all systems and reapply energy control measures in accordance with

machine procedures and continue the servicing and/or maintenance.

17. Non-Company Personnel (contractors, etc.):



17.1 Whenever outside servicing personnel are to be engaged in activities covered by the scope and application of this instruction, this company and the outside employer shall inform each

other of their respective lockout or tag out procedures.

17.2 This company shall ensure that his/her employees understand and comply with the

restrictions and prohibitions of the outside employer's energy control program.

18. Group Lockout or Tagout:

18.1 When servicing and/or maintenance is performed by a crew, craft, department or other group, they shall utilize a procedure which affords the employees a level of protection

equivalent to that provided by the implementation of a personal lockout or tagout device.

18.2 Group lockout or tagout devices shall be used in accordance with the procedures required by this instruction governing individual procedures which shall include, but not necessarily

limited to, the following specific requirements:

18.2.1 Primary responsibility will be vested in an authorized employee for a set number of employees working under the protection of a group lockout or tagout device (such as

an operations lock).

18.2.2 Provision for the authorized employee to ascertain the exposure status of individual group members with regard to the lockout or tagout of the machine or

equipment will be made.

18.2.3 When more than one crew, craft, department, etc. is involved, assignment of overall job-associated lockout or tag out control responsibility will be vested to an authorized employee designated to coordinate affected work forces and ensure

continuity of protection.

18.2.4 Each authorized employee shall affix a personal lockout or tagout device to the group lockout device, group lockbox, or comparable mechanism when he or she begins work, and shall remove those devices when he or she stops working on the machine or

equipment being serviced or maintained.

19. Shift or Personnel Changes:

Specific procedures shall be utilized during shift or personnel changes to ensure the continuity of lockout or tagout protection, including provision for the orderly transfer of lockout or tagout device protection between off going and oncoming employees, to minimize exposure to hazards from the unexpected energization or start-up of the machine or equipment, or the release of stored energy.

20. Definitions: Applicable to this Instruction.

Affected employee - An employee whose job requires him/her to operate or use a machine or equipment on which servicing or maintenance is being performed under lockout or tagout, or whose job

requires him/her to work in an area in which such servicing or maintenance is being performed.

Authorized employee - A person who locks out or tags out machines or equipment in order to perform servicing or maintenance on that machine or equipment. An affected employee becomes an authorized



employee when that employee's duties include performing servicing or maintenance covered under this section. Capable of being locked out - An energy isolating device is capable of being locked out if it has a hasp or other means of attachment to which, or through which, a lock can be affixed, or it has a locking mechanism built into it. Other energy isolating devices are capable of being locked out, if lockout can be achieved without the need to dismantle, rebuild, or replace the energy isolating device or permanently

alter its energy control capability.

Energized - Connected to an energy source or containing residual or stored energy.

Energy isolating device - A mechanical device that physically prevents the transmission or release of

energy, including but not limited to the following:

1. A manually operated electrical circuit breaker. 2. A disconnect switch. 3. A manually operated switch by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from all ungrounded supply conductors, and, in addition, no pole can be operated independently. 4. A line valve: a block; and any similar device used to block or isolate energy. 5. Push buttons, selector switches and other control circuit type devices are not energy isolating devices.

Energy source - Any source of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, thermal, or other

energy.

Hot tap - A procedure used in the repair, maintenance and services activities which involves welding on a piece of equipment (pipelines, vessels or tanks) under pressure, in order to install connections or appurtenances. It is commonly used to replace or add sections of pipeline without the interruption of

service for air, gas, water, steam, and petrochemical distribution systems.

Lockout - The placement of a lockout device on an energy isolating device, in accordance with an established procedure, ensuring that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled

cannot be operated until the lockout device is removed.

Lockout device - A device that utilizes a positive means such as a lock, either key or combination type, to hold an energy isolating device in a safe position and prevent the energizing of a machine or equipment.

Included are blank flanges and bolted slip blinds.

Normal production operations - The utilization of a machine or equipment to perform its intended

production function.

Servicing and/or maintenance - Workplace activities such as constructing, installing, setting up, adjusting, inspecting, modifying, and maintaining andlor servicing machines or equipment. These activities include lubrication, cleaning or unjammlng of machines or equipment and making adjustments or tool changes, where the employee may be exposed to the unexpected energization or startup of the

equipment or release of hazardous energy.

Setting up - Any work performed to prepare a machine or equipment to perform its normal production

operation.



Tagout - The placement of a tagout device on an energy isolating device, in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled

may !not be operated until the tagout device is removed.

Tagout device - A prominent warning device, such as a tag and a means of attachment, which can be securely fastened to an energy isolating device in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the

tagout device is removed.



WC Welding Services Inc. Electrical Safety-Related Work Practices Program

1. Written Program:

WC Welding Services will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.331 - 335, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed

to establish clear goals, and objectives.

2. Facility/Department Evaluation:

This employer shall evaluate our facility(s) by department to determine where high risk from electrical hazards exists. Jobs/areas that present such risks will meet the criteria for designation as

an electrical hazard area.

2.1 Employee notification. This employer shall inform exposed employees, by posting danger signs, conducting awareness training, or by any other equally effective means, of the existence and location of and the danger posed by electrical hazard areas. A sign reading "DANGER ELECTRICAL HAZARD, AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY" or similar language in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.145 will be used to satisfy the requirement for untrained employee/visitor

notification.

2.2 High risk electrical hazard jobs/areas.

High Risk Electrical Hazard Jobs/Areas Listing

Department Area/Job Date Evaluated

2.3 Alerting techniques. The following alerting techniques shall be used to warn and protect employees from hazards which could cause injury due to electric shock, burns, or failure of

electric equipment parts:

2.3.1 Safety signs and tags. Safety signs, safety symbols, or accident prevention tags shall be used where necessary to warn employees about electrical hazards which may

endanger them, as required by 29 CFR 1910.145.

2.3.2 Barricades. Barricades shall be used in conjunction with safety signs where it is necessary to prevent or limit employee access to work areas exposing employees to uninsulated energized conductors or circuit parts. Conductive barricades may not be

used where they might cause an electrical contact hazard.



2.3.3 Attendants. If signs and barricades do not provide sufficient warning and protection from electrical hazards, an attendant shall be stationed to warn and protect

employees.

3. General:

This standard practice instruction will cover work by both qualified and unqualified persons. The provisions of 29 CFR 1910.331 through 1910.335 will be detailed to cover electrical safety-related work practices for both qualified persons (those who have training in avoiding the electrical hazards of working on or near exposed energized parts) and unqualified persons (those with little or no such

training) working on, near, or with the following installations:

3.1 Premises wiring. Installation of electric conductors and equipment within or on buildings or other structures, and on other premises such as yards, carnival, parking, and other lots, and

industrial substations.

3.2 Wiring for connection to supply. Installations of conductors that connect to the supply of

electricity.

3.3 Other wiring. Installations of other outside conductors on the premises.

3.4 Optical fiber cable. Installations of optical fiber cable where such installations are made along with electric conductors.

3.5 General electrical safety work practices by WC Welding Services employee's.

4. Training:

4.1 Employees to be trained. Once an evaluation of jobs and areas of our facility is performed. Training will be conducted for employees who face a risk of electric shock that is not reduced to

a safe level by the existing source.

4.2 High risk occupations. Employees in occupations listed in Table S-4 (29 CFR 1910.332) face such a risk and are required to be trained. Other employees who also may reasonably be expected to face a comparable risk of injury due to electric shock or other electrical hazards must also be trained. These employees will be identified based upon their job title and or area(s) of the facility they are exposed to. The facility evaluation data referenced in section 2 of this SPI

will be used to develop a personnel training listing by job and hazard area(s) exposure.

Table 8-4 (29 CFR 1910.332) Typical Occupational Categories of Employees Facing a Higher Than Normal Risk of Electrical Accident

OCCUPATION

First line supervisors. Electrical and electronic engineers. Electrical and electronic equipment assemblers. Electrical and electronic technicians.



Electricians. Industrial machine operators. Material handling equipment operators. Mechanics and repairers. Painters. Riggers and roustabouts. Stationary engineers.

NOTE: Workers in the above listed groups do not need to be trained if their work or the work of those they supervise does not bring them or the employees they supervise close enough to exposed parts of

electric circuits operating at 50 volts or more to ground for a hazard to exist.

4.3 Content of training.

4.3.1 General electrical safety policy. The Safety Officer will develop a facility wide

electrical policy that details this company's' general electrical safety policy.

4.3.2 Employee job specific training (unqualified). Employees who are classified as "unqualified" (i.e., those not permitted to work on or near exposed energized parts) persons shall also be trained in and familiar with any electrically related safety practices inherent to their jobs which are necessary for their safety. First line supervisors in coordination with the Maintenance Manager (where required) will develop a training outline detailing the electrical hazards associated with a work area or job whe n an initial

evaluation reveals a risk of electrocution.

4.3.3 Employee job specific training (qualified). Employees who are classified as "qualified" (i.e., those permitted to work on or near exposed energized parts) persons shall be trained in and familiar with the safety related work practices that pertain to their respective job assignments. First line supervisors in coordination with the Maintenance Manager (where required) will develop a training outline detailing the electrical hazards associated with a work area or job when an initial evaluation reveals a risk of electrocution. Qualified persons (Le., those permitted to work on or near exposed

energized parts) shall, at a minimum, be trained in and familiar with the following:

4.3.3.1 The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts

from other parts of electric equipment.

4.3.3.2 The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of

exposed live parts, and

4.3.3.3 The clearance distances specified in 29 CFR 1910.333(c) and the

corresponding voltages to which the qualified person will be exposed.

NOTE 1: For the purposes of this SPI, Employee's must have the training required by the definition of a

"qualified person" detailed above in order to be considered a quali fied person.

NOTE 2: Qualified persons whose work on energized equipment involves either direct contact or contact by means of tools or materials must also have the training needed for safe exposure to energized part

(see below).



4.4 Type of training. The training required by this SPI shall be of the classroom or on-the-job type. The degree of training provided shall be determined by the evaluated risk to the

employee.

4.4.1 Initial Training. This employer shall provide training to ensure that the electrical hazards associated with their job are understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, usage, of work place equipment, and removal of the energy controls are acquired by employees. The training shall include the

following:

4.4.1.1 Each authorized employee shall receive training in the recognition of applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of the energy available in the workplace, and the methods and means necessary for energy

isolation and control.

4.4.1.2 Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use of the

energy control procedure.

4.4.1.3 All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where energy control procedures may be utilized, shall be instructed about the procedure. and about the prohibition relating to attempts to restart or reenergize machines or equipment which are locked out or tagged out. Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating devices, and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices that is provided by a lock. Nonlegible or missing tags will be reported to Wess Carnes immediately.

4.5 Refresher Training.

4.5.1 Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in machines, equipment or processes that present a new hazard, when their work takes them into hazardous areas,

or when there is a change in the energy control procedures.

4.5.2 Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge of known hazards, or use of the energy

control procedures.

4.5.3 The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised

control methods and procedures, as necessary.


training.

5. Selection and use of work practices:

Supervisors shall develop and ensure use of standardized safety-related work practices to prevent electric shock or other injuries resulting from either direct or indirect electrical contacts. This will be accomplished whenever work is performed near or on equipment or circuits which are or may be



energized. The specific safety-related work practices shall be consistent with the nature and extent of

the associated electrical hazards.

5.1 Deenergized parts. Live parts to which an employee may be exposed shall be deenergized before the employee works on or near them, unless it can be demonstrate that deenergizing introduces additional or increased hazards or is unfeasible due to equipment design or operational limitations. Deenergized parts shall be treated as live at all times. Live parts that operate at less than 50 volts to ground need not be deenergized if there will be no increased exposure to electrical burns or to explosion due to electric arcs. Support equipment, deactivation of emergency alarm systems, shutdown of hazardous location ventilation equipment, or removal of illumination for an area.

5.2 Lockout and tagging. While any employee is exposed to contact with parts of fixed electric equipment or circuits which have been deenergjzed, the circuits energizing the parts shall be locked out or tagged or both in accordance with the requirements of this company's lock-out tag-out procedures program.

5.3 Energized parts. If the exposed live parts are not deenergized (Le., for reasons of increased or additional hazards or unfeasibility), supervisors will ensure that other safety-related work practices are used to protect employees who may be exposed to the electrical hazards involved. Such work practices shall protect employees against contact with energized circuit parts directly with any part of their body or indirectly through some other conductive object. The work practices that are used shall be suitable for the conditions under which the work is to be performed and for the voltage level of the exposed electric conductors, circuit parts, or materials. Only qualified company employees may work on electric circuit parts or equipment

that have not been deenergized.

5.3.1 Authorized maintenance personnel. Only employees in the following job classification(s) (once trained) are authorized to work on or near exposed energized

parts.

Department Job Classification

_________________________________________

_________________________________________

_________________________________________

_________________________________________

5.4 Contractor personnel. Contractor personnel will be notified that they may be required to provide proof of certification for working on energized circuits, and shall be familiar with the proper use of special precautionary techniques, personal protective equipment, insulating and

shielding materials, and insulated tools.

5.5 Overhead lines. If work is to be performed near overhead lines, the lines shall be deenergized and grounded, or other protective measures shall be provided before work is started. If the lines are to be deenergized, arrangements shall be made with the person or organization that operates or controls the electric circuits involved to deenergize and ground



them. If protective measures, such as guarding, isolating, or insulating are provided, these precautions shall prevent employees from contacting such lines directly with any part of their body or indirectly through conductive materials, tools, or equipment. Unqualified persons are

prohibited from performing this type of work.

5.5.1 Unqualified employees (elevated). When an unqualified employee is working in an elevated position near overhead lines, the location shall be such that the person and the longest conductive object he or she may contact cannot come closer to any unguarded,

energized overhead line than the following distances:

5.5.1.1 For voltages to ground 50kV or below--1 0 ft. (305 cm)

5.5.1.2 For voltages to ground over 50.kV--10 ft. (305 cm) plus 4 in. (10 cm) for

every 10kV over 50kV.

5.5.2 Unqualified employees (ground). Unqualified employees working on the ground in the vicinity of overhead lines, the person may not bring any conductive object close r to unguarded,

energized overhead lines than the distances given below.

5.5.2.1 For voltages to ground 50kV or below--10 ft. (305 cm)

5.5.2.2 For voltages to ground over 50kV--10 ft. (305 cm) plus 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kVover 50kV.

NOTE: For voltages normally encountered with overhead power lines, objects which do not have an

insulating rating for the voltage involved are considered to be conductive.

5.5.3 Qualified persons. When a qualified person is working in the vicinity of overhead lines, whether in an elevated position or on the ground, the person may not approach or take any conductive object without an approved insulating handle closer to exposed energized parts than

shown in Table 5-5 (29 CFR 1910.333 unless:

5.5.3.1 The person is insulated from the energized part (gloves, with sleeves if necessary, rated for the voltage involved are considered to be insulation of the person

from the energized part on which work is performed).

5.5.3.2 The energized part is insulated both from all other conductive objects at a

different potential and from the person.

5.5.3.3 The person is insulated from all conductive objects at a potential different from

that of the energized part.

5.5.4.1.1 If the vehicle is in transit with its structure lowered, the clearance may be reduced to 4 ft. (122 cm). If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance

shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV over that voltage.

5.5.4.1.2 If insulating barriers are installed to prevent contact with the lines, and if the barriers are rated for the voltage of the line being guarded and are not a part of or an attachment to the vehicle or its raised structure, the clearance may



be reduced to a distance within the designed working dimensions of the

insulating barrier.

5.5.4.1.3 If the equipment is an aerial lift insulated for the voltage involved, and if the work is performed by a qualified person, the clearance (between the uninsulated portion of the aerial lift and the power line) may be reduced to the

distance given in Table S-5.

5.5.4.2 Employees standing on the ground may not contact the vehicle or mechanical

equipment or any of its attachments, unless:

5.5.4.2.1 The employee is using protective equipment rated for the voltage.

5.5.4.2.2 The equipment is located so that no uninsulated part of its structure (that portion of the structure that provides a conductive path to employees on the ground) can come closer to the line than 10ft. (305 cm). If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV

over that voltage.

5.5.4.2.3 If any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its structure elevated near energized overhead lines is intentionally grounded, employees working on the ground near the point of grounding may not stand at the grounding location whenever there is a possibility of overhead line contact. Additional precautions, such as the use of barricades or insulation, shall be taken to protect employees from hazardous ground potentials, depending on earth resistivity and fault currents, which can develop within the first few feet or

more outward from the grounding point.

5.6 Illumination.

5.6.1 Supervisors will ensure that employees do not enter spaces containing exposed energized parts, unless illumination is provided that enables the employees to perform

the work safely.

5.6.2 Where Jack of illumination or an obstruction precludes observation of the work to be performed, employees may not perform tasks near exposed energized parts. Employees may not reach blindly into areas which may contain energized parts. Additionally, unless known otherwise the space shall be evaluated to determine if it meets the criteria for designation as a confined space. The company confined space

program will be implemented to manage the entry.

5.7 Confined or enclosed work spaces. When an employee works in a confined or enclosed space (such as a manhole or vault) that contains exposed energized parts, this employer shall provide, and the employee shall use, protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating materials as necessary to avoid inadvertent contact with these parts. Doors, hinged panels, and the like shall be secured to prevent their swinging into an employee and causing the employee to contact exposed energized parts. Additionally, unless known otherwise the space shall be evaluated to determine if it meets the criteria for designation as a confined space. The company

confined space program will be implemented. To manage the entry.



5.8 Conductive materials and equipment. Conductive materials and equipment that are in contact with any part of an employee's body shall be handled in a manner that will prevent them from contacting exposed energized conductors or circuit parts. Supervisors will ensure pre-written safety procedures are in place, and that all employees are trained when long dimensional conductive objects (such as ducts and pipes) in areas with exposed live parts, are used. Other protective measures (such as the use of insulation, guarding, and material handling techniques) will considered and used to minimize the hazard.

5.9 Portable ladders. Portable ladders shall have nonconductive side rails if they are used where

the employee or the ladder could contact exposed energized parts.

5.10 Conductive apparel. Conductive articles of jewelry and clothing (such as watch bands, bracelets, rings, key chains, necklaces, metalized aprons, cloth with conductive thread, or metal headgear) may not be worn if they might contact exposed energized parts. However, such articles may be worn if they are rendered nonconductive by covering, wrapping, or other insulating means.

5.11 Housekeeping duties. Where energized parts present an electrical contact hazard, employees may not perform housekeeping duties at such close distances to the parts that there is a possibility of contact, unless adequate safeguards (such as insulating equipment or barriers) are provided. Electrically conductive cleaning materials (including conductive solids such as steel wool, metalized cloth, and silicon carbide, as well as conductive liquid solutions) may not be used in proximity to energized parts unless procedures are followed which will prevent electrical

contact.

5.12 Interlocks. Only a qualified employee may defeat an electrical safety interlock, and then only temporarily while he or she is working on the equipment. The interlock system shall be

returned to its operable condition when this work is completed.

6. Use of equipment:

6.1 Portable electric equipment. This paragraph applies to the use of cord- and plug-connected equipment, including flexible cord sets (extension cords).

6.1.1 Handling. Portable equipment shall be handled in a manner which will not cause damage. Flexible electric cords connected to equipment may not be used for raising or lowering the equipment. Flexible cords may not be fastened with staples or otherwise hung in such a fashion as could damage the outer jacket or insulation. Ground fault circuit interrupters shall be used at all times on any portable equipment, extension

cords, or any other equipment connected by cord and plug.

6.1.2 Visual inspection.

6.1.2.1 Portable cord- and plug-connected equipment and flexible cord sets (extension cords) shall be visually inspected before use on any shift for external defects (such as loose parts, deformed and missing pins, or damage to outer jacket or insulation) and for evidence of possible internal damage (such as pinched or crushed outer jacket). Cord- and plug-connected equipment and flexible cord sets (extension cords) which remain connected once the y are put in



place and are not exposed to damage need not be visually inspected until they

are relocated.

6.1.2.2 If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might expose an employee to injury, the defective or damaged item shall be removed from service, and no employee may use it until repairs and tests necessary to render

the equipment safe have been made.

6.1.2.3 When an attachment plug is to be connected to a receptacle (including any on a cord set), the relationship of the plug and receptacle contacts shall first

be checked to ensure that they are of proper mating configurations.

6.1.3 Grounding-type equipment.

6.1.3.1 A flexible cord used with grounding-type equipment shall contain a

Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter.

6.1.3.2 Attachment plugs and receptacles may not be connected or altered in a manner which would prevent proper continuity of the equipment grounding conductor at the point where plugs are attached to receptacles. Additionally, these devices may not be altered to allow the grounding pole of a plug to be

inserted into slots intended for connection to the current-carrying conductors.

6.1.3.3 Adapters which interrupt the continuity of the equipment grounding

connection may not be used.

6.1.4 Conductive work locations. Portable electric equipment and flexible cords used in highly conductive work locations (such as those inundated with water or other conductive liquids), or in job locations where employees are likely to contact water or

conductive liquids, shall be approved for those locations.

6.1.5 Connecting attachment plugs.

6.1.5.1 Employees' hands may not be wet when plugging and unplugging flexible cords and cord- and plug-connected equipment, if energized equipment is involved.

6.1.5.2 Energized plug and receptacle connections may be handled only with insulating protective equipment if the condition of the connection could provide a conducting path to the employee's hand (if, for example, a cord connector is wet from being immersed in water).

6.1.5.3 Locking-type connectors shall be properly secured after connection.

6.2 Electric power and lighting circuits.

6.2.1 Routine opening and closing of circuits. Load rated switches, circuit breakers, or other devices specifically designed as disconnecting means shall be used for the opening, reversing, or closing of circuits under load conditions. Cable connectors not of



the load-break type, fuses, terminal lugs, and cable splice connections may not be used

for such purposes, except in an emergency.

6.2.2 Reclosing circuits after protective device operation. After a circuit is deenergized by a circuit protective device, the circuit may not be manually reenergized until it has been determined that the equipment and circuit can be safely energized. The repetitive manual reclosing of circuit breakers or reenergizing circuits through replaced fuses is

prohibited.

NOTE: When it can be determined from the design of the circuit and the overcurrent devices involved that the automatic operation of a device was caused by an overload rather than a fault condition, no

examination of the circuit or connected equipment is needed before the circuit is reenergized.

6.2.3 Overcurrent protection modification. Overcurrent protection of circuits and conductors may not be modified, even on a temporary basis, beyond that allowed by 29

CFR 1910.304(e), the installation safety requirements for overcurrent protection.

6.3 Test instruments and equipment.

6.3.1 Use. Only company qualified persons may perform testing work on electric circuits

or equipment.

6.3.2 Visual inspection. Test instruments and equipment and all associated test leads, cables, power cords, probes, and connectors shall be visually inspected for external defects and damage before the equipment is used. If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might expose an employee to injury, the defective or damaged item shall be removed from service, and no employee may use it until repairs and tests necessary

to render the equipment safe have been made.

6.3.3 Rating of equipment. Test instruments and equipment and their accessories shall be rated for the circuits and equipment to which they will be connected and shall be

designed for the environment in which they will be used.

6.4 Occasional use of flammable or ignitable materials. Where flammable materials are present only occasionally, electric equipment capable of igniting them shall not be used, unless measures are taken to prevent hazardous conditions from developing. Such materials include, but are not limited to: flammable gases, vapors, or liquids; combustible dust; and ignitable fibers

or flyings.

NOTE: Electrical installation requirements for locations where flammable materials are present on a

regular basis are contained Safeguards for personnel protection.

7. Safeguards for personnel protection:

7.1 Use of protective equipment.

7.1.1 Personal protective equipment.

7.1.1.1 Employees working in areas where there are potential electrical hazards shall be provided with, and shall use, electrical protective equipment that is



appropriate for the specific parts of the body to be protected and for the work

to be performed.

NOTE: Personal protective equipment requirements are contained in subpart I of 29 CFR 1910.

7.1.1.2 Protective equipment shall be maintained in a safe, reliable condition

and shall be periodically inspected or tested, as required by 29 CFR 1910.137.

7.1.1.3 If the insulating capability of protective equipment may be subject to damage during use, the insulating material shall be protected. (For example, an outer covering of leather is sometimes used for the protection of rubber

insulating material.)

7.1.1.4 Employees shall wear nonconductive head protection wherever there is a danger of head injury from electric shock or burns due to contact with

exposed energized parts.

7.1.1.5 Employees shall wear protective equipment for the eyes or face wherever there is danger of injury to the eyes or face from electric arcs or

flashes or from flying objects resulting from electrical explosion.

7.1.2 General protective equipment and tools.

7.1.2.1 When working near exposed energized conductors or circuit parts, each employee shall use insulated tools or handling equipment if the tools or handling equipment might make contact with such conductors or parts. If the insulating capability of insulated tools or handling equipment is subject to damage, the insulating material shall be protected.

7.1.2.1.1 Fuse handling equipment, insulated for the circuit voltage, shall be used to remove or install fuses when the fuse terminals are energized.

7.1.2.1.2 Ropes and handlines used near exposed energized parts shall

be nonconductive.

7.1.2.2 Protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating materials shall be used to protect each employee from shock, burns, or other electrically related injuries while that employee is working near exposed energized parts which might be accidentally contacted or where dangerous electric heating or arcing might occur. When normally enclosed live parts are exposed for maintenance or repair, they shall be guarded to protect unqualif ied persons from contact with

the live parts.

8. Definitions applicable to this standard practice instruction:

Acceptable. An installation or equipment is acceptable to the Assistant Secretary of Labor, and approved

within the meaning of this 29 CFR 1910 Subpart 5:



If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled, or otherwise determined to be safe by a nationally recognized testing laboratory; or

With respect to an installation or equipment of a kind which no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if it is inspected or tested by another Federal agency, or by a State, municipal, or other local authority responsible for enforcing occupational safety provisions of the National Electrical Code and found in compliance with the provisions of the National Electrical Code as applied in this Subpart; or

With respect to custom-made equipment or related installations which are designed, fabricated for, and intended for use by a particular customer, if it is determined to be safe for its intended use by its manufacturer on the basis of test data which the employer keeps and makes available for inspection to the Assistant Secretary and his authorized representatives. Refer to 29 CFR

1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.

Accepted. An installation is "accepted" if it has been inspected and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to conform to specified plans or to procedures of applicable codes.

Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.) Capable of being removed or exposed without damaging the building structure or finish, or not permanently closed in by the structure or finish of the building. (See "concealed" and "exposed. ")

Accessible. (As applied to equipment.) Admitting close approach; not guarded by locked doors,

elevation, or other effective means. (See IIReadily accessible. II)

Ampacity. Current-carrying capacity of electric conductors expressed in amperes.

Appliances. Utilization equipment, generally other than industrial, normally built in standardized sizes or types, which is installed or connected as a unit to perform one or more functions such as clothes

washing, air conditioning, food mixing, deep frying, etc.

Approved. Acceptable to the authority enforcing 29 CFR 1910 subpart S. The authority enforcing this subpart is the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health. The definition of “acceptable" indicates what is acceptable to the Assistant Secretary of Labor, and therefore approved

within the meaning of 29 CFR 1910 Subpart S.

Approved for the purpose. Approved for a specific purpose, environment, or application described in a particular standard requirement. Suitability of equipment or materials for a specific purpose, environment or application may be determined by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, inspection agency or other organization concerned with product evaluation as part of its listing and labeling

program. (See"Labeled” or “listed.)

Armored cable. Type AC armored cable is a fabricated assembly of insulated conductors in a flexible

metallic enclosure.

Askarel. A generic term for a group of nonflammable synthetic chlorinated hydrocarbons used as electrical insulating media. Askarels of various compositional types are used. Under arcing conditions the gases produced, while consistingpredominantly of noncombustible hydrogen chloride, can include

varying amounts of combustible gases depending upon the askarel type.



Attachment plug (Plug cap) (Cap). A device which, by insertion in a receptacle, establishes connection between the conductors of the attached flexible cord and the conductors connected permanently to the

receptacle.

Automatic. Self-acting, operating by its own mechanism when actuated by some impersonal influence,

as, for example, a change in current strength, pressure, temperature, or mechanical configuration.

Bare conductor. See "Conductor."

Bonding. The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an electrically conductive path which will

assure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed.

Bonding jumper. A reliable conductor to assure the required electrical conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically connected.

Branch circuit. The circuit conductors between the final overcurrent device protecting the circuit and

the outlet(s). .

Building. A structure which stands alone or which is cut off from adjoining structures by fire walls with

all openings therein protected by approved fire doors.

Cabinet. An enclosure designed either for surface or flush mounting, and provided with a frame, mat, or

trim in which a swinging door or doors are or may be hung.

Cable tray system. A cable tray system is a unit or assembly of units or sections, and associated fittings, made of metal or other noncombustible materials forming a rigid structural system used to support

cables.

Cable tray systems include ladders, troughs, channels, solid bottom trays, and other similar

structures.

Cablebus is an approved assembly of insulated conductors with fittings and conductor terminations in a

completely enclosed, ventilated, protective metal housing.

Center pivot irrigation machine. A center pivot irrigation. machine is a multi-motored irrigation machine which revolves around a central pivot and employs alignment switches or similar devices to control

individual motors.

Certified. Equipment is "certified" if it:

Has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner, or

Is of a kind whose production is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and

It bears a label, tag, or other record of certification.

Circuit breaker.



(600 volts nominal, or less). A device designed to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overcurrent without injury to itself when properly

applied within its rating.

(Over 600 volts, nominal). A switching device capable of making, carrying, and breaking currents under normal circuit conditions, and also making, carrying for a specified time, and breaking currents under

specified abnormal circuit conditions, such as those of short circuit.

Class I locations. Class I locations are those in which flammable gases or vapors are or may be present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures. Class I locations include the

following:

• Class I, Division 1. A Class I, Division 1 location is a location:

In which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors may exist under normal operating conditions; or

In which hazardous concentrations of such gases or vapors may exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or because of leakage; or

In which breakdown or faulty operation of equipment or processes might release hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors, and might also cause

simultaneous failure of electric equipment.

Note: This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or liquefied flammable gases are transferred from one container to another; interiors of spray booths and areas in the vicinity of spraying and painting operations where volatile flammable solvents are used; locations containing open tanks or vats of volatile flammable liquids; drying rooms or compartments for the evaporation of flammable solvents; locations containing fat and oil extraction equipment using volatile flammable solvents; portions of cleaning and dyeing plants where flammable liquids are used; gas generator rooms and other portions of gas manufacturing plants where flammable gas may escape; inadequately ventilated pump rooms for flammable gas or for volatile flammable liquids; the interiors of refrigerators and freezers in which volatile flammable materials are stored in open, lightly stoppered, or easily ruptured containers; and all other locations where ignitable concentrations of flammable vapors or gases are likely to occur in the course of normal operations.

• Class I, Division 2. A Class I, Division 2 location is a location:

In which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are handled, processed, or used, but in which the hazardous liquids, vapors, or gases will normally be confined within closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape only in case of accidental rupture or breakdown of such containers or systems, or in case of abnormal operation of equipment; or

In which hazardous concentrations of gases or vapors are normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation, and which might become hazardous through failure or abnormal operations of the ventilating equipment; or

That is adjacent to a Class I, Division 1 location, and to which hazardous concentrations of gases or vapors might occasionally be communicated unless such communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clean air, and

effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided.



Note: This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases or vapors are used, but which would become hazardous only in case of an accident or of some unusual operating condition. The quantity of flammable material that might escape in case of accident, the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the total area involved, and the record of the industry or business with respect to explosions or fires are all factors that merit consideration in determining the classification and extent of each location. Piping without valves, checks, meters, and similar devices would not ordinarily introduce a hazardous condition even though used for flammable liquids or gases. Locations used for the storage of flammable liquids or a liquefied or compressed gases in sealed containers would not normally be considered hazardous unless also subject to other hazardous conditions. Electrical conduits and their associated enclosures separated from process flu ids by a single seal or barrier are classed as a Division 2 location if the outside of the conduit and enclosures is a

nonhazardous location.

Class II locations. Class II locations are those that are hazardous because of the presence of combustible

dust. Class II locations include the following:

Class II, Division 1. A Class II, Division 1 location is a location:

• In which combustible dust is or may be in suspension in the air under normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures; or

• Where mechanical failure or abnormal operation of machinery or equipment might cause such explosive or ignitable mixtures to be produced, and might also provide a source of ignition through simultaneous failure of electric equipment, operation of protection devices, or from other causes, or

• In which combustible dusts of an electrically conductive nature may be present.

Note: This classification may include areas of grain handling and processing plants, starch plants, sugar-pulverizing plants, malting plants, hay-grinding plants, coal pulverizing plants, areas where metal dusts and powders are produced or processed, and other similar locations which contain dust producing machinery and equipment (except where the equipment is dust-tight or vented to the outside). These areas would have combustible dust in the air, under norm~1 operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures. Combustible dusts which are electrically nonconductive include dusts produced in the handling and processing of grain and grain products, pulverized sugar and cocoa, dried egg and milk powders, pulverized spices, starch and pastes, potato and wood flour, oil meal from beans and seed, dried hay, and other organic materials which may produce combustible dusts when processed or handled. Dusts containing magnesium or aluminum are

particularly hazardous and the use of extreme caution is necessary to avoid ignition and explosion.

• Class II, Division 2. A Class II, Division 2 location is a location in which:

• Combustible dust will not normally be in suspension in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures, and dust accumulations are normally insufficient to interfere with the normal operation of electrical equipment or other apparatus; or

• Dust may be in suspension in the air as a result of infrequent malfunctioning of handling or processing equipment, and dust accumulation~ resulting therefrom



may be ignitable by abnormal operation or failure of electrical equipment or

other apparatus.

Note: This classification includes locations where dangerous concentrations of suspended dust would not be likely but where dust accumulations might form on or in the vicinity of electric equipment. These areas may contain equipment from which appreciable quantities of dust would escape under abnormal operating conditions or be adjacent to a Class II Division 1 location, as described above, into which an explosive or ignitable concentration of dust may be put into suspensi on under abnormal operating

conditions.

Class III locations. Class III locations are those that are hazardous because of the presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings but in which such fibers or flyings are not likely to be in suspension in the air in

quantities sufficient to produce ignitable mixtures. Class III locations include the following:

• Class III, Division 1. A Class III, Division 1 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers or materials producing combustible flyings are handled,

manufactured, or used.

Note: Such locations usually include some parts of rayon, cotton, and other textile mills; combustible

fiber manufacturing and processing plants; cotton gins and cottonseed mills; flax -processing plants; clothing manufacturing plants; woodworking plants, and establishments; and industries involving similar hazardous processes or conditions. Easily ignitable fibers and flyings include rayon, cotton (including cotton linters and cotton waste). sisal or henequen, istle, jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled

waste kapok, Spanish moss, excelsior, and other materials of similar nature.

• Class III, Division 2. A Class III, Division 2 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers are stored

or handled, except in process of manufacture.

Collector ring. A collector ring is an assembly of slip rings for transferring electrical energy from a

stationary to a rotating member.

Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the building. Wires in concealed raceways are considered concealed, even though they may become accessible by withdrawing them. [See

"Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.)"]

Conductor.

• Bare. A conductor having no covering or electrical insulation whatsoever. • Covered. A conductor encased within material of composition or thickness that

is not recognized as electrical insulation. • Insulated. A conductor encased within material of composition and thickness

that is recognized as electrical insulation.

Conduit body. A separate portion of a conduit or tubing system that provides access through a removable cover(s) to the interior of the system at a junction of two or more sections of the system or at a terminal point of the system. Boxes such as FS and FD or larger cast or sheet metal boxes are not

classified as conduit bodies.



Controller. A device or group of devices that serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, the

electric power delivered to the apparatus to which it is connected.

Cooking unit. counter-mounted. A cooking appliance designed for mounting in or on a counter and consisting of one or more heating elements, internal wiring, and built-in or separately mountable

controls. (See "Oven, wall-mounted. ")

Covered conductor. See "Conductor."

Cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An assembly of a fuse support with either a fuse holder, fuse carrier, or disconnecting blade. The fuseholder or fuse carrier may include a conducting element (fuse link), or

may act as the disconnecting blade by the inclusion of a nonfusible member.

Cutout box. An enclosure designed for surface mounting and having swinging doors or covers secured

directly to and telescoping with the walls of the box proper.

Dead front. Without live parts exposed to a person on the operating side of the equipment. .

Device. A unit of an electrical system which is intended to carry but not utilize electric energy.

Dielectric heating. Dielectric heating is the heating of a nominally insulating material due to its own

dielectric losses when the material is placed in a varying electric field.

Disconnecting means. A device, or group of devices, or other means by which the conductors of a circuit

can be disconnected from their source of supply.

Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A mechanical switching device used for

isolating a circuit or equipment from a source of power.

Dry location. See "Location."

Electric sign. A fixed, stationary, or portable self-contained, electrically illuminated utilization equipment

with words or symbols designed to convey information or attract attention.

Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, housing, fence or walls which will prevent persons from accidentally

contacting energized parts.

Enclosure. The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls surrounding an installation to prevent personnel from accidentally contacting energized parts, or to protect the equipment from physical

damage.

Equipment. A general term including material, fittings, devices, appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like, used as a part of, or in connection with, an electrical installation. Equipment grounding conductor.

See "Grounding conductor, equipment."

Explosion-proof apparatus. Apparatus enclosed in a case that is capable of withstanding an explosion of a specified gas or vapor which may occur within it and of preventing the ignition of a specified gas or vapor surrounding the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or explosion of the gas or vapor within, and which

operates at such an external temperature that it will not ignite a surrounding flammable atmosphere.



Exposed. (As applied to live parts.) Capable of being inadvertently touched or approached nearer than a safe distance by a person. It is applied to parts not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated. (See

"Accessible." and "Concealed.")

Exposed. (As applied to wiring methods.) On or attached to the surface or behind panels designed to

allow access. [See "Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.)"]

Exposed. (For the purposes of 29 CFR 1910.308(e), Communications systems.} Where the circuit is in

such a position that in case of failure of supports or insulation, contact with another circuit may result.

Externally operable. Capable of being operated without exposing the operator to contact with live

parts.

Feeder. All circuit conductors between the service equipment, or the generator switchboard of an

isolated plant, and the final branch-circuit overcurrent device.

Fitting. An accessory such as a locknut, bushing, or other part of a wiring system that is intended

primarily to perform a mechanical rather than an electrical function.

Fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An overcurrent protective device with a circuit opening fusible part that is heated and severed by the passage of overcurrent through it. A fuse comprises all the parts that form a unit capable of performing the prescribed functions. It may or may not be the complete device necessary to connect it into an electrical circuit.

Ground. A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental, between an electrical circuit or

equipment and the earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.

Grounded. Connected to earth or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.

Grounded, effectively. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Permanently connected to earth through a ground connection of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient ampacity that ground fault current which

may occur cannot build up to voltages dangerous to personnel.

Grounded conductor. A system or circuit conductor that is intentionally grounded.

Grounding conductor. A conductor used to connect equipment or the grounded circuit of a wiring

system to a grounding electrode or electrodes.

Grounding conductor, equipment. The conductor used to connect the non-currentcarrying metal parts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures to the system grounded conductor and/or the grounding

electrode conductor at the service equipment or at the source of a separately derived system.

Grounding electrode conductor. The conductor used to connect the grounding electrode to the equipment grounding conductor and/or to the grounded conductor of the circuit at the service

equipment or at the source of a separately derived system.

Ground-fault circuit-interrupter. A device whose function is to interrupt the electric circuit to the load when a fault current to ground exceeds some predetermined value that is less than that required to

operate the overcurrent protective device of the supply circuit.



Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected by means of suitable covers, casings, barriers, rails, screens, mats, or platforms to remove the likelihood of approach to a point of

danger or contact by persons or objects.

Health care facilities. Buildings or portions of buildings and mobile homes that contain, but are not limited to, hospitals, nursing homes, extended care facilities, clinics, and medical and dental offices,

whether fixed or mobile.

Heating equipment. For the purposes of 29 CFR 1910.306(g), the term heating equipment includes any

equipment used for heating purposes if heat is generated by induction or dielectric methods.

Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway, well hole, or other vertical opening or space in which an elevator or

dumbwaiter is designed to operate.

Identified. Identified, as used in reference to a conductor or its terminal, means that such conductor or

terminal can be readily recognized as grounded.

Induction heating. Induction heating is the heating of a nominally conductive material due to its own I \2\ R losses when the material is placed in a varying electromagnetic field.

Insulated conductor. See Conductor.

Interrupter switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A switch capable of making, carrying, and interrupting

specified currents.

Irrigation machine. An irrigation machine is an electrically driven or controlled machine, with one or more motors, not hand portable, and used primarily to transport and distribute water for agricultural

purposes.

Isolated. Not readily accessible to persons unless special means for access are used.

Isolated power system. A system comprising an isolating transformer or its equivalent, a line isolation

monitor, and its ungrounded circuit conductors.

Labeled. Equipment is labeled if there is attached to it a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized testing laboratory which, (a) makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment, and (b) whose labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to

determine safe use in a specified manner.

Lighting outlet. An outlet intended for the direct connection of a lamp holder, a lighting fixture, or a

pendant cord terminating in a lamp holder.

Line-clearance tree trimming. The pruning, trimming, repairing, maintaining, removing, or clearing of trees or cutting of brush that is within 10 feet (305 cm) of electric supply lines and equipment.

Listed. Equipment is listed if it is of a kind mentioned in a list which, (a) is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection of the production of such equipment, and (b) states such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use

in a specified manner.

Location



• Damp location. Partially protected locations under canopies, marquees, roofed open porches, and like locations, and interior locations subject to moderate degrees of moisture, such as some basements, some barns, and some cold-storage warehouses.

• Dry location. A location not normally subject to dampness or wetness. A location classified as dry may be temporarily subject to dampness or wetness, as in the case of a building under construction.

• Wet location. Installations underground or in concrete slabs or masonry in direct contact with the earth, and locations subject to saturation with water or other liquids, such as vehicle-

washing areas, and locations exposed to weather and unprotected.

May. If a discretionary right, privilege, or power is conferred, the word "may" is used. If a right, privilege, or power is abridged or if an obligation to abstain from acting is imposed, the word "may" is used with a restrictive "no," "not," or "only." (E.g., no employer may ... ; an employer may not ... ; only qualified

persons may .... )

Medium voltage cable. Type MV medium voltage cable is a single or multiconductor solid dielectric

insulated cable rated 2000 volts or higher.

Metal-clad cable. Type Me cable is a factory assembly of one or more conductors, each individually insulated and enclosed in a metallic sheath of interlocking tape, or a smooth or corrugated tube.

Mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable. Type MI mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable is a factory assembly of one or more conductors insulated with a highly compressed refractory mineral insulation

and enclosed in a liquid tight and gastight continuous copper sheath.

Mobile X-ray. X-ray equipment mounted on a permanent base with wheels and/or casters for moving

while completely assembled. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable.

Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is a factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors having an outer sheath of moisture resistant, flame-retardant, nonmetallic material. Nonmetallic sheathed cable is

manufactured in the following types:

• Type NM. The overall covering has a flame-retardant and moisture-resistant finish. • Type NMC. The overall covering is flame-retardant, moisture-resistant, fungus-resistant, and

corrosion-resistant. Oil (filled) cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A cutout in which all or part of the fuse support and its fuse link or disconnecting blade are mounted in oil with complete immersion of the contacts and the fusible portion of the conducting element (fuse link), so that arc interruption by severing of the fuse link or by opening of the contacts will occur unde r oil.

Open wiring on insulators. Open wiring on insulators is an exposed wiring method using cleats, knobs, tubes, and flexible tubing for the protection and support of single insulated conductors run in or on buildings, and not concealed by the building structure.

Outlet. A point on the wiring system at which current is taken to supply utilization equipment.

Outline lighting. An arrangement of incandescent lamps or electric discharge tubing to outline or call

attention to certain features such as the shape of a building or the decoration of a window.



Oven, wall-mounted. An oven for cooking purposes designed for mounting in or on a wall or other surface and consisting of one of more heating elements, internal wiring, and built-in or separately

mountable controls. (See Cooking unit, counter mounted.)

Overcurrent. Any current in excess of the rated current of equipment or the ampacity of a conductor. It may result from overload (see definition), short circuit, or ground fault. A current in excess of rating may be accommodated by certain equipment and conductors for a given set of conditions. Hence the rules

for overcurrent protection are specific for particular situations.

Overload. Operation of equipment in excess of normal, full load rating, or of a conductor in excess of rated ampacity which, when it persists for a sufficient length of time, would cause damage or dangerous

overheating. A fault, such as a short circuit or ground fault, is not an overload. (See Overcurrent.)

Panelboard. A single panel or group of panel units designed for assembly in the form of a single panel; including buses, automatic overcurrent devices, and with or without switches for the control of light, heat, or power circuits; designed to be placed in a cabinet or cutout box placed in or against a wall or

partition and accessible only from the front. (See Switchboard.)

Permanently installed decorative fountains and reflection pools. Those that are constructed in the ground, on the ground, or in a building in such a manner that the pool cannot be readily disassembled for storage and are served by electrical circuits of any nature. These units are primarily constructed for

their aesthetic value and not intended for swimming or wading.

Power and control tray cable. Type TC power and control tray cable is a factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors, with or without associated bare or covered grounding conductors under a nonmetallic sheath, approved for installation in cable trays, in raceways, or where supported by a

messenger wire.

Power-limited tray cable. Type PL TC nonmetallic-sheathed power limited tray cable is a factory

assembly of two or more insulated conductors under a nonmetallic jacket.

Power outlet. An enclosed assembly which may include receptacles, circuit breakers, fuse holders, fused switches, buses and watt-hour meter mounting means; intended to supply and control power to mobile homes, recreational vehicles or boats, or to serve as a means for distributing power required to operate

mobile or temporarily installed equipment.

Premises wiring system. That interior and exterior wiring, including power, lighting, control, and signal circuit wiring together with all of its associated hardware, fittings, and wiring devices, both permanently and temporarily installed, which extends from the load end of the service drop, or load end of the service lateral conductors to the outlet(s). Such wiring does not include wiring internal to appliances.

fixtures, motors, controllers, motor control centers, and similar equipment.

Qualified person. One familiar with the construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards

involved.

• Note 1: Whether an employee is considered to be a "qualified person" will depend upon various circumstances in the workplace. It is possible and, in fact, likely for an individual to be considered "qualified" with regard to certain equipment in the workplace. but "unqualified" as



to other equipment. (See 29 CFR 1910.332(b)(3) for training requirements that specifically apply to qualified persons.)

• Note 2: An employee who is undergoing on-the-job training and who, in the course of such training, has demonstrated an ability to perform duties safely at his or her level of training and who is under the direct supervision of a qualified person is considered to be a qualified person

for the performance of those duties.

Raceway. A channel designed expressly for holding wires, cables, or bus bars, with additional functions as permitted in this subpart. Raceways may be of metal or insulating material, and the term includes rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, intermediate metal conduit, liquid tight flexible metal conduit, flexible metallic tubing, flexible metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, under floor raceways, cellular concrete floor raceways, cellular metal floor raceways, surface raceways, wire ways, and bus

ways.

Readily accessible. Capable of being reached quickly for operation, renewal, or inspections, without requiring those to whom ready access is requisite to climb over or remove obstacles or to resort to

portable ladders, chairs, etc. (See "Accessible.)

Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact device installed at the outlet for the connection of a single attachment plug. A single receptacle is a single contact device with no other contact device on the same

yoke. A multiple receptacle is a single device containing two or more receptacles.

Receptacle outlet. An outlet where one or more receptacles are installed. Remote-control circuit. Any

electric circuit that controls any other circuit through a relay or an equivalent device.

Sealable equipment. Equipment enclosed in a case or cabinet that is provided with a means of sealing or locking so that live parts cannot be made accessible without opening the enclosure. The equipment

mayor may not be operable without opening the enclosure.



WC Welding Services Inc. Fall Protection Program

1. Written Program. The company will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction:

• On an annual basis • When changes occur to 29 CFR, that prompt revision of this document • When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document • When there is an accident or close-call that relates to this area of safety • Review the program any time fall protection procedures fail Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of

work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives.

2. Statement of Policy. The hazards of potential falls at heights of 6 feet and above will be addressed in this document. This instruction describes a systematic approach that must be used to protect and prevent people from falling. This instruction also lists some of the most common fall hazards, and

provides recommendations and guidelines for selecting fall arrest systems.

3. Facility/Department Evaluation. The workplace will be assessed before each assigned job for potential fall hazards. Proper fall arrest equipment will be used for jobs requiring fall protection when elimination of the hazard(s) is not possible. This company will evaluate the facili ties by department to determine fall hazards. This preliminary evaluation will detail the required steps for protecting employees from fall hazards. A fall hazards assessment sheet (see appendix) will be used to document fall hazard assessments. A complete list of fall hazard locations and protective measures procedures will be

maintained.

4. Training. A training program will be provided for all employees who will be exposed to fall hazards in the work area, and will be conducted by competent personnel. The program will include but will not be

limited to:

• A description of fall hazards in the work area • Procedures for using fall prevention and protection systems • Equipment limitations • The elements encompassed in total fall distance • Prevention, control and fall arrest systems • Inspection and storage procedures for the equipment Generally, workers will be trained to recognize the hazards of falling from elevations and to avoid falls from grade level to lower levels through holes or openings in walking/working surfaces. Training programs will include prevention, control and fall arrest systems. It must be ensured that appropriate fall arrest systems are installed, and that employees know how to use them before beginning any work

that requires fall protection.

4.1 Initial training. Training will be conducted prior to job assignment. This employer will provide training to ensure that the purpose, function, and proper use of fall protection is understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, and usage is



acquired by employees. This standard practice instruction will be provided to, and read by all

employees receiving training. The training will include, as a minimum the following:

4.1.1 Types of fall protection equipment appropriate for use.

4.1.2 Recognition of applicable fall hazards associated with the work to be completed

and the locations of such.

4.1.3 Load determination and balancing requirements.

4.1.4 Procedures for removal of protection devices from service for repair or

replacement.

4.1.5 All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where fall protection devices may be utilized, will be instructed to an awareness level concerning

hazards associated with fall protection operations.

4.1.6 Fall protection equipment identification. Fall protection equipment having identification numbers will be checked for legibility. Fall protection equipment having

illegible identification markings will be turned in to the supervisor for inspection.

4.1.7 Equipment maintenance and inspection requirements.

4.1 .8 Equipment donning and doffing procedures.

4.1.9 Equipment strengths and limitations.

4.1.10 Certification. This employer will certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification will contain each employee's name and dates of training. Training will be accomplished by competent personnel.

4.2 Refresher training. This standard practice instruction will be provided to, and read by all employees receiving refresher training. The training content will be identical to initial training. Refresher training will be conducted on a semiannual basis or when the following conditions are

met, whichever event occurs sooner.

4.2.1 Retraining will be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever (and prior to) a change in their job assignments, a change in the type of fall protection equipment used, or when a known hazard is added to the work environment which

affects the fall/ protection program.

4.2.2 Additional retraining will also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of fall protection equipment or

procedures.

4.2.3 Whenever a fall protection procedure fails.

4.2.4 The retraining will reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised




4.2.5 Certification. This employer will certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification will contain each employee's name and dates of training. Training will be accomplished by competent

personnel.

5. Fall Hazard Control Procedures (Fall Prevention).

5.1 Control Procedures Development. Once a facility evaluation has been accomplished, procedures will be developed, documented and utilized for the control of potential fall hazards. Fall prevention plans will be designed by company competent individuals or other competent personnel. Company engineers (where utilized) or other competent personnel will be provided with any required specialized training to recognize fall hazards, to understand and address fall prevention techniques, and to become familiar with fall arrest equipment and procedures. It is critical that they consider fall protection design for the safety of operations where employees must work at elevated heights. Safety during access and egress from elevated work sites will also be considered. The following guidelines will be used when planning work at elevated heights:

• Involve the Safety Department early in the project planning/job planning so that they can recommend appropriate fall-protection measures and equipment.

• Involve qualified Engineers when load rating of anchorage points must be determined or is in doubt. Required training will be provided as necessary.

• Involve Engineering and Maintenance when anchorage points must be installed. • This Company will be specific in dealing with fall hazards when developing contracts.

Contractors will be required to provide a written fall protection program which describes the Contractors' fall protection policies and procedures when they will be working at

elevated heights.

5.2 Procedural Format. The following format will be followed when developing fall protection procedures. The Safety Officer will be responsible for the implementation of these procedures. The procedures will clearly and specifically outline the scope, purpose, authorization, rules, and techniques to be utilized to control fall hazards, and the means to enforce compliance including, but

not limited to, the following:

5.2.1 A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure.

5.2.2 A review of accident records, including OSHA 300 logs and Workers' Compe nsation

documentation.

5.2.3 Interviews with employees and groups of employees whose work environment includes or

may include fall hazards.

5.2.4 Physical observations of the work environment(s) that involve fall hazards or the potential

of such.

5.2.5 Observations of individuals and their job tasks and work habits that expose them to

existing or potential fall hazards.

5.2.6 The procedures contained in the company fall protection program.



5.2.7 Specific procedural steps for the use and operation of body harness systems, and other fall

protection systems.

5.2.8 Specific procedural steps for the placement, erection, inspection, maintenance, disassembly and transfer of fall protection systems or devices and the person(s) responsible for

them.

5.2.9 Specific requirements for testing fall protection systems or equipment to determine and

verify the effectiveness of the fall protection control measures (not load testing).

5.2.10 The correct procedures to rescue employees who have fallen.

5.2.11 The role of each employee in fall protection plans and applicable policies.

5.2.12 Specific requirements for testing fall protection systems or equipment.

6. Protective Materials and Hardware. Appropriate fall protection devices will be provided for potential fall hazards. Selection of the equipment will be based on the fall protection evaluation. Evaluations will

be conducted by the following personnel authorized to evaluate fall protection requirements:

Duty Title

1. Wess Carnes - Program Manager

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

6.1 Selection Criteria.

6.1.1 Fall Protection devices will be singularly identified; will be the only devices(s) used for controlling falls; will not be used for other purposes; and will meet the requirements

of applicable ANSI, ASTM and OSHA requirements.

6.1.1.1 Capable of withstanding the environment to which they are exposed for the

maximum period of time that exposure is expected.

6.1.1.2 Anchor points will not deteriorate when located in corrosive environments such

as areas where acid and alkali chemicals are handled and stored.

6.1.1.3 Capable of withstanding the ultimate load of 5,000 Ibs. For the maximum period

of time that exposure is expected.

6.1.1.4 Standardization within company facilities. Fall protection devices will be

standardized whenever possible.



7. Fall Protection Systems. When fall hazards cannot be eliminated through any other means, fall arrest systems will be used to control falls. Proper training on the use of fall arrest equipment is essential and

will be provided prior to use.

7.1 Full Body Harness Systems. A full body harness system consists of a full body harness, lanyard, energy shock absorber, and self-locking snap hook. Before using a full-body harness

system, the supervisor and/or the user must address such issues as:

7.1.1 Has the user been trained to recognize fall hazards and to use fall arrest systems

properly?

7.1.2 Are all components of the system compatible according to the manufacturer's

instructions?

7.1.3 Have appropriate anchorage points and attachment techniques been reviewed?

7.1.4 Has free fall distance been considered so that a worker will not strike a lower

surface or object before the fall is arrested?

7.1.5 Have swing fall hazards been eliminated?

7.1.6 Have safe methods to retrieve fallen workers been planned?

7.1.7 Has the full-body harness and all of its components been inspected both before

each use and on a regular semi-annual basis?

7.1.8 Is any of the equipment, including lanyards, connectors, and lifelines, subject to

such problems as welding damage, chemical corrosion, or sandblasting operations?

7.2 Retractable Lifelines

7.2.1 A retractable lifeline is a fall arrest device used in conjunction with other components of a fall arrest system. Retractable lifelines should be used by one person at

a time.

7.2.2 A properly inspected and maintained retractable lifeline, when correctly installed and used as part of the fall arrest system, automatically stops a person's descent in a

short distance after the onset of an accidental fall.

7.2.3 Retractable lifelines may be considered when working in areas such as on roofs and scaffolds, or in tanks, towers, vessels, and manholes. Also, retractable lifelines should be considered when climbing such equipment as vertical fixed ladders. Before using a retractable lifeline, the supervisor and or the user must address the following questions:

7.2.3.1 Has the user been trained to use a retractable lifeline correctly?

7.2.3.2 Is the retractable lifeline being used in conjunction with a complete fall

arrest system?

7.2.3.3 Is the equipment under a regular maintenance program?



7.2.3.4 Has the equipment been inspected within the last six months?

7.3 Standard Harnesses. Harnesses for general purpose work should be Class III, constructed with a sliding back D-ring. Standard harnesses are suitable for continuous fall protection while climbing, riding, or working on elevated personnel platforms. They are suitable for positioning,

fall arrest, and the rescue and evacuation of people who are working at elevated heights.

8. Inspection and Maintenance. To ensure that fall protection systems are ready and able to perform their required tasks, a program of inspection and maintenance will be implemented and maintained. The following as a minimum, will comprise the basic requirements of the inspection and maintenance

program:

8.1 Equipment manufacturer's instructions will be incorporated into the inspection and

preventive maintenance procedures.

8.2 All fall protection equipment will be inspected prior to each use, and a documented inspection at intervals not to exceed 6 months, or in accordance with the manufacturers

guidelines.

8.3 The user will inspect his/her equipment prior to each use and check the inspection date.

8.4 Any fall protection equipment subjected to a fall or impact load, will be removed from service immediately and inspected by a qualified person (sent back to the manufacturer).

8.5 Check all equipment for mold, damage, wear, mildew, or distortion.

8.6 Hardware should be free of cracks, sharp edges, or burns.

8.7 Ensure that no straps are cut, broken, torn or scraped.

8.8 Special situations such as radiation, electrical conductivity, and chemical effects will be

considered.

8.9 Equipment that is damaged or in need of maintenance will be tagged as unusable, and will not be stored in the same area as serviceable equipment.

8.10 A detailed inspection policy will be used for equipment stored for periods exceeding one

month.

8.11 Anchors and mountings will be inspected before each use by the user and supervisor for

signs of damage.

9. Most Common and Most Dangerous Fall Hazards. The tasks and situations listed below present inherent fall hazards. Give special attention to providing fall prevention and/or fall control for them, remembering that this attention is necessary in the design, e ngineering, planning, and execution stages of work. Supervisors will give special consideration to fall

protection for the following tasks:

9.1 Working from crane booms and tower cranes.



9.2 Working on top of machinery and equipment, such as overhead crane s, furnaces, conveyors

and presses.

9.3 Other work that involves fall hazards, such as 'off-chutes' from main piping in duct work or

boilers.

9.4 Working on roofs, with deteriorating or unsupported sections and framing.

9.5 Working over chemical tanks or open pits.

9.6 Working from a fixed or portable ladders, or climbing systems.

9.7 Performing work on water towers, product tanks, silos, pipe racks, presses, and floor pits.

10. Contractor Responsibilities. In addition to complying with the fall protection requirements that apply to all company employees, each contractor who is retained to perform operations that involve fall

protection will:

10.1 Obtain any available information regarding fall hazards and protective measures from this

company.

10.2 Coordinate fall protection operations with the company, when both company personnel and

contractor personnel will be working in or near recognized fall hazard locations.

10.3 Inform the company of the fall protection program that the contractor will follow and of any hazards confronted or created in conducting operations involving fall protection within company owned

facilities through a debriefing immediately prior to the operation.

11. Accident Investigation. An accident investigation will be conducted whenever a fall or near miss occurs no matter the severity. The accident investigation shall provide corrective measure before anyone can proceed in continuing work.

11. Definitions

Anchorage means a secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards or deceleration devices.

Body belt means a strap with means both for securing it about the waist and for attaching it to a

lanyard, lifeline, or deceleration device.

Body harness means straps which may be secured about the employee in a manner that will distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with means for attaching

it to other components of a personal fall arrest system.

Competent person means a person who is capable of identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions in any personal fait arrest system or any component thereof, as well as in their application and use with

related equipment.

Connector means a device which is used to couple (connect) parts of the personal fall arrest system and positioning device systems together. It may be an independent component of the system, such as a

carabiner, or it may be an integral component of part of the system.



Deceleration device means any mechanism with a maximum length of 3.5 feet, such as a rope grab, rip stitch lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyards. self-retracting lifelines, etc. which serves to dissipate a substantial amount of energy during a fall arrest, or otherwise limit the energy imposed on an employee

during fall arrest.

Energy shock absorber means a device that limits shock-load forces on the body. Failure means load refusal, breakage, or separation of component parts. Load refusal is the point where the ultimate

strength is exceeded.

Fall arrest system means a system specifically designed to secure, suspend, or assist in retrieving a worker in or from a hazardous work area. The basic components of a fall arrest system include

anchorage, anchorage connector, lanyard, shock absorber, harness, and self-locking snap hook.

Free fall means the act of falling before a personal fait arrest system begins to apply force to arrest the

fall.

Free fall distance means the vertical displacement of the fall arrest attachment point on the employee's body belt or body harness between onset of the fall and just before the system begins to apply force to arrest the fall (maximum of 6 feet). This distance excludes deceleration distance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation, but includes any deceleration device slide distance or self-retracting lifeline lanyard

extension before they operate and fall arrest forces occur.

Hole means a gap or void 2 inches or more in its least dimension, in a floor, roof, or other

walking/working surface.

Lanyard means a flexible line of rope, wire rope, or strap which generally has a connector at each end

for connecting the body belt or body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline or anchorage.

Leading edge means the edge of a floor roof, or formwork for a floor or other walking/working surface which changes location as additional floor, roof, decking, or formwork sections are placed, formed or constructed. A leading edge is considered to be an unprotected side and edge during periods when it is

not actively and continuously under construction.

Lifeline means a component consisting of a flexible line for connection to an anchorage at one end to hang vertically or for connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch horizontally and which serves as

a means for connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system to the anchorage.

Opening means a gap or void 30 inches or more high and 18 inches or more wide, in a wall or partition,

through which employees can fall to a lower level.

Personal fall arrest system means a system used to arrest an employee in a fall from

a working level. It consists of an anchorage, connectors, a body belt or body harness

and may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combinations of

these. As of January 1, 1998, the use of a body belt for fall arrest is prohibited.

Positioning device system means a body belt or body harness system rigged to allow

an employee to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a wall, and work



with both hands free while leaning.

Qualified person means one with a recognized degree or professional certificate and

extensive knowledge and experience in the subject field who is capable of design,

analysis, evaluation and specifications in the subject work, project, or product.

Retractable lifeline means a fall arrest device that allows free travel without slack rope, but locks

instantly when a fall begins.

Rope grab means a deceleration device which travels on a lifeline and automatically, by friction, engages the lifeline and locks so as to arrest the fall of an employee. A rope grab usually employs the principle of

inertial locking, cam/level locking. or both.

Safety-monitoring system means a safety system in which a competent person is responsible for

recognizing and warning employees of fall hazards.

Self-retracting lifeline lanyard means a deceleration device containing a drum-wound line which can be slowly extracted from, or retracted onto, the drum under slight tension during normal employee

movement, and which, after onset of a fall, automatically locks the drum and arrests the fall.

Snaphook means a connector comprised of a hook-shaped member with a normally closed keeper, or similar arrangement, which may be opened to permit the hook to receive an object and, when releas ed, automatically closes to retain the object.

Snaphooks are generally one of two types:

• The locking type with a self-closing , self-locking keeper which remains closed and locked until unlocked and pressed open for connection or disconnection; or

• The non-locking type with a self-closing keeper which remains closed until pressed open forconnection or disconnection. As of January 1, 1998, the use of a non-locking snaphook as part

of personal fall arrest systems and positioning device systems is prohibited.

Toeboard means a low protective barrier that will prevent the fall of materials and equipment to lower

levels and provide protection from falls for personnel.

Walking/Working surface means any surface, whether horizontal or vertical on which an employee walks or works, including, but not limited to, floors, roofs, ramps, bridges, runways, formwork and concrete reinforcing steel but not including ladders, vehicles, or trailers, on which employees must be

located in order to perform their job duties.

Warning line system means a barrier erected on a roof to warn employees that they are approaching an unprotected roof side or edge, and which designates an area in which roofing work may take place

without the use of guardrail, body belt, or safety net systems to protect employees in the area.

Work area means that portion of a walking/working surface where job duties are being performed.



WC Welding Services Inc. Abrasive Blasting

Purpose:

To establish procedures outlining the safety requirements for abrasive blasting to protect WC

Welding employees. Scope:

This procedure applies to all employees and subcontractors working within WC Welding controlled worksites. This Abrasive Blasting Procedure covers the minimum requirements to perform abrasive blasting.

Policy:

Mechanical Precautions & Procedures

3.2 Machines and hoses should be inspected frequently and all parts showing

excessive wear should be repaired or replaced.

3.3 Nozzles should be externally attached to the hose by a fitting, which will

prevent accidental disengagement.

3.4 The blast cleaning nozzle will have an operating valve that is held open manually.

Additionally, the nozzle will have a support device so that it can be mounted for

storage when not being used.

3.5 Lengths of hose should be joined by external metallic connectors. The connectors

shall have pin-clips to prevent disengagement. Anti-whip arresters may be used

between each connector.

3.6 All Bull Hoses, from the compressor to the abrasive blast pot, shall have pin-clips

and anti-whip arresters on each end.

A remote control "deadman" valve must be provided. Electric deadmen shall be

low voltage (12 volt DC) and have continuous wire or plug connections provided.

In abrasive blasting situations where flammable or explosive dust mixtures may be

present, construction of equipment and any exhaust system, including all electric wiring, will conform to American National Standard Installation of Blower and

Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1-1961 (NFPA 91-1961), as well as 1926 Subpart S (i.e. underground construction).

Prior to operation where flammable or explosive dust mixtures may exist, confirm

that the blast nozzle is bonded and grounded to prevent the build up of static

charges.

Where flammable or explosive dust mixtures may be present, confirm that the



abrasive blasting enclosure, ducts and the dust collector are constructed with loose panels or explosion venting areas, located on sides away from any occupied area.

These areas will provide pressure relief in the event of an explosion. This is in accordance with principles explained in the National Fire Protection Association Explosion Venting Guide, NFPA 68-1954.

Compressed air can only be used for cleaning objects and materials when the

pressure is reduced to less than 30 p.s.i. and effective chip guarding and personal

protective equipment are utilized.

At no time will compressed air be used for cleaning clothes while being worn or

directly applied to any part of the body. Personal Protective Equipment:

Operators should be equipped with heavy canvas or leather gloves and aprons.

Safety shoes will also be worn.

Eye, face, hearing and respiratory protection shall be supplied to all personnel

working.

Precautions will be taken to protect personnel in the blasting zone including the

blasting operator from excessive noise exposure by supplying and requiring the

use of earplugs or muffs.

Vortex tubes that cool the air supply to the blasters hood will be considered

depending on season and exposure of the employee to heat sources.

Housekeeping and Sanitation:

Good housekeeping practices should be followed in abrasive blasting

operation to prevent slips, trips, and falls.

A facility should be available for blasters to wash before eating and after

blasting operations.

Do not allow dust to accumulate on the floor or ledges outside of an abrasive -blasting enclosure. Clean up dust spills in a prompt and consistent manner. Kee p

walkways and aisles clear of abrasive blasting product such as steel shot or any other material that could cause a slipping hazard.

Administrative Dust Control Methods

Isolation

1. As most of the blasting as possible should be done in a specified Location, a



blasting zone (where dust is visible) should be established and marked off with

signs around the perimeter of the area such as:

CAUTION

Abrasive Blasting Area, Eye and Ear Protection and Respirators Must Be Worn In This Area.

2. Blasting should not be done when wind direction and velocity carry visible

dust to people unprotected by proper respirators.

Enclosure

1. Blasting of small objects should be done in an enclosure which is designed to

specifically reduce the dust hazards. Respiratory Protection:

All use of respirators or other respiratory protective equipment will be in accordance with the

Company’s written Respiratory Protection Program. No employee will don or attempt to use a respirator unless he or she has undergone proper medical evaluation; has been fit tested; trained in the proper selection, use, maintenance and storage of the

specific respirator; and is individually authorized by the Company for wearing a respirator in the scope

and course of work. During construction and pipeline maintenance operations overall, and abrasive blasting specifically as per this program, special safety and health consi derations will be given

whenever hazardous dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, gases or other substances either exist or are

produced in the course of work. Concentrations of any such exposure will not exceed the limits specified in 1926.55(a) OSHA. When ventilation is used as an engineering control method, the system shall be installed and operated

in accordance with these same OSHA requirements.

Apron and dust collar, properly fitted and properly worn, shall be used by all persons blasting. In addition to the hood, blasters should also wear a disposable

respirator when working in a high dust concentration. This would provide protection when the blasting operation has ceased and the blaster is removing the air supplied equipment or when merely taking a break.

Abrasive-blasting hoods shall be worn by all abrasive-blasting operators -

1. At all times,

2. When working inside of blast-clean rooms,



3. When using silica sand in manual blasting operations where the nozzle and blast are

not physically separated from the operator in an exhaust ventilated enclosure,

4. Where concentrations of toxic dust dispersed by the abrasive blasting may exceed the

limits set in paragraph 1919.93 OSHA and the nozzle and blast are not physically

separated from the operator in an exhaust-ventilated enclosure.

In situations where the abrasives and the surface coatings on the materials blasted become shattered and pulverized during blasting operations, the dust

formed by this work will contain particles of a size that can be breathed (respirable size).

Consequently, consideration must be given to the composition and toxicity of these dust

sources when evaluating potential health hazards of the work.

Concentration of respirable dust or fume in the abrasive blasting operator’s breathing zone

will be kept below Permissible Exposure Limits as required by OSHA. The same consideration

will be given regarding exposure of any other worker in the area to this respirable dust. Particulate filter respirators, commonly referred to as dust-filter respirators, properly fitted,

may be used for short, intermittent, or occasional dust exposure such as clean-up, dumping

of dust collectors, or unloading shipments of sand at a receiving point, when it is not feasible to control the dust by enclosure, exhaust ventilation, or other means. Respirators

used shall be certified for protection against the specific type of dust.

1. Dust-filter respirators may be used to protect the operator of outside abrasive-blasting

operations where non-silica abrasives are used on materials having low toxicities.

2. Dust-filter respirators shall not be used for continuous protection where silica sand is

used as the blasting abrasive, or toxic materials are blasted.

3. Respirators should be cleaned daily. This can be accomplished by use of vacuum or

water.

4. Respirators should be kept in maximum operating condition at all times.

5. After their daily cleaning, respirators and hoods should be kept and hung in an upright

position to prevent sand spilling inside.

6. Air supply shall be free of harmful quantities of dust, mists or noxious gases, and shall

meet Grade D requirements. The use and quality of supplied air will be in accordance

with 29 CFR 1910.134(i).

7. The air from the regular compressed air line of a compressor unit may be used for the

abrasive-blasting hood if:



a. A trap and carbon filter system (with in-line CO monitor alarm) is installed

that will remove oil, water particulate and odor and is regularly maintained.

A record of the maintenance of these filters should be kept.

c. A pressure reducing diaphragm or valve is installed to reduce the

pressure to requirements of the particular type of abrasive

blasting respirator.

d. An automatic control is provided to either sound an alarm or shut

down the compressor in case of overheating.

e. Periodic checks should be made to ensure that the worker is not

being exposed to amounts of carbon monoxide >10 ppm.



WC Welding Services Inc. Rigging

1. Purpose: The purpose of the Rigging Section is to educate all employees on who a rigger is and what the rigger’s responsibilities encompass. 2. Policy: It is WC WELDING’s policy that all employees will be API Rigger certified prior to being able to work in the field. 3. Procedures: Only personnel who are API Rigger certified may attach or detach lifting equipment to loads or lifting loads. All rigging equipment shall be inspected prior to use and at the beginning and end of each shift. If the equipment is deemed to be defective it will immediately be tagged and removed from se rvice.

3.1 What is a rigger? Anyone who attaches or unattaches lifting equipment to loads or lifting devices, and who

gives signals to crane operators. 4. Rigger Qualifications:

API Rigging Course (found at: http://www.api.org/certifications/tpcp/forms/upload/EvalReqsSupplmt-Instructor-Led%20RP2D%2010-9-06.pdf )

The course should familiarize students with: o Rigging o Hardware o Slings o Safety issues o Classroom training o Hands-on-situations

Inspection Use, selection, and maintenance of gear

o Final exam 5. Rigger’s Responsibilities:

1. Verify load weight by marking on the load 2. Select and inspect the proper rigging equipment

http://www.api.org/certifications/tpcp/forms/upload/EvalReqsSupplmt-Instructor-Led%20RP2D%2010-9-06.pdf

http://www.api.org/certifications/tpcp/forms/upload/EvalReqsSupplmt-Instructor-Led%20RP2D%2010-9-06.pdf



3. Responsible for his/her own safety and must remain alert at all times 4. Responsible for keeping all unnecessary personnel out of the lifting area 5. Responsible for halting operations and alerting the crane operator to any unsafe condit ions

or practices during lifting. 6. Must know and demonstrate competency in using all signals used in material handling.

Only personnel that have received rigger training and certification that is recognized by the MMS may perform rigging operations for cranes operation on customer property. 6. WC WELDING HSE requirements to minimize incident during rigging operations:

All personnel shall be clear of a load before it is picked up and shall remain clear at all times. Personnel shall face the crane or gin pole truck in full view of the crane operator and/or signal man. Personnel including those holding the tag line shall never be under suspended loads or go between the load and other objects where they may be trapped or crushed.

The crane operator shall never leave the controls while a load is suspended.

Riders shall not be permitted on the exterior of gin pole trucks.

Non-conducting tag lines shall be used to control all suspended loads. Chains or steel cables are not acceptable. Tag lines shall be attached before a load is lifted.

A signal man shall be used if the crane operator does not have full view of lifting operation. Where practical, the use of radios or other communication equipment is also recommended. The crane and gin pole operator shall respond only to signals from the signal man, but shall obey a stop signal from anyone at anytime.

The crane and gin pole operator shall inspect lift lines, rigging, slings and crane and gin pole fitting/fasteners daily when in use or prior to each lift and replace if necessary. This equipment shall be properly rated for the intended load and certification tags attached to all slings. All wire rope clamps shall comply with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.251. Wire rope shall not be secured with knots.

The operator shall inspect all cranes and gin pole trucks prior to use. Cranes should be load marked per OSHA 29 CFR 1910.179. In addition, cranes shall have the most recent inspection records posted in the cab.

A crane shall not be used to pull a load sideways.

A crane boom shall not be used as a ladder for walking, except for necessary maintenance of the boom and its components.

When not in use, o Crane boom or gin pole mast shall be kept in the cradle. o Any other rigging materials shall be stored and moved from present working area to

eliminate any potential hazard for working personnel.

Offshore Specific: crane operations during helicopter approaches or departures are strictly prohibited. Prior to helicopter approaches or departures the crane operator shall:

o Land the attached load o Position or secure boom to avoid interference with helicopter o Disengage the clutch o Set all locking devices o Put controls in “off” or “neutral” position o Stop engine



o While wearing high visibility green vest, step out of cab or away from the controls to indicate to the pilot that the helicopter has been seen.

For rigging, never use a chain when it is possible to use a wire rope. Determine the load weight before rigging it and do not exceed the safe working load of any

equipment.

Before being unhooked, all loads shall be safely landed and properly blocked.

Wire ropes slings and chain shall never be shortened by tying knots in them or by wrapping them around the crane hook. Protruding ends of strands in splices on slings shall be covered or blunted.

On all overhaul ball assemblies, lower load block, or other attachments hooks shall be used that can be closed and locked to eliminate hook throat opening.

o Alloy shackles can also be used with a bolt, nut and pin instead of hooks.

Slings shall be protected from sharp edges by blocking or protective pads. When multi-leg slings are used, each leg of the sling should be loaded evenly.

Kinked wire rope slings shall be removed from service. Wire ropes shall be kept lubricated and free of corrosion.

7. Tag Lines:

If tag lines are impractical during final positioning of the load caution should be taken to ensure that no part of the person’s body guiding the load is between the load and other objects where they may be trapped or crushed.

No attempt to guide a load shall be made with the tag line wrapped around a hand or waist.

The tag line must be free of knots. A tag line shall be of sufficient length so that no part of the person guiding the load shall be

under the load at any time.

When lifting a load with a gin pole truck, a snub line from the load to the truck may be used in lieu of a hand-held tag line. However a swamper (flagman) must be used. Swampers will be required to stand back a minimum of 10’ from a load that is being lifted or tail boarded on a truck or trailer.

8. Use of a crane to lift personnel: The use of a crane to hoist employees on a personnel platform to the worksite is prohibited except when the erection, use, and dismantling of the conventional means is more hazardous. Cranes used to lift personnel should be equipped with an “anti-two-blocking” device per OSHA CFR 1926.550. In addition, the MMS requires a ¼” tag line to be used with personnel baskets.



WC Welding Services Inc. Walking/Working Surface

1. Written program:

WC Welding Services will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.21 - 23 that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation requires a written program for job safety, health, that is endorsed and advocated by the highest level of management within this company and that outlines our goals and plans. This written program will be communicated to all required personnel. It is designed to establish clear goals, and

objectives.

2. General requirements:

All facilities owned by this company will be maintained in a safe and healthful manner. Certain environments within the facility(s) of WC Welding Services may contain a reasonable probability of injury that can be prevented by proper maintenance and supervision. WC WELDING shall do all possible to ensure the safety of our employees. No employee shall knowingly be subjected to a hazardous condition without all possible protective measures first being implemented. Measures for

the control of toxic materials are considered to be outside the scope of this instruction.

3. Housekeeping (General Company Policy):

3.1 All offices, work stations, work areas, passageways, storerooms, restrooms, and service

rooms shall be kept clean, orderly, sanitary, and free of known hazards.

3.2 The floor of every workroom shall be maintained in a clean and, so far as possible, a dry condition. Where wet processes are used, drainage shall be maintained and false floors,

platforms, mats, or other dry standing places will be provided where practicable.

3.3 To facilitate cleaning, every floor, working place, and passageway shall be kept free from protruding nails, splinters, holes, or loose boards or other hindrances that would prevent

efficient maintenance.

3.4 Sufficient illumination will be provided in all areas at all times. Employees discovering

lighting deficiencies will report them to immediate supervisor for correction.

3.5 Work areas. All employees are responsible for maintaining their immediate work areas in a

clean and orderly manner, and for notifying maintenance of conditions beyond their control.

3.6 Machines and equipment. Supervisors will ensure that machines and equipment under the ir control are maintained in a clean and orderly manner. Crowding should be avoided where ever

possible.

3.7 Aisles. All employees are responsible to ensure that aisles are kept clean, free of material,

finished parts, scrap, or any type of debris.

3.8 Floors. Maintenance will ensure that all floor spaces are maintained in a clean and orderly

manner.



3.9 Walls and ceilings. Maintenance will ensure that all wall spaces are properly painted, and maintained in a clean and orderly manner. Postings will be confined to bulletin boards and other

appropriate areas.

3.10 Storage facilities. Appropriate procedures will be followed based on the type of storage

facility.

3.11 Employee facilities. Lockers will be used to protect personal belongings from theft. Locker areas will be kept clean and orderly. Belongings found insecure will be turned over to Project

Manager for disposition.

3.12 Emergency exit doors. Will be kept free of any obstacles at all times. Any employee finding an emergency door blocked should immediately report the condition to Project Manager for correction. Exit lights and signs will also be maintained in proper condition at all times, and

immediately reported if deficient.

3.13 Spills (trained personnel). Spills will be contained immediately by any e mployee trained in

spill containment and immediately reported to immediate supervisor.

3.14 Spills (untrained personnel). Spills will be immediately reported to immediate supervisor by

any employee discovering the spill not having training in containment measures.

4. Aisles and passageways:

4.1 Where mechanical handling equipment is used, sufficient safe clearances will be maintained for aisles, at loading docks, through doorways and wherever turns or passage must be made. Aisles and passageways shall be kept clear and in good repairs, with no obstruction across or in aisles that could create a hazard.

4.2 Permanent aisles and passageways shall be appropriately marked.

5. Covers and guardrails:

Covers and/or guardrails shall be provided to protect personnel from the hazards of open pits, tanks,

vats, ditches, etc.

5.1 Supervisory responsibilities. Work areas under their control will be properly guarded, covered, cordoned off, or marked to prevent injury. Supervisors will ensure the following are properly secu red

and reported to maintenance:

5.1.1 Stairways unguarded/containing holes.

5.1.2 Ladder way floor openings unguarded.

5.1.3 Hatchway and chute floor opening unguarded.

5.1.4 Skylight floor openings unguarded.

5.1.5 Pit and trapdoor floor openings unguarded.

5.1.6 Manhole floor openings unguarded.



5.1.7 Temporary floor openings unguarded.

5.1.8 Floor holes/openings unguarded.

5.1.9 Chute wall openings unprotected.

5.1.10 Window wall openings unprotected.

5.1.11 Temporary wall openings unprotected.

5.1.12 Open-sided floor or platforms unguarded.

5.1.13 Runways unprotected.

5.1.14 Stairways unprotected.

6. Floor loading protection:

6.1 Whenever loads or single items exceeding 350lbs are to be placed on floor areas or roofing

structures, employees will determine the safe load capacity before taking this action.

6.2 Safe floor loading capacities will be marked on plates of approved design which shall be

supplied and securely affixed in a conspicuous place in each space to which they relate.

6.3 Such plates will not be removed or defaced. If lost, removed, or defaced, they will be

reported to immediate supervisor and replaced immediately.

6.4 All employees must note that it is unlawful to place, or cause, or permit to be placed, on any floor or roof of a building or other structure a load greater than that for which such floor or roof

is approved by the building official.

7. Guarding floor and wall openings, and holes:

7.1 Protection for floor openings.

7.1.1 Stairway floor openings. Stairway floor openings shall be guarded by a standard railing constructed in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.23, paragraph (e). The railing shall be provided on all exposed sides (except at entrances to stairways). For infrequently used stairways where traffic across the opening prevents the use of a fixed standard railing (as when located in aisle spaces, etc.), the guard shall consist of a hinged floor opening cover of standard strength and construction and removable standard railings on all exposed sides (except at entrance to stairway).

7.1.2 Ladder way floor openings. Ladder way floor openings or platforms shall be guarded by a standard railing with standard toeboard on all exposed sides (except at entrance to opening), with the passage through the railing either provided with a swinging gate or so offset that a person cannot walk directly into the opening.

7.1.3 Hatchway and chute floor openings. Hatchway and chute floor opening shall be

guarded by one of the following:



7.1.3.1 Hinged floor opening cover of standard strength and construction equipped with standard railings or permanently attached thereto so as to leave only one exposed side. When the opening is not in use, the cover shall be closed or the exposed side shall be

guarded at both top and intermediate positions by removable standard railings.

7.1.3.2 A removable railing with toeboard on not more than two sides of the opening and fixed standard railings with toeboards on all other exposed sides. The removable railings shall be kept in place when the opening is not in use. Where operating conditions necessitate the feeding of material into any hatchway or chute opening,

protection shall be provided to prevent a person from falling through the opening.

7.1.4 Skylight floor openings. Skylight floor openings and holes shall be guarded by a

standard skylight or a fixed standard railing on all exposed sides.

7.1.4.1 Skylight screens shall be of such construction and mounting that they are capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds applied perpendicularly at anyone area on the screen. They shall also be of such construction and mounting that under ordinary loads or impacts, they will not deflect downward sufficiently to break the glass below them. The construction shall be of grillwork with openings not more than 4 inches long or of slatwork with openings not

more than 2 inches wide with length unrestricted.

7.1.5 Pit and trapdoor floor openings. Pit and trapdoor floor openings, infrequently used, shall be guarded by a floor opening cover of standard strength and construction. While the cover is not in place, the pit or trap opening shall be constantly attended by

someone or shall be protected on all exposed sides by removable standard railings.

7.1.6 Manhole floor openings. Manhole floor openings shall be guarded by a standard manhole cover which need not be hinged in place. While the cover is not in place, the manhole opening shall be constantly attended by someone or shall be protected by

removable standard railings.

7.1.7 Temporary floor openings. Temporary floor openings shall have standard railings,

or shall be constantly attended by someone.

7.1.8 Floor holes. Floor holes into which persons can accidentally walk shall be guarded

by either:

7.1.8.1 A standard railing with standard toeboard on all exposed sides, or

7.1.8.2 A floor hole cover of standard strength and construction. While the cover is not in place, the floor hole shall be constantly attended by someone or

shall be protected by a removable standard railing.

7.1.8.3 Every floor hole into which persons cannot accidentally walk (on account of fixed machinery, equipment, or walls) shall be protected by a cover that leaves no openings more than 1 inch wide. The cover shall be securely held in

place to prevent tools or materials from falling through.



7.1.9 Floor hole covers. Floor opening covers may be of any material that meets the

following strength requirements:

7.1.9.1 Trench or conduit covers and their supports, when located in roadways,

shall be designed to carry a truck rear-axle load of at Least 20,000 pounds.

7.1.9.2 Manhole covers and their supports, when located in roadways, shall comply with local standard highway requirements if any; otherwise, they shall

be designed to carry a truck rear-axle load of at least 20,000 pounds.

7.1.9.3 The construction of floor opening covers may be of any material that meets the strength requirements. Covers projecting not more than 1 inch above the floor level may be used providing all edges are chamfered to an angle with the horizontal of not over 30 degrees. All hinges, handles, bolts, or other parts

shall set flush with the floor or cover surface.

7.1.9 Stairway doors. Where doors or gates open directly on a stairway, a platform shall be provided, and the swing of the door shall not reduce the effective width to less than

20 inches.

7.2 Protection for wall openings and holes.

7.2.1 Wall openings. Wall openings from which there is a drop of more than 4 feet shall

be guarded by one of the following:

7.2.1.1 Rail, roller, picket fence, half door, or equivalent barriers. Where there is exposure below to falling materials, a removable toe board or the equivalent shall also be provided. When the opening is not in use for handling materials, the guard shall be kept in position regardless of a door on the opening. In addition, a grab handle shall be provided on each side of the opening with its center approximately 4 feet above floor level and of standard strength and

mounting.

7.2.1.2 Extension platforms onto which materials can be hoisted for handling,

will have side rails or equivalent guards of standard specifications.

7.2.1.3 Wall opening barriers (rails, rollers, picket fences, and half doors) shall be of such construction and mounting that, when in place at the opening, the barrier is capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds applied in any direction (except upward) at any point on the top rail or corresponding

member.

7.2.1.4 Wall opening grab handles shall be not less than 12 inches in length and shall be so mounted as to give 3 inches clearance from the side framing of the wall opening. The size, material, and anchoring of the grab handle shall be such that the completed structure is capable of withstanding a load of at least 200

pounds applied in any direction at any point of the handle.

7.2.1.5 Wall opening screens shall be of such construction and mounting that they are capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds applied



horizontally at any point on the near side of the screen. They may be of solid construction, of grillwork with openings not more than 8 inches long, or of

slatwork with openings not more than 4 inches wide with length unrestricted.

7.2.2 Chute wall openings. Chute wall openings from which there is a drop of more than 4 feet shall be guarded by one or more of the barriers specified in paragraph 7.2.1.1 or as required by

the conditions.

7.2.3 Window wall openings. Window wall openings at a stairway landing, floor, platform, or balcony, from which there is a drop of more than 4 feet, and where the bottom of the opening is less than 3 feet above the platform or landing, shall be guarded by standard slats, standard grill work, or standard railing. Where the window opening is below the landing, or platform, a

standard toe board shall be provided.

7.2.4 Temporary wall openings. Temporary wall openings shall have adequate guards but these

need not be of standard construction.

7.2.5 Where there is a hazard of materials falling through a wall hole, and the lower edge of the near side of the hole is less than 4 inches above the floor, and the far side of the hole more than 5 feet above the next lower level, the hole shall be protected by a standard toeboard, or an

enclosing screen either of solid construction.

8. Protection of open-sided floors, platforms, and runways:

8.1 Open-sided floors or platforms. Open-sided floors or platforms 4 feet or more above adjacent floor or ground level shall be guarded by a standard railing on all open sides except where there is entrance to a ramp, stairway, or fixed ladder. The railing shall be provided with a

toeboard, beneath the open sides where:

8.1.1 Persons can pass.

8.1.2 There is moving machinery.

8.1.3 There is equipment with which falling materials could create a hazard.

8.2 Runways. Runways shall be guarded by a standard railing on all open sides 4 feet qr more above floor or ground level. Wherever tools, machine parts, or materials are likely to be used on the runway, a toeboard shall also be provided on each exposed side. Runways used exclusively for special purposes (such as oiling, shafting, or filling tank cars) may have the railing on one side omitted where operating conditions necessitate such omission, providing the falling hazard is minimized by using a runway of not less than 18 inches wide.

8.3 Open-sided access ways. Regardless of height, open-sided floors, walkways, platforms, or runways above or adjacent to dangerous equipment, pickling or galvanizing tanks, degreasing units, and similar hazards shall be guarded with a standard railing and toe board.

9. Stairs, railings and guards:



9.1 Stairs. Flights of stairs having four or more risers shall be equipped with standard stair railings or standard handrails. The width to be measured clear of all obstructions exce pt

handrails:

9.1.1 On stairways less than 44 inches wide having both sides enclosed, at least one

handrail, preferably on the right side descending.

9.1.2 On stairways less than 44 inches wide having one side open, at least one stair

railing on open side.

9.1.3 On stairways less than 44 inches wide having both sides open, one stair railing on

each side.

9.1.4 On stairways more than 44 inches wide but less than 88 inches wide, one handrail

on each enclosed side and one stair railing on each open side.

9.1.5 On stairways 88 or more inches wide, one handrail on each enclosed side, one stair railing on each open side, and one intermediate stair railing located approximately midway of the width.

9.2 Winding stairs. Winding stairs shall be equipped with a handrai l offset to prevent walking on

all portions of the treads having width less than 6 inches.

9.3 Railings.

9.3.1 Standard railings. A standard railing shall consist of top rail, intermediate rail, and posts, and shall have a vertical height of 42 inches nominal from upper surface of top rail to floor, platform, runway, or ramp level. The top rail shall be smooth-surfaced throughout the length of the railing. The intermediate rail shall be approximately halfway between the top rail and the floor, platform, runway, or ramp. The ends of the rails shall not overhang the terminal posts except where such overhang does not constitute a projection hazard.

9.3.2 Stair railings. A stair railing shall be of construction similar to a standard railing but the vertical height shall be not more than 34 inches nor less than 30 inches from upper surface of top rail to surface of tread in line with face of riser at forward edge of tread.

9.3.3 Wood railings. Wood railings, the posts shall be of at least 2 inch by 4 inch stock spaced not to exceed 6 feet; the top and intermediate rails shall be of at least 2 inch by 4 inch stock. If top rail is made of two right angle pieces of 1 inch by 4 inch stock, posts may be spaced on 8 foot centers, with 2 inch by 4 inch intermediate rail.

9.3.4 Pipe railings. Pipe railings, posts and top and intermediate railings shall be at least

1 1/2 inches nominal diameter with posts spaced not more than 8 feet on centers.

9.3.5 Structural steel railings. Structural steel railings, posts and top and intermediate rails shall be of 2 inch by 2 inch by 3/8 inch angles or other metal shapes of equivalent

bending strength with posts spaced not more than 8 feet on centers.

10. Definitions:



Floor hole. An opening measuring less than 12 inches but more than 1 inch in its least dimension, in any floor, platform, pavement, or yard, through which materials but not persons may fall; such as a belt

hole, pipe opening, or slot opening.

Floor opening. An opening measuring 12 inches or more in its least dimension, in any floor, platform, pavement, or yard through which persons may fall; such as a hatchway, stair or ladder opening. pit. or large manhole. Floor openings occupied by elevators. dumb waiters, conveyors, machinery. or

containers are excluded.

Handrail. A single bar or pipe supported on brackets from a wall or partition, as on a stairway or ramp,

to furnish persons with a handhold in case of tripping.

Platform. A working space for persons, elevated above the surrounding floor or ground; such as a

balcony or platform for the operation of machinery and equipment.

Runway. A passageway for persons. elevated above the surrounding floor or ground level, such as a

footwalk along shafting or a walkway between buildings.

Standard railing. A vertical barrier erected along exposed edges of a floor opening. wall opening, ramp.

platform. or runway to prevent falls of persons.

Standard strength and construction. Any construction of railings. covers or other guards that meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.23.

Stair railing. A vertical barrier erected along exposed sides of a stairway to prevent falls of persons.

Toeboard. A vertical barrier at floor level erected along exposed edges of a floor opening, wall opening,

platform, runway, or ramp to prevent falls of materials.

Wall hole. An opening less than 30 inches but more than 1 inch high, of unrestricted width, in any wall

or partition; such as a ventilation hole or drainage scupper.

Wall opening. An opening at least 30 inches high and 1 B inches wide, in any wall or partition, through

which persons may fall; such as a yard-arm doorway or chute opening.



WC Welding Services Inc. Scaffolding Safety

1. Written Program:

WC Welding Services will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to the governing regulatory standards, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this docume nt. Effective implementation requires a written program for job safety and health, that is endorsed and advocated by the highest level of management within this company and that outlines our goals and plans. This written program will be communicated to all required personnel. It is designed to

establish clear goals, and objectives.


All facilities and equipment owned by this company will be maintained in a safe and healthful manner. Certain work conditions may contain a reasonable probability of injury that can be prevented by proper maintenance and supervision. WC WELDING will do all possible to ensure the safety of our employees. No employee will knowingly be subjected to a hazardous condition without all possible protective measures first being implemented.

3. Manufacturers Recommendations for Safety:

To insure safety and serviceability the following general precautions concerning the care and use of

wooden Scaffolding will be observed:

4. Company Fixed Scaffolding Safety Policy:


Scaffolding will be observed:

4.1 Footing and anchorages. The footing and or anchorage for scaffolds will be sound, rigid, and capable of carrying the maximum intended load without settling or displacement. Unstable objects such as barrels, boxes, loose brick, or concrete blocks will not be used to support

scaffolds or planks.

4.2 Scaffolds and their components will be capable of supporting without failure at least f our

times the maximum intended load.

4.3 Scaffolds will be maintained in a safe condition at all times in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Fixed scaffolds will not be altered or moved horizontally

while they are in use or occupied.

4.4 Any scaffold damaged or weakened from any cause will be immediately repaired and will not be used until repairs have been completed.

4.5 Scaffolds will not be loaded in excess of the working load for which they are intended.

4.6 All load-carrying timber members of scaffold framing will be a minimum of 1,500 f. (Stress

Grade) construction grade lumber.



4.7 All planking will be Scaffold Grade as recognized by grading rules for the type of wood used.

The scaffold manufacturers recommendations will be followed.

4.8 Nails or bolts used in the construction of scaffolds will be of adequate size and in sufficient numbers at each connection to develop the designed strength of the scaffold. Nails will not be

subjected to a straight pull and will be driven full length.

4.9 All planking or platforms will be overlapped (minimum 12 inches) or secured from

movement.

4.10 An access Scaffold or equivalent safe access will be provided.

4.11 Scaffold planks will extend over their end supports not less than 6 inches nor more than 18 inches.

4.12 The poles, legs, or uprights of scaffolds will be plumb, and securely and rigidly braced to

prevent swaying and displacement.

4.13 Materials being hoisted onto a scaffold will have a tag line.

4.14 Overhead protection will be provided for men on a scaffold exposed to overhead hazards.

4.15 Scaffolds will be provided with a screen between the toeboard and the guardrail, extending along the entire opening, consisting of No. 18 gauge U.S. Standard Wire one -half-inch mesh or

the equivalent, where persons are required to work or pass under the scaffolds.

4.16 Employees will not work on scaffolds which are covered with ice or snow, unless all ice or

snow is removed and planking sanded to prevent slipping.

4.17 Tools, materials, and debris will not be allowed to accumulate in quantities to cause a hazard.

4.18 Only treated or protected fiber rope will be used for or near any work involving the use of

corrosive substances or chemicals.

4.19 Wire or fiber rope used for scaffold suspension will be capable of supporting at least six

times the intended load.

4.20 The use of shore scaffolds or lean-to scaffolds will not be used by this company.

4.21 Lumber sizes, when used in this section, refer to nominal sizes except where otherwise

stated.

4.22 Scaffolds will be secured to permanent structures, through use of anchor bolts, reveal

bolts, or other equivalent means. Window cleaners' anchor bolts will not be used.

4.23 Special precautions will be taken to protect scaffold members, including any wire or fiber

ropes, when using a heat-producing process.

4.24 Scaffolding must be inspected prior to use and periodically throughout the shift by a competent person.



5. Company Mobile (Rolling) Scaffolding Safety Policy:


Scaffolding will be observed:

5.1 Working loads. Work platforms and scaffolds will be capable of carrying the design load

under varying circumstances depending upon the conditions of use.

5.2 The design load of all scaffolds will be calculated on the basis of:

Light - Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 25 pounds per square foot.

Medium· Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 50 pounds per square

foot.

Heavy - Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 75 pounds per square foot.

5.3 Nails, bolts, or other fasteners used in the construction of ladders, scaffolds, and towers will be of adequate size and in sufficient numbers at each connection to develop the designed strength of the unit. Nails will be driven full length. (All nails should be immediately withdrawn

from dismantled lumber.)

5.4 All exposed surfaces will be free from sharp edges, burrs or other safety hazards.

5.5 Work levels. The maximum work level height will not exceed four (4) times the minimum or least base dimensions of any mobile scaffold. Where the basic mobile unit does not meet this requirement, suitable outrigger frames will be employed to achieve this least base dimension, or

provisions will be made to guy or brace the unit against tipping. .

5.6 The minimum platform width for any work level will not be less than 20 inches for mobile scaffolds (towers). Ladder stands will have a minimum step width of 16 inches.

5.7 The supporting structure for the work level will be rigidly braced, using adequate cross

bracing or diagonal bracing with rigid platforms at each work level.

5.8 The work level platform of scaffolds (towers) will be of wood, aluminum, or plywood planking, steel or expanded metal, for the full width of the scaffold, except for necessary openings. Work platforms will be secured in place. All planking will be 2-inch (nominal) scaffold grade minimum 1,500 f. (stress grade) construction grade lumber or equivalent.

5.9 All scaffold work levels 10 feet or higher above the ground or floor will have a standard (4-

inch nominal) toeboard.

5.10 All work levels 10 feet or higher above the ground or floor will have a guardrail of 2- by 4-inch nominal or the equivalent installed no less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high, with

a mid-rail, when required, of 1- by 4- inch nominal lumber or equivalent.

5.11 Wheels or casters. Wheels or casters will be inspected to ensure that they are provided

with strength and dimensions to support four (4) times the design working load.



5.12 All scaffold casters will be inspected to ensure that they are provided with a positive wheel

and/or swivel lock to prevent movement.

5.13 Where leveling of the elevated work platform is required, screw jacks or other suitable

means for adjusting the height will be used.

5.14 Employees are not permitted to ride rolling scaffolds during relocation.

5.15 Adjusting screws may not be extended more than 12 inches.

5.16 Before moving the platform secure all equipment and material.

5.17 Casters or wheels must have a serviceable locking device.

5.18 Be aware of overhead obstructions when moving scaffolds.

5.19 Never run over electrical cords.

5.20 Never pull scaffolds from the top, always push at base level.

5.21 Work only from the platform area never extend work beyond guard railing.

6. Erecting of Scaffolding:

Only trained and authorized employees of this company will supervise the erection of scaffolding. Pertinent OSHA regulations and information and guidance provided by the manufacturer of the

particular type of scaffolding will be used. The following apply:

6.1 Manufacturers erection instructions will be followed.

6.2 Advance planning considerations will be followed during the erection process.

6.3 Only trained and authorized employees will supervise the erection of scaffolding.

6.4 Each component will be visually inspected before use.

6.5 Defective or unserviceable materials will not be used,

6.6 Only approved lumber will be used.

6.7 Consult with the project manager where any instructions are unclear.

7. Pre-Inspection of Erected Scaffolding:

The three main areas of inspection are for rust, straightness of members, and welds. Only trained employees of this company will conduct the pre-inspection. Pertinent OSHA regulations and information and guidance provided by the manufacturer of the particular type of scaffolding will be used. The

following as a minimum apply:

7.1 Rust. Heavily rusted scaffolding equipment is a possible sign of abuse or neglect. Severely

rusted components should be thoroughly inspected and cleaned before approved for use.



7.2 Straightness of members. Mishandling, trucking and storing may cause damage to scaffolding equipment. All members or parts of all steel scaffolding components should be

straight and free from bends, kinks or dents.

7.3 Welds. Scaffolding equipment should be checked before use for damaged welds and any piece of equipment showing damaged welds or rewelding beyond the original factory weld

should not be used. The factory weld reference pertains to location and quality of rewelds.

7.4 Check serviceability of locking devices.

7.5 Check alignment of coupling pins and braces.

7.6 Check serviceability of caster brakes (rolling scaffolds).

7.7 Check for unsafe or defective equipment. Scaffolding shall be tagged unsafe if these

conditions are found.

7.8 Inspect all scaffolds and components upon receipt at the erection location. Return, tag “Do Not Use” or destroy defective components. Inspect scaffolds before use and attach a tag stating the time and date of inspection. Inspect scaffolds before each workshift and especially after changing weather conditions and prolonged interruptions of work. Check for such items as solid foundations, stable conditions, complete working and rest platforms, suitable anchorage points, required guardrails, loose connections, tie-off points, damaged components, proper access, and the use of fall protection equipment.

8. Final Inspection of Erected Scaffolding:

Only trained and authorized employees of this company will conduct the final inspection of erected scaffolding. Pertinent OSHA regulations and information and guidance provided by the manufacturer of

the particular type of scaffolding will be used. The following as a minimum apply:

8.1 Check for proper support under every leg of every frame.

8.2 Check for wash out (if outside) due to rain.

8.3 Check to ensure all base plates or adjustment screws are in firm contact with supports.

8.4 Check frames for plumbness and squareness in both directions.

8.5 Check serviceability and correctness of all cross braces.

8.6 Check to ensure that all planking and accessories are properly installed.

8.7 Check to ensure that all guard rails are in place.

8.8 Recheck periodically to ensure conditions remain safe.

9. Dismantling of Scaffolding:



Only trained and authorized employees of this company wil l supervise the dismantling of scaffolding. Pertinent OSHA regulations and information and guidance provided by the manufacturer of the

particular type of scaffolding will be used. The following apply:

9.1 Manufacturers dismantling instructions will be fol lowed.

9.2 Relocation planning considerations will be considered during the dismantling process.

9.3 Dismantling will be supervised by a competent employee.

9.4 Each component will be visually inspected after use.

9.5 Defective or unserviceable materials will not be stored with serviceable materials.

9.6 Avoid dropping or throwing the components as this could result in damage to the

equipment.

9.7 Consult with the project manager where any instructions are unclear.

10. Training:

A training program will be provided for all employees who will be using scaffolding in the course of their duties. The training will be conducted by competent personnel. The program will include but will not be

limited to:

• A description of fall hazards in the work area or job site

• Procedures for using fall prevention and protection systems

• Scaffolding access and egress procedures

• Scaffolding equipment limitations

• Inspection and storage procedures for the equipment

10.1 Initial training. Training will be conducted prior to job assignment. WC WELDING will provide training to ensure that the purpose, function, and proper use of scaffolding is understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, and usage is acquired by employees. This standard practice instruction will be provided to, and

read by all employees receiving training. The training will include, as a minimum the following:

10.1.1 Types of scaffolding used by this company.

10.1.2 Recognition of applicable fall hazards associated with the work to be

completed and the locations of such.

10.1.3 Load determination and balancing requirements.

10.1.4 Safety precautions in the use of scaffolds.



10.1.5 All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where scaffolding may be utilized, will be instructed to an awareness level

concerning the associated hazards.

10.1.6 Equipment maintenance and inspection requirements.

10.1.7 Equipment strengths and limitations.

10.1.8 Certification. WC WELDING will certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification will contain each employee's name and dates of training. Training will be accomplished by

competent personnel.

10.2 Refresher training. This standard practice instruction will be provided to, and read by all employees receiving refresher training. The training content will be identical to initial training. Refresher training will be conducted on an as needed basis or when the following conditions are met, whichever event occurs

sooner.

10.2.1 Whenever (and prior to) a change in their job assignments, a change in the type of scaffolding equipment used, or when a known hazard is added to

the work environment which affects this program.

10.2.2 Additional retraining will also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or whenever WC WELDING has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of

scaffolding equipment or procedures.

10.2.3 Whenever a scaffolding safety procedure fails.

10.2.4 The retraining will reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised methods and procedures, as necessary.

10.2.5 Certification. WC WELDING will certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification will contain each employee's name and dates of training. Training will be accomplished by

competent personnel.

11. Maintenance and Storage: Maintain scaffolds in good repair. Only replacement components from the original manufacturer should be used. Intermixing scaffold components from different manufacturers should be avoided. Fabricated scaffolds should be repaired according to the manufacturer’s specifications and guidance. Job-built scaffolds should not be repaired without the supervision of a competent person. Store all scaffolding parts in an organized manner in a dry and protected environment. Examine all parts and clean, repair or dispose of them as necessary.



WC Welding Services Inc. Stairway & Ladder Safety

1. Written Program:

WC Welding Services will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis,

or when changes occur to the governing regulatory statutes, that prompt revision of this document,

or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective

implementation requires a written program for job safety, health, that is endorsed and advocated

by the highest level of management within this company and that outlines our goals and plans. This

written program will be communicated to all required personnel. It is designed to establish clear

goals, and objectives.


All facilities and equipment owned by this company will be maintained in a safe and healthful

manner. Certain environments within the facility(s) of WC Welding Services may contain a

reasonable probability of injury that can be prevented by proper maintenance and supervision. WC

WELDING SERVICES shall do all possible to ensure the safety of our employees. No employee shall

knowingly be subjected to a hazardous condition without all possible protective measures first being

implemented. Measures for the control of toxic materials are considered to be outside the scope of

this instruction.

3. Company Fixed Industrial Stairs Safety Policy:

3.1 All stairways shall be kept clean, orderly, and free of known hazards.

3.2 Cleaning requirements. To facilitate cleaning, all stairways shall be kept free from protruding nails, splinters, holes, or loose boards or other hindrances that would prevent e fficient maintenance.

3.3 Stairways leading to work stations shall be maintained in a clean and, 50 far as possible, a dry condition. Where wet processes are used, drainage shall be maintained, and false floors, platforms, mats, or other dry standing places will be provided where practicable.

3.4 Stairways leading to emergency exit doors. Will be kept free of obstacles at all times. Any employee finding an emergency route blocked should immediately report the condition to Project Manager for correction. Exit lights and signs will also be maintained in proper condition at all times, and immediately reported if deficient.

3.5 Illumination. Sufficient illumination will be provided in all areas at all times especially where stairways and ladders are in use. Employees discovering lighting deficiencies will report them to Project Manager for correction.

3.6 Ladder maintenance. Supervisors will ensure that ladders under their control are properly

maintained and kept in a clean and orderly manner.

4. Fixed Industrial Stairs:

Fixed stairs shall be provided for access from one structure level to another where operations necessitate regular travel between levels, and for access to operating platforms at any equipment which



requires attention routinely during operations. Fixed stairs shall also be provided where access to elevations is daily or at each shift for such purposes as gauging, inspection, regular maintenance, etc., where such work may expose employees to acids, caustics, gases, or other harmful substances, or f or

which purposes the carrying of tools or equipment by hand is normally required.

4.1 Spiral stairways. Spiral stairways shall not be constructed or used except for special limited usage

and secondary access situations where it is not practical to provide a conventional stairway.

4.2 Stair strength. 'Fixed stairways shall be designed and constructed to carry a load of five times the normal live load anticipated but never of less strength than to carry safely a moving concentrated load

of 1,000 pounds.

4.3 Stair width. Fixed stairways shall have a minimum width of 22 inches.

4.4 Angle of stairway rise. Fixed stairs shall be installed at angles to the horizontal of between 30 and 50. Any uniform combination of rise/tread dimensions may be used that will resul t in a stairway at an angle to the horizontal within the permissible range. Table D-1 (29 CFR 1910.24) gives rise/tread dimensions which will produce a stairway within the permissible range, stating the angle to the horizontal produced by each combination. However, the rise/tread combinations are not limited to those given in Table D-1

(29 CFR 1910.24).

Table 0-1 (29 CFR 1910.24)

Rise in inches Tread run in inches

6.5 11

6.75 10.75

7 10.5

7.25 10.25

7.5 10

7.75 9.75

8

8.25

8.25

8.75

9

9.25

9.5

9.5

9.25

9

8.75

8.5

8.25



4.5 Stair treads. All treads shall be reasonably slip-resistant and the nosings shall be of nonslip finish. Welded bar grating treads without nosings are acceptable providing the leading edge can be readily identified by personnel descending the stairway and provided the tread is serrated or is of definite nonslip design. Rise height and tread width shall be uniform throughout any flight of stairs incl uding any

foundation structure used as one or more treads of the stairs.

4.6 Stairway platforms. Stairway platforms shall be no less than the width of a stairway and a minimum

of 30 inches in length measured in the direction of travel.

4.7 Railings and handrails. Standard railings shall be provided on the open sides of all exposed stairways and stair platforms. Handrails shall be provided on at least one side of closed stairways preferably on the right side descending. Stair railings and handrails shall be installed in accordance with the provisions

of 29 CFR 1910.23.

4.8 Vertical clearance. Vertical clearance above any stair tread to an overhead obstruction shall be at

least 7 feet measured from the leading edge of the tread.

5. Company Wooden Ladders Safety Policy:

To insure safety and serviceability the following precautions concerning the care and use of wooden

ladders shall be observed:

5.1 Care, wooden ladders. The following safety precautions shall be observed in connection with the

care of wooden ladders:

5.1.1 Ladders shall be maintained in good condition at all times, the joint between the steps and side rails shall be tight, all hardware and fittings securely attached, and the movable parts shall operate freely without binding or undue play.

5.1.2 Metal bearings of locks, wheels, pulleys, etc., shall be frequently lubricated.

5.1.3 Frayed or badly worn rope shall be replaced.

5.1.4 Safety feet and other auxiliary equipment shall be kept in good condition to insure proper

performance.

5.1.5 Ladders shall be inspected frequently and those which have developed defects shall be withdrawn

from service for repair or destruction and tagged or marked as "Dangerous, Do Not Use."

5.1.6 Rungs should be kept free of grease and oil.

5.2 Use. The following safety precautions shall be observed in connection with the use of wooden

ladders:

5.2.1 Portable rung and cleat ladders shall, where possible, be used at such a pitch that the horizontal distance from the top support to the foot of the ladder is one-quarter of the working length of the ladder (the length along the ladder between the foot and the top support). The ladder shall be so placed as to prevent slipping. or it shall be lashed, or held in position. Ladders shall not be used in a horizontal

position as platforms, runways, or scaffolds.



5.2.2 Ladders for which dimensions are specified should not be used by more than one man at a time nor with ladder jacks and scaffold planks where use by more than one man is anticipated. In such cases,

specially designed ladders with larger dimensions of the parts should be procured.

5.2.3 Portable ladders shall be so placed that the side rails have a secure footing. The top rest for portable rung and cleat ladders shall be reasonably rigid and shall have ample strength to support the

applied load.

5.2.4 Ladders shall not be placed in front of doors opening toward the ladder unless the door is blocked

upon, locked, or guarded.

5.2.5 Ladders shall not be placed on boxes, barrels, or other unstable bases to obtain additional heigh t.

5.2.6 Ladders with broken or missing steps, rungs, or cleats, broken side rails, or other faulty equipment

shall not be used; improvised repairs shall not be made.

5.2.7 Short ladders shall not be spliced together to provide long sections.

5.2.8 Ladders made by fastening cleats across a single rail shall not be used.

5.2.9 Ladders shall not be used as guys, braces, or skids, or for other than their intended purposes.

5.2.10 Tops of the ordinary types of stepladders shall not be used as steps.

5.2.11 On two-section extension ladders the minimum overlap for the two sections in use shall be as follows:

Size of ladder (feet) Overlap (feet)

Up to and including 36 3

Over 36 up to and including 48 4

Over 48 up to and including 60 5

5.2.12 Portable rung ladders with reinforced rails shall only be used with the metal reinforcement on the

underside.

5.2.13 No ladder should be used to gain access to a roof unless the top of the ladder shall extend at least

3 feet above the point of support, at eaves, gutter, or roofline.

5.2.14 Middle and top sections of sectional or window cleaner's ladders should not be used for bottom

section unless they are equipped with safety shoes.

5.2.15 All portable rung ladders will be equipped with nonslip bases when there is a hazard of slipping. Nonslip bases are not intended as a substitute for care in safely placing, lashing, or holding a ladder that

is being used upon oily, metal, concrete, or slippery surfaces.

5.2.16 The bracing on the back legs of step ladders is designed solely for increasing stability and not for

climbing.

6. Portable Wooden Ladders:



In order to insure safety under normal conditions of usage, this company will purchase and maintain portable wood ladders that conform the following minimum requirements for the construction, care, and use of common types of portable wood ladders. Other types of special ladders, fruitpicker's ladders, combination step and extension ladders, stockroom step ladders, aisle-way step ladders, shelf ladders,

and library ladders are not specifically addressed by this instruction.

6.1 General requirements.

6.1.1 Materials. All wood parts will be maintained free from sharp edges and splinters; sound and free from accepted visual inspection from shake, wane, compression failures, decay, or other irregularities.

Low density wood shall not be used.

6.1.2 Step spacing. A uniform step spacing shall be employed which shall be not more than 12 inches.

Steps shall be parallel and level when the ladder is in position for use.

6.1.3 Side rail width. The minimum width between side rails at the top, inside to inside, shall be not less than 11 1/2 inches. From top to bottom, the side rails shall spread at least 1 inch for each foot of length

of stepladder.

6.1.4 Metal spreaders/locking devices. A metal spreader or locking device of sufficient size and strength to securely hold the front and back sections in open positions shall be properly maintained for each stepladder. The spreader shall have all sharp points covered or removed to protect the user. For Type III

ladders, the pail shelf and spreader may be combined in one unit (the so-called shelf-lock ladder).

6.2 Portable stepladders. Stepladders longer than 20 feet shall not be used. Stepladders of one of the

following types specified shall be used:

6.2 .1 Type I--Industrial stepladder, 3 to 20 feet for heavy duty, such as utilities, contractors, and

industrial use.

6.2.2 Type II--Commercial stepladder, 3 to 12 feet for medium duty, such as painters, offices, and light industrial use.

6.2.3 Type III--Househoid stepladder, 3 to 6 feet for light duty, such as light household use.

6.3 Portable rung ladders.

6.3.1 Single ladder. Single ladders longer than 30 feet will not be used by this company.

6.3.2 Two-section ladder. Two-section extension ladders longer than 60 feet will not be used. Before purchase all ladders of this type will be determined to consist of two sections, one to fit within the side

rails of the other, and arranged in such a manner that the upper section can be raised and lowered.

6.3.3 Sectional ladder. Assembled combinations of sectional ladders longer than lengths specified in this

subdivision shall not be used.

6.3.4 Trestle and extension trestle ladder. Trestle ladders, or extension sections or base sections of extension trestle ladders longer than 20 feet will not be used.

6.4 Special-purpose ladders.



6.4.1 Painter's stepladder. Painter's stepladders longer than 12 feet will not be used.

6.4.2 Mason's ladder. A mason's ladder is defined as a special type of single ladder intended for use in

heavy construction work. Mason's ladders longer than 40 feet will not be used.

6.4.3 Trolley and side-rolling ladders. Trolley ladders and side-rolling ladders longer than 20 feet will not

be used.

7. Company Metal Ladders Safety Policy:

To insure safety and serviceability the following precautions concerning the care and use of metal

ladders shall be observed:

7.1 Care, metal ladders. The following safety precautions shall be observed in connection with the care

of metal ladders:

7.1.1 Ladders must be maintained in good usable condition at all times.

7.1.2 If a ladder is involved in any of the following, immediate inspection is necessary:

7.1.2.1 If ladders tip over, inspect ladder for side rails dents or bends, or excessively dented rungs; check all rung-to-side-rail connections; check hardware connections; check rivets for shear.

7.1.2.2 If ladders are exposed to oil and grease, equipment should be cleaned of oil, grease, or slippery

materials. This can easily be done with a solvent or steam cleaning.

7.1.3 Ladders having defects are to be marked and taken out of service until repaired by either

maintenance department or the manufacturer.

7.2 Use, metal ladders. The following safety precautions shall be observed in connection with the use

care of metal ladders:

7.2.1 A simple rule for setting up a ladder at the proper angle is to place the base a distance from the

vertical wall equal to one-fourth the working length of the ladder.

7.2.2 Portable ladders are designed as a one-man working ladder based on a 200-pound load.

7.2.3 The ladder base section must be placed with a secure footing.

7.2.4 The top of the ladder must be placed with the two rails supported, unless equipped with a single

support attachment.

7.2.5 When ascending or descending, the climber must face the ladder.

7.2.6 Ladders must not be tied or fastened together to provide longer sections. They must be equipped

with the hardware fittings necessary if the manufacturer endorses extended uses.

7.2.7 Ladders should not be used as a brace, skid, guy or gin pole, gangway, or for other uses than that

for which they were intended, unless specifically recommended for use by the manufacturer.

7.2.8 See 29 CFR 1910.333 or Company Standard Practice Instruction for work practices to be used when

work is performed on or near electric circuits.



8. Portable Metal Ladders:

8.1 General Requirements. This company will purchase only ladders without structural defects or

potential accident hazards such as sharp edges, burrs, etc.

8.1.2 Rung spacing. The spacing of rungs or steps shall be on 12 inch centers.

8.1.3 Rungs and steps shall be corrugated, knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-resistant material, or

otherwise treated to minimize the possibility of slipping.

8.2 Straight and extension ladders.

8.2.1 The minimum width between side rails shall be 12 inches.

8.2.2 The length of single ladders or individual sections of ladders shall not exceed 30 feet.

8.2.3 Two-section ladders shall not exceed 48 feet in length and over two-section ladders shall not

exceed 60 feet in length.

8.2.4 Based on the nominal length of the ladder, each section of a multisection ladder shall overlap the

adjacent section by at least the number of feet stated in the following:

Normal length of ladder (feet) overlap feet

Up to and including 36 3

Over 36, up to and including 48 4

Over 48, up to 60 5

8.2.5 Extension ladders shall be equipped with positive stops which will insure the overlap specified in

the table above.

8.3 Step ladders.

8.3.1 The length of a stepladder is measured by the length of the front rail. To be classified as a standard

length ladder, the measured length shall be within plus or minus one-half inch of the specified length.

Stepladders shall not exceed 20 feet in length.

8.3.2 The bottoms of the four rails will be purchased with insulating nonslip material for the safety of

the user.

8.3.3 A metal spreader or locking device of sufficient size and strength to securely hold the front and back sections in the open position shall be a component of each stepladder. The spre ader shall have all

sharp points or edges covered or removed to protect the user.

8.4 Trestles and extension trestle ladders.

8.4.1 Trestle ladders or extension sections or base sections of extension trestle ladders shall be not more

than 20 feet in length.



8.5 Platform ladders.

8.5.1 The length of a platform ladder shall not exceed 20 feet. The length of a platform ladder shall be

measured along the front rail from the floor to the platform.

9. Fixed Ladders:

Where fixed ladders are used within our facili ty the following design requirements will be adhered to:

9.1 The minimum design live load shall be a single concentrated load of 200 pounds.

9.2 The number and position of additional concentrated live-load units of 200 pounds each as

determined from anticipated usage of the ladder shall be considered in the design.

9.3 The live loads imposed by persons occupying the ladder shall be considered to be concentrated at

such points as will cause the maximum stress in the structural member being considered.

9.4 The weight of the ladder and attached appurtenances together with the live load shall be considered

in the design of rails and fastenings.

9.5 Rungs and cleats.

9.5.1 All rungs shall have a minimum diameter of three-fourths inch for metal ladders, and a minimum

diameter of 1 1/8 inches for wood ladders.

9.5.2 The distance between rungs, cleats, and steps shall not exceed 12 inches and shall be uniform

throughout the length of the ladder.

9.5.3 The minimum clear length of rungs or cleats shall be 16 inches.

9.5.4 Rungs, cleats, and steps shall be free of splinters, sharp edges, burrs, or projections which may be a

hazard.

9.5.5 The rungs of an individual-rung ladder shall be so designed that the foot cannot slide off the end.

9.6 Side rails. Side rails which might be used as a climbing aid shall be of such cross sections as to afford

adequate gripping surface without sharp edges, splinters, or burrs.

9.7 Fastenings. Fastenings shall be an integral part affixed ladder design.

9.8 Splices. All splices made by whatever means shall meet design requirements as noted in paragraph (a) of this section. All splices and connections shall have smooth transition with original members and

with no sharp or extensive projections.

9.9 Electrolytic action. Adequate means shall be employed to protect dissimilar metals from electrolytic

action when such metals are joined.

9.10 Welding. All welding shall be in accordance with the "Code for Welding in Building Construction"

(AWSD1.0-1966).

9.11 Protection from deterioration.



9.11.1 Metal ladders and appurtenances shall be painted or otherwise treated to resist corrosion and rusting when location demands. Ladders formed by individual metal rungs imbedded in concrete, which serve as access to pits and to other areas under floors, are frequently located in an atmosphere that causes corrosion and rusting. To increase rung life in such atmosphere, individual metal rungs shall have

a minimum diameter of 1 inch or shall be painted or otherwise treated to resist corrosion and rusting.

9.11 .2 Wood ladders, when used under conditions where decay may occur, shall be treated with a nonirritating preservative, and the details shall be such as to prevent or minimize the accumulation of

water on wood parts.

9.11.3 When different types of materials are used in the construction of a ladder, the materials used

shall be so treated as to have no deleterious effect one upon the other.

9.12 Clearance.

9.12.1 Climbing side. On fixed ladders, the perpendicular distance from the centerline of the rungs to the nearest permanent object on the climbing side of the ladder shall be 36 inches for a pitch of 76 degrees, and 30 inches for a pitch of 90 degrees, with minimum clearances for intermediate pitches

varying between these two limits in proportion to the slope.

9.12.2 Ladders without cages or wells. A clear width of at least 15 inches shall be provided each way

from the centerline of the ladder in the climbing space, except when cages or wells are necessary.

9.12.3 Clearance in back of ladder. The distance from the centerline of rungs, cleats, or steps to the nearest permanent object in back of the ladder shall be not less than 7 inches, except that when unavoidable obstructions are encountered, minimum clearances as shown in 29 CFR 1910.27, figure D-3

shall be provided.

9.12.4 Clearance in back of grab bar. The distance from the centerline of the grab bar to the nearest permanent object in back of the grab bars shall be not less than 4 inches. Grab bars shall not protrude

on the climbing side beyond the rungs of the ladder which they serve.

9.12.5 step-across distance. The step-across distance from the nearest edge of ladder to the nearest edge of equipment or structure shall be not more than 12 inches, or less than 2 1/2 inches (29 CFR

1910.27, fig. 0-4).

9.12.6 Hatch cover. Counterweighted hatch covers shall open a minimum of 60 degrees from the horizontal. The distance from the centerline of rungs or cleats to the edge of the hatch opening on the climbing side shall be not less than 24 inches for offset wells or 30 inches for straight wells. There shall be not protruding potential hazards within 24 inches of the centerline of rungs or cleats; any such hazards within 30 inches of the centerline of the rungs or cleats shall be fitted with deflector plates placed at an angle of 60 degrees from the horizontal as indicated in 29 CFR 1910.27, figure D-5. The relationship of a fixed ladder to an acceptable counterweighted hatch cover is illustrated in 29 CFR

1910.27, figure 0-6.

9.13 Special requirements.

9.13.1 Cages or wells.



9.13.1.1 Cages or wells (except on chimney ladders) shall be built, as shown on the applicable drawings,

covered in detail in 29 CFR 1910.27, figures 0-7, 0-8, and 0-9, or of equivalent construction.

9.13.1.2 Cages or wells conforming to the dimensions shown in 29 CFR 1910.27, figures 0-7, 0-8, and 0-9

shall be provided on ladders of more than 20 feet to a maximum unbroken length of 30 feet.

9.13.1.3 Cages shall extend down the ladder to a point not less than 7 feet nor more than 8 feet above the base of the ladder, with bottom flared not less than 4 inches, or portion of cage opposite ladder

shall be carried to the base.

9.13.1.4 Cages shall not extend less than 27 nor more than 28 inches from the centerline of the rungs of the ladder. Cage shall not be less than 27 inches in width. The inside shall be clear of projections. Vertical bars shall be located at a maximum spacing of 40 degrees around the circumference of the cage; this will give a maximum spacing of approximately 9 1/2 inches, center to center. 9.13.1.5 Ladder wells shall have a clear width of at least 15 inches measured each way from the centerline of the ladder. Smooth walled wells shall be a minimum of 27 inches from the centerline of rungs to the well wall on the Climbing side of the ladder. Where other obstructions on the climbing side of the ladder exist, there

shall be a minimum of 30 inches from the centerline of the rungs.

10. Definitions:

10.1 Fixed industrial stair terms.

(1) Handrail. A single bar or pipe supported on brackets from a wall or partition to provide a continuous

handhold for persons using a stair.

(2) Nose, nosing. That portion of a tread projecting beyond the face of the riser immediately below.

(3) Open riser. The air space between the treads of stairways without upright members (risers).

(4) Platform. An extended step or landing breaking a continuous run of stairs.

(5) Railing. A vertical barrier erected along exposed sides of stairways and platforms to prevent falls of

persons. The top member of railing usually serves as a handrail.

(6) Rise. The vertical distance from the top of a tread to the top of the next higher tread.

(7) Riser. The upright member of a step situated at the back of a lower tread and near the leading edge of the next higher tread.

(8) Stairs, stairway. A series of steps leading from one level or floor to another, or leading to platforms, pits, boiler rooms, crossovers, or around machinery, tanks, and other equipment that are used more or less continuously or routinely by employees, or only occasionally by specific individuals. A series of steps and landings having three or more risers constitutes stairs or stairway.

(9) Tread. The horizontal member of a step.

(10) Tread run. The horizontal distance from the leading edge of a tread to the leading edge of an

adjacent tread.

(11) Tread width. The horizontal distance from front to back of tread including nosing when used.



10.2 Portable wood ladders terms.

(1) Ladders. A ladder is an appliance usually consisting of two side rails joined at regular intervals by

cross-pieces called steps, rungs, or cleats, on which a person may step in ascending or descending.

(2) Stepladder. A stepladder is a self-supporting portable ladder, nonadjustable in length, having flat steps and a hinged back. Its size is deSignated by the overall length of the ladder measured along the

front edge of the side rails.

(3) Single ladder. A single ladder is a non-self-supporting portable ladder, nonadjustable in length,

consisting of but one section. Its size is deSignated by the overall length of the side rail.

(4) Extension ladder. An extension ladder is a non-self-supporting portable ladder adjustable in length. It consists of two or more sections traveling in guides or brackets so arranged as to permit length

adjustment. Its size is designated by the sum of the lengths of the sections measured along the side rails.

(5) Sectional ladder. A sectional ladder is a non-self-supporting portable ladder, nonadjustable in length, consisting of two or more sections of ladder so constructed that the sections may be combined to function as a single ladder. Its size is designated by the overall length of the assembled sections.

(6) Trestle ladder. A trestle ladder is a self-supporting portable ladder, nonadjustable in length, consisting of two sections hinged at the top to form equal angles with the base. The size is designated by the length of the side rails measured along the front edge.

(7) Extension trestle ladder. An extension trestle ladder is a self-supporting portable ladder, adjustable in length, consisting of a trestle ladder base and a vertically adjustable single ladder, with suitable means

for locking the ladders together. The size is designated by the length of the trestle ladder base. .

(8) Special-purpose ladder. A special-purpose ladder is a portable ladder which represents either a modification or a combination of design or construction features in one of the general -purpose types of

ladders previously defined, in order to adapt the ladder to special or specific uses.

(9) Trolley ladder. A trolley ladder is a semi fixed ladder, nonadjustable in length, supported by

attachments to an overhead track, the plane of the ladder being at right angles to the plane of motion.

(10) Side-rolling ladder. A side-rolling ladder is a semi fixed ladder, nonadjustable in length, supported by attachments to a guide rail, which is generally fastened to shelving, the plane of the ladder being also

its plane of motion.

(11) Wood characteristics. Wood characteristics are distinguishing features which by ·their extent and

number determine the quality of a piece of wood.

(12) Wood irregularities. Wood irregularities are natural characteristics in or on wood that may lower its

durability, strength, or utility.

(13) Cross grain. Cross grain (slope of grain) is a deviation of the fiber direction from a line parallel to the

sidles of the piece.



(14) Knot. A knot is a branch or limb, imbedded in the tree and cut through in the process of lumber manufacture, classified according to size, quality, and occurrence. The size of the knot is determined as

the average diameter on the surface of the piece.

(15) Pitch and bark pockets. A pitch pocket is an opening extending parallel to the annual growth rings containing, or that has contained, pitch, either solid or liquid. A bark pocket is an opening between

annual growth rings that contains bark.

(16) Shake. A shake is a separation along the grain, most of which occurs between the rings of annual

growth.

(17) Check. A check is a lengthwise separation of the wood, most of which occurs across the rings of

annual growth.

(18) Wane. Wane is bark, or the lack of wood from any cause, on the corner of a piece.

(19) Decay. Decay is disintegration of wood substance due to action of wood-destroying fungi. It is also

known as dote and rot.

(20) Compression failure. A compression failure is a deformation (buckling) of the fibers due to

excessive compression along the grain.

(21) Compression wood. Compression wood is an aberrant (abnormal) and highly variable type of wood structure occurring in softwood species. The wood commonly has density somewhat higher than does normal wood, but somewhat lower stiffness, and tensile strength for its weight in addition to high

longitudinal shrinkage.

(22) Low density. Low-density wood is that which is exceptionally light in weight and usually deficient in

strength properties for the species.

10.3 Portable metal ladder terms.

(1) Ladder. A ladder is an appliance usually consisting of two side rails joined at regular intervals by


(2) Step ladder. A step ladder is a self-supporting portable ladder, nonadjustable in length, having flat steps and a hinged back. Its size is designated by the overall length of the ladder measured aiong the

front edge of the side rails.

(3) Single ladder. A single ladder is a non-self-supporting portable ladder, nonadjustable in length,

consisting of but one section. Its size is designated by the overall length of the side rail.

(4) Extension ladder. An extension ladder is a non-self-supporting portable ladder adjustable in length. It consists of two or more sections traveling in guides or brackets so arranged as to permit length

adjustment. Its size is designated by the sum of the lengths of the sections measured along the side rails.

(5) Platform ladder. A self-supporting ladder of fixed size with a platform provided at the working level. The size is determined by the distance along the front rail from the platform to the base of the ladder.



(6) Sectional ladder. A sectional ladder is a non-self-supporting portable ladder, non-adjustable in length, consisting of two or more sections so constructed that the sections may be combined to function

as a single ladder. Its size is designated by the overall length of the assembled sections.

(7) Trestle ladder. A trestle ladder is a self-supporting portable ladder, non-adjustable in length, consisting of two sections, hinged at the top to form equal angles with the base. The size is designated

by the length of the side rails measured along the front edge.

(8) Extension trestle ladder. An extension trestle ladder is a selfsupporting portable ladder, adjustable in length, consisting of a trestle ladder base and a vertically adjustable single ladder, with suitable means

for locking the ladders together. The size is designated by the length of the trestle ladder base.

(9) Special-purpose ladder. A special-purpose ladder is a portable ladder which represents either a modification or a combination of design or construction features in one of the general -purpose types of

ladders previously defined, in order to adapt the ladder to special or specific uses.

10.4 Fixed ladder terms.

(1) Ladder. A ladder is an appliance usually consisting of two side rails joined at regular intervals by


(2) Fixed ladder. A fixed ladder is a ladder permanently attached to a structure, building, or equipment.

(3) Individual-rung ladder. An individual-rung ladder is a fixed ladder each rung of which is individually

attached to a structure, building, or equipment.

(4) Rail ladder. A rail ladder is a fixed ladder consisting of side rails joined at regular intervals by rungs

or cleats and fastened in full length or in sections to a building, structure, or equipment.

(5) Railings. A railing is anyone or a combination of those railings constructed in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.23. A standard railing is a vertical barrier erected along exposed edges of floor openings, wall

openings, ramps, platforms, and runways to prevent falls of persons.

(6) Pitch. Pitch is the included angle between the horizontal and the ladder, measured on the opposite

side of the ladder from the climbing side.

(7) Fastenings. A fastening is a device to attach a ladder to a structure, building, or equipment.

(8) Rungs. Rungs are ladder cross-pieces of circular or oval cross-section on which a person may step in

ascending or descending.

(9) Cleats. Cleats are ladder cross-pieces of rectangular cross-section placed on edge on which a person

may step in ascending or descending.

(10) Steps. Steps are the flat cross-pieces of a ladder on which a person may step in ascending or

descending.

(11) Cage. A cage is a guard that may be referred to as a cage or basket guard which is an enclosure that is fastened to the side rails of the fixed ladder or to the structure to encircle the climbing space of the

ladder for the safety of the person who must climb the ladder.



(12) Well. A well is a permanent complete enclosure around a fixed ladder, which is attached to the walls of the well. Proper clearances for a well will give the person who must climb the ladder the same

protection as a cage.

(13) Ladder safety device. A ladder safety device is any device, other than a cage or well, designed to eliminate or reduce the possibility of accidental falls and which may incorporate such features as life

belts, friction brakes, and sliding attachments.

(14) Grab bars. Grab bars are individual hand holds placed adjacent to or as an extension above ladders

for the purpose of providing access beyond the limits of the ladder.

(15) Through ladder. A through ladder is one from which a man getting off at the top must step through

the ladder in order to reach the landing.

(16) Side-step ladder. A side-step ladder is one from which a man getting off at the top must step

sideways from the ladder in order to reach the landing.

11. Procurement and Disposal of Ladders. All procurement and disposal of ladders will be performed through or with the knowledge of Project Manager. Ladders will be destroyed beyond use prior to disposal to prevent further use by anyone. Procurement of ladders will be accomplished based on the type of work anticipated to be performed and in accordance with this Standard Practice Instruction and

applicable OSHA Regulations.



WC Welding Services Inc. Confined Space

1. Objective: The purpose of WC Welding’s Confined Space Program is to set procedures that will ensure workers safe entry into confined spaces and permit-required confined spaces to perform routine tasks associated with their employment. This procedure is designed to provide the minimum safety re quirements in accordance with the Occupational Safety and Health Administration’s (OSHA) Confined Space Standard, 1910.146, and USACE EM 385-1-1. 2. Background: A confined space is defined as any location that has limited openings for entry and egress, i s not intended for continuous employee occupancy, and is so enclosed that natural ventilation may not reduce air contaminants to levels below the threshold limit value (TLV). Examples of confined spaces include: manholes, stacks, pipes, storage tanks, trailers, tank cars, pits, sumps, hoppers, and bins. Entry into confined spaces without proper precautions could result in injury, impairment, or death due to:

A. an atmosphere that is flammable or explosive; B. lack of sufficient oxygen to support life; C. contact with or inhalation of toxic materials; or D. general safety or work area hazards such as steam or high pressure materials.

3. Assignment of Responsibility:

A. Employer In administering this Confined Space Program, WC Welding will:

1. Monitor the effectiveness of the program. 2. Review the confined space program annually and make changes as necessary 3. Provide atmospheric testing and equipment as needed. 4. Provide personal protective equipment as needed. 5. Provide training to affected employees and supervisors. 6. Provide technical assistance as needed. 7. Preview and update the program on at least an annual basis or as needed.

B. Program Manager Mr. Wess Carnes is responsible for managing the Confined Space Program, and shall:

1. Ensure that a list of confined spaces at all WC Welding worksites is maintained. 2. Ensure that canceled permits are reviewed for lessons learned. 3. Ensure training of personnel is conducted and documented. 4. Coordinate with outside responders. 5. Ensure that equipment is in compliance with standards. 6. Ensure that the Responsible Person in charge of confined space work shall:



a. Ensure requirements for entry have been completed before entry is

authorized. b. Ensure confined space monitoring is performed by personnel qualified and

trained in confined space entry procedures. c. Ensure a list of monitoring equipment and personnel qualified to operate

the equipment is maintained by the Safety and Occupational Health Office. d. Ensure that the rescue team has simulated a rescue in a confined space

within the past twelve (12) months. e. Know the hazards that may be faced during entry, including the mode (how

the contaminant gets into the body), signs or symptoms, and consequences of exposure.

f. Fill out a permit. g. Determine the entry requirements. h. Require a permit review and signature from the authorized Entry

Supervisor. i. Notify all involved employees of the permit requirements. j. Post the permit in a conspicuous location near the job. k. Renew the permit or have it reissued as needed (a new permit is required

every shift). l. Determine the number of Attendants required to perform the work. m. Ensure all Attendant(s) know how to communicate with the entrants and

how to obtain assistance. n. Post any required barriers and signs. o. Remain alert to changing conditions that might affect the conditions of the

permits (i.e., require additional atmospheric monitoring or changes in personal protective equipment).

p. Change and reissue the permit, or issue a new permit as necessary. q. Ensure periodic atmospheric monitoring is done according to permit

requirements. r. Ensure that personnel doing the work and all support personnel adhere to

permit requirements. s. Ensure the permit is canceled with the work is done. t. Ensure the confined space is safely closed and all workers are cleared from

the area.

C. Entry Supervisors The Project approved SSHO shall serve as the Entry Supervisor(s), and shall be qualified and authorized to approved confined space entry permits. The Entry Supervisor(s) shall be responsible for:

1. Determining if conditions are acceptable for entry. 2. Authorizing entry and overseeing entry operations. 3. Terminating entry procedures as required.



4. Serving as an Attendant, as long as the person is trained and equipped appropriately for that role.

5. Ensuring measures are in place to keep unauthorized personnel clear of the area. 6. Checking the work at least twice a shift to verify and document permit requirements are

being observed (more frequent checks shall be made if operations or conditions are anticipated that could affect permit requirements).

7. Ensuring that necessary information on chemical hazards is kept at the worksite for the employees or rescue team.

8. Ensuring a rescue team is available and instructed in their rescue duties (i.e., an onsite team or a prearranged outside rescue service).

9. Ensuring the rescue team members have current certification in first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR).

D. Attendants

The Project approved shall function as an Attendant(s) and shall be stationed outside of the confined workspace. The Attendant(s) shall:

1. Be knowledgeable of, and be able to recognize potential confined space hazards. 2. Maintain a sign-in/sign-out log with a count of all persons in the confined space, and

ensure all entrants sign in and out. 3. Monitor surrounding activities to ensure the safety of personnel. 4. Maintain effective and continuous communication with personnel during confined

space entry, work, and exit. 5. Never monitor more than one confined space at any time. 6. Order personnel to evacuate the confined space if he/she:

a. observes a condition which is not allowed on the entry permit; b. notices the entrants acting strangely, possibly as a result of exposure to

hazardous substances; c. notices a situation outside the confined space which could endanger

personnel; d. notices a hazard within the confined space that has not been previously

recognized or taken into consideration; e. must leave his/her work station; or f. must focus attention on the rescue of personnel in some other confined

space that he/she is monitoring.

1. Immediately summon the Rescue Team if crew rescue becomes necessary. 2. Keep unauthorized persons out of the confined space, order them out, or notify

authorized personnel of an unauthorized entry.

E. Rescue Team The Rescue Team members shall:



1. Complete a training drill using mannequins or personnel in a simulation of the confined space prior to the issuance of an entry permit for any confined space and at least annually thereafter.

2. Respond immediately to rescue calls from the Attendant or any other person recognizing a need for rescue from the confined space.

3. In addition to emergency response training, receive the same training as that required of the authorized entrants.

4. Have current certification in first aid and CPR.

F. Entrants/Affected Employees Employees who are granted permission to enter a confined space shall:

1. Read and observe the entry permit requirements. 2. Have the right to participate and review air monitoring results before entering a

confined space. 3. Request additional monitoring at anytime. 4. Remain alert to the hazards that could be encountered while in the confined space. 5. Properly use the personal protective equipment that is required by the permit. 6. Immediately exit the confined space when:

a. they are ordered to do so by an authorized person; b. they notice or recognize signs or symptoms of exposure; c. a prohibited condition exists; or d. the automatic alarm system sounds.

7. Alert Attendant(s) when a prohibited condition exists and/or when warning signs or symptoms of exposure exist.

G. Contractors

When WC WELDING arranges to have employees of another employer (contractor) perform work that involves a permit-required confined space entry, the respective WC WELDING representative (Supervisor) accomplishes the following:

Informs contractor that permit space entry is allowed only through compliance with a permit space program.

Apprises contractor of the hazards that make the confined space a permit space.

Apprises contractor of any precautions or procedures that protect all personnel.

Debriefs contractor at the conclusion of the confined space entry operations. In addition, each contractor who is retained to perform permit space entry operations accomplishes the following before entering a permit-required confined space (verified by Superintendent):

Obtains all information regarding the permit space hazards and entry operations.



Coordinates entry operations when working in the permit space.

Informs Supervisor of the permit space program the contractor will follow.

4. Training: WC Welding shall provide training so that all employees whose work is regulated by this Confined Space Program acquire the understanding, knowledge, and skills necessary for the safe performance of their duties in confined spaces.

A. Training Frequency Responsible Person shall provide training to each affected employee:

1. before the employee is first assigned duties within a confined space; 2. before there is a change in assigned duties; 3. when there is a change in permit space operations that presents a hazard for which an

employee has not been trained; and 4. when WC Welding has reason to believe that there are deviations from the confined

space entry procedures required in this program, or that there are inadequacies in the employee’s knowledge or use of these procedures.

The training shall establish employee proficiency in the duties required in this program, and shall introduce new or revised procedures, as necessary, for compliance with this program.

B. General Training

All employees who will enter confined spaces shall be trained in entry procedures. Personnel responsible for supervising, planning, entering, or participating in confined space entry and rescue shall be adequately trained in their functional duties prior to any confined space entry. Training shall include:

1. Explanation of the general hazards associated with confined spaces. 2. Discussion of specific confined space hazards associated with the facility, location, or

operation. 3. Reason for, proper use, and limitations of personal protective equipment and other

safety equipment required for entry into confined spaces. 4. Explanation of permits and other procedural requirements for conducting a confined

space entry. 5. A clear understanding of what conditions would prohibit entry. 6. Procedures for responding to emergencies. 7. Duties and responsibilities of the confined space entry team. 8. Description of how to recognize symptoms of overexposure to probable air

contaminants in themselves and co-workers, and method(s) for alerting the Attendant(s).



Refresher training shall be conducted as needed to maintain employee competence in entry procedures and precautions.

C. Specific Training

1. Training for atmospheric monitoring personnel shall include proper use of monitoring instruments, including instruction on the following:

a. proper use of the equipment; b. calibration of equipment; c. sampling strategies and techniques; and d. exposure limits (PELs, TLVs, LELs, UELs, etc.).

2. Training for Attendants shall include the following:

a. procedures for summoning rescue or other emergency services; and b. proper utilization of equipment used for communicating with entry and

emergency/rescue personnel.

3. Training for Emergency Response Personnel shall include:

a. rescue plan and procedures developed for each type of confined space that is anticipated to be encountered;

b. use of emergency rescue equipment; c. first aid and CPR techniques; and d. work location and confined space configuration to minimize response time.

D. Verification of Training

Periodic assessment of the effectiveness of employee training shall be conducted by approved SSHO. Training sessions shall be repeated as often as necessary to maintain an acceptable level of personnel competence. All training must be documented.

5. Identification of Hazards and Evaluation of Confined Spaces:

A. Survey

The SSHO shall ensure a survey of the worksite is conducted to identify confined spaces. This survey can be partially completed from initial and continuing site characterizations, as well as other available data (i.e., blueprints and job safety analyses). The purpose of the survey is to develop an inventory of those locations and/or equipment at the project site that meet the definition of a confined space. This information shall be communicated to personnel, and appropriate confined space procedures shall be followed prior to entry. The initial surveys shall include air monitoring to determine the air quality in the confined spaces. The potential for the following situations shall be evaluated by SSHO:



1. flammable or explosive potential; 2. oxygen deficiency; and 3. presence of toxic and corrosive material.

B. Hazard Reevaluation

The SSHO shall identify and reevaluate hazards based on possible changes in activities or other physical or environmental conditions that could adversely affect work. A master inventory of confined spaces shall be maintained. Any change in designation of a confined space will be routed to all affected personnel by the SSHO.

C. Pre-Entry Hazard Assessment

A hazard assessment shall be completed by the SSHO prior to any entry into a confined space. The hazard assessment should identify:

1. the sequence of work to be performed in the confined space; 2. the specific hazards known or anticipated; 3. the control measures to be implemented to eliminate or reduce each of the hazards to

an acceptable level. 4. Exsisting hazards outside the confined space.

No entry shall be permitted until the hazard assessment has been reviewed and discussed by all persons engaged in the activity. No employee will be permitted to enter a confined space that is determined to be immediately dangerous to life and health. Personnel who are to enter confined spaces shall be informed of known or potential hazards associated with said confined spaces.

D. Hazard Controls

Hazard controls shall be instituted to address changes in the work processes and/or working environment. Hazard controls must be able to either control the health hazards by eliminating the responsible agents, reduce health hazards below harmful levels, or prevent the contaminants from coming into contact with the workers. The following order of precedence shall be followed in reducing confined space risks.

1. Engineering Controls Engineering controls are those controls that eliminate or reduce the hazard through implementation of sound engineering practices. Ventilation is one of the most common engineering controls used in confined spaces. When ventilation is used to remove atmospheric contaminants from a confined space, the space shall be ventilated until the atmosphere is within the acceptable ranges. Ventilation shall be maintained during the occupancy if there is a potential for the atmospheric conditions to move out of the acceptable range. When ventilation is not



possible or feasible, alternate protective measures or methods to remove air contaminants and protect occupants shall be determined the SSHO prior to authorizing entry. When conditions necessitate and can accommodate continuous forced air ventilation, the following precautions shall be followed:

a. Employees shall not enter the space until the forced air ventilation has eliminated any hazardous atmosphere.

b. Forced air ventilation shall be directed so as to ventilate the immediate areas where an employee is or will be present within the space.

c. Continuous ventilation shall be maintained until all employees have left the space.

d. Air supply or forced air ventilation shall originate from a clean source.

2. Work Practice (Administrative) Controls Work practice (administrative) controls are those controls which eliminate or reduce the hazard through changes in the work practices (i.e., rotating workers, reducing the amount of worker exposure, and housekeeping).

3. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) If the hazard cannot be eliminated or reduced to a safe level through engineering and/or work practice controls, PPE should be used. The SSHO shall determine the appropriate PPE needed by all personnel entering the confined space, including rescue teams. PPE that meets the specifications of applicable standards shall be selected in accordance with the requirements of the job to be performed.

6. Entry Permits:

The Confined Space Entry Permit is the most essential tool for assuring safety during entry in confined spaces with known hazards, or with unknown or potentially hazardous atmospheres. The entry permit process guides the supervisor and workers through a systematic evaluation of the space to be entered. The permit should be used to establish appropriate conditions. Before each entry into a confined space, an entry permit will be completed by the SSHO. The SSHO will then communicate the contents of the permit to all employees involved in the operation, and post the permit conspicuously near the work location. A standard entry permit shall be used for all entries.

A. Key Elements of Entry Permits A standard entry permit shall contain the following items:

1. Space to be entered. 2. Purpose of entry. 3. Date and authorized duration of the entry permit.



4. Name of authorized entrants within the permit space. 5. Means of identifying authorized entrants inside the permit space (i.e., rosters or

tracking systems). 6. Name(s) of personnel serving as Attendant(s) for the permit duration. 7. Name of individual serving as Entry Supervisor, with a space for the signature or initials

of the Entry Supervisor who originally authorized the entry. 8. Hazards of the permit space to be entered. 9. Measures used to isolate the permit space and to eliminate or control permit space

hazards before entry (i.e., lockout/tagout of equipment and procedures for purging, ventilating, and flushing permit spaces).

10. Acceptable entry conditions. 11. Results of initial and periodic tests performed, accompanied by the names or initials of

the testers and the date(s) when the tests were performed. 12. Rescue and emergency services that can be summoned, and the means of contacting

those services (i.e., equipment to use, phone numbers to call). 13. Communication procedures used by authorized entrants and Attendant(s) to maintain

contact during the entry. 14. Equipment to be provided for compliance with this Confined Space Program (i.e., PPE,

testing, communications, alarm systems, and rescue). 15. Other information necessary for the circumstances of the particular confined space

that will help ensure employee safety. 16. Additional permits, such as for hot work, that have been issued to authorize work on

the permit space.

B. Permit Scope and Duration A permit is only valid for one shift. For a permit to be renewed, the following conditions shall be met before each reentry into the confined space:

1. Atmospheric testing shall be conducted and the results should be within acceptable limits. If atmospheric test results are not within acceptable limits, precautions to protect entrants against the hazards should be addressed on the permit and should be in place.

2. The SSHO shall verify that all precautions and other measures called for on the permit are still in effect.

3. Only operations or work originally approved on the permit shall be conducted in the confined space.

A new permit shall be issued, or the original permit will be reissued if possible, whenever changing work conditions or work activities introduce new hazards into the confined space. The SSHO shall retain each canceled entry permit for at least one (1) year to facilitate the review of the Confined Space Entry Program. Any problems encountered during an entry operation shall be noted on the respective permit(s) so that appropriate revisions to the confined space permit program can be made.



7. Entry Procedures:

When entry into a confined space is necessary, either the Entry Supervisor or the SSHO may initiate entry procedures, including the completion of a confined space entry permit. Entry into a confined space shall follow the standard entry procedure below.

A. Prior to Entry The entire confined space entry permit shall be completed before a standard entry. Entry shall be allowed only when all requirements of the permit are met and it is reviewed and signed by an Entry Supervisor. The following conditions must be met prior to standard entry:

1. Affected personnel shall be trained to establish proficiency in the duties that will be performed within the confined space.

2. The internal atmosphere within the confined space shall be tested by the SSHO with a calibrated, direct-reading instrument.

3. Personnel shall be provided with necessary PPE as determined by the Entry Supervisor. 4. The confined space must be barricaded if outside hazards exist to the entrant. 5. Atmospheric monitoring shall take place during the entry. If a hazardous atmosphere is

detected during entry:

a. personnel within the confined space shall be evacuated by the Attendant(s) or Entry Supervisor until the space can be evaluated by the SSHO to determine how the hazardous atmosphere developed; and

b. controls shall be put in place to protect employees before reentry.

B. Opening a Confined Space Any conditions making it unsafe to remove an entrance cover shall be eliminated before the cover is removed. When entrance covers are removed, the opening shall be promptly guarded by a railing, temporary cover, or other temporary barrier that will prevent anyone from falling through the opening. This barrier or cover shall protect each employee working in the space from foreign objects entering the space. If it is in a traffic area, adequate barriers shall be erected.

C. Atmospheric Testing Atmospheric test data is required prior to entry into a confined space. Atmospheric testing is required for two distinct purposes: (1) evaluation of the hazards of the permit space, and (2) verification that acceptable conditions exist for entry into that space. If a person must go into the space to obtain the needed data, then Standard Confined Space Entry Procedures shall be followed. Before entry into a confined space, the SSHO shall conduct testing for hazardous atmospheres. The internal atmosphere shall be tested with a calibrated, direct-reading instrument for oxygen, flammable gases and vapors, and potential toxic air contaminants, in that order.



Testing equipment used in specialty areas shall be listed or approved for use in such areas by the SSHO. All testing equipment shall be approved by a nationally recognized laboratory, such as Underwriters Laboratories or Factory Mutual Systems.

1. Evaluation Testing The atmosphere of a confined space should be analyzed using equipment of sufficient sensitivity and specificity. The analysis shall identify and evaluate any hazardous atmospheres that may exist or arise, so that appropriate permit entry procedures can be developed and acceptable entry conditions stipulated for that space. Evaluation and interpretation of these data and development of the entry procedure should involve a technically qualified professional (i.e., consultant, certified industrial hygienist, registered safety engineer, or certified safety professional).

2. Verification Testing A confined space that may contain a hazardous atmosphere shall be tested for residues of all identified or suspected contaminants. The evaluation testing should be conducted with specified equipment to determine that residual concentrations at the time or testing and entry are within acceptable limits. Results of testing shall be recorded by the person performing the tests on the permit. The atmosphere shall be periodically retested (frequency to be determined by the SSHO to verify that atmospheric conditions remain within acceptable entry parameters.

3. Acceptable Limits The atmosphere of the confined spaces shall be considered to be within acceptable limits when the following conditions are maintained:

a. oxygen: 19.5 percent to 23.5 percent; b. flammability: less than 10 percent of the Lower Flammable Limit (LFL); and c. toxicity: less than recognized American Conference of Governmental

Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) exposure limits or other published exposure levels [i.e., OSHA Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs) or National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Recommended Exposure Limits (RELs)].

D. Isolation and Lockout/Tagout Safeguards

All energy sources that are potentially hazardous to confined space entrants shall be secured, relieved, disconnected, and/or restrained before personnel are permitted to enter the confined space. Equipment systems or processes shall be locked out and/or tagged out as required by the WC Welding Lockout/Tagout Program [which complies with OSHA’s 29 CFR 1910-147 and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z244.1-1982, Lockout/Tagout of Energy Sources] prior to permitting entry into the confined space. In confined spaces where complete isolation is not possible, the SSHO shall evaluate the situation and make provisions for as rigorous an



isolation as practical. Special precautions shall be taken when entering double -walled, jacketed, or internally insulated confined spaces that may discharge hazardous material through the vessel’s internal wall. Where there is a need to test, position, or activate equipment by temporarily removing the lock or tag or both, a procedure shall be developed and implemented to control hazards to the occupants. Any removal of locks, tags, or other protective measures shall be done in accordance with the WC Welding Lockout/Tagout Program.

E. Ingress/Egress Safeguards Means for safe entry and exit shall be provided for confined spaces. Each entry and exit points shall be evaluated by the SSHO to determine the most effective methods and equipment that will enable employees to safely enter and exit the confined space. Appropriate retrieval equipment or methods shall be used whenever a person enters a confined space. Use of retrieval equipment may be waived by the the SSHO if use of the equipment increases the overall risks of entry or does not contribute to the rescue. A mechanical device shall be available to retrieve personnel from vertical confined spaces greater than five (5) feet in depth.

F. Warning Signs and Symbols All confined spaces that could be inadvertently entered shall have signs identifying them as confined spaces. Signs shall be maintained in a legible condition. The signs shall contain a warning that a permit is required before entry. Accesses to all confined spaces shall be prominently marked.

E. Emergency Response Plan 8. Emergency Response: The SSHO shall maintain a written plan of action that has provisions for conducting a timely rescue of individuals within a confined space, should an emergency arise. The written plan shall be kept onsite where the confined space work is being conducted. All affected personnel shall be trained on the Emergency Response Plan. F. Retrieval Systems and Methods of Non-Entry Rescue Retrieval systems shall be available and ready when an authorized person enters a permit space, unless such equipment increases the overall risk of entry, or the equipment would not contribute to the rescue of the entrant. Retrieval systems shall have a chest or full -body harness and a retrieval line attached at the center of the back near shoulder level or above the head. If harnesses are not feasible, or would create a greater hazard, wristlets may be used in lieu of the harness. The retrieval line shall be firmly fastened outside the space so that rescue can begin as



soon as anyone is aware that retrieval is necessary. A mechanical device shall be available to retrieve personnel from vertical confined spaces more than five (5) feet deep. G. Rescue Services If rescue services are not provided by the host facility a third party rescue team will be contracted to perform the rescue. The contract rescue team will have access to the site before entry to perform mock rescues or decline the job.



WC Welding Services Inc. Welding, Cutting Hot work

Welding, cutting, and brazing are hazardous activities that pose a unique combination of both safety and health risks to more than 500,000 workers in a wide variety of industries. The risk from fatal injuries alone is more than four deaths per thousand workers over a working lifetime. Welding, cutting, and brazing is addressed in specific standards for the general industry, shipyard

employment, marine terminals, and construction industry.

1. Fire prevention and protection.

1.1 Basic precautions. The fire protection and prevention are the responsibilities of welders and

cutters, their supervisors (including outside contractors) and those in management on whose

property cutting and welding is to be performed. The basic precautions for fire prevention in

welding or cutting work are:

Fire hazards. If the object to be welded or cut cannot readily be moved, all movable fire hazards in the vicinity shall be taken to a safe place.

Guards. If the object to be welded or cut cannot be moved and if all the fire hazards cannot be removed, then guards shall be used to confine the heat, sparks, and slag, and to protect the immovable fire hazards.

Combustible material. Wherever there are floor openings or cracks in the flooring that cannot be closed, precautions shall be taken so that no readily combustible materials on the floor below will be exposed to sparks which might drop through the floor. The same precautions shall be observed with regard to cracks or holes in walls, open doorways and open or broken windows.

Fire extinguishers. Suitable fire extinguishing equipment shall be maintained in a state of readiness for instant use. Such equipment may consist of pails of water, buckets of sand, hose or portable extinguishers depending upon the nature and quantity of the

combustible material exposed.

2. Fire watch.

2.1 Fire watchers shall be required whenever welding or cutting is performed in locations where

other than a minor fire might develop, or any of the following conditions exist:

Appreciable combustible material, in building construction or contents, closer than 35 feet (10.7 m) to the point of operation.

Appreciable combustibles are more than 35 feet (10.7 m) away but are easily ignited by sparks.

Wall or floor openings within a 35-foot (10.7 m) radius expose combustible material in adjacent areas including concealed spaces in walls or floors.

Combustible materials are adjacent to the opposite side of metal partitions, walls,

ceilings, or roofs and are likely to be ignited by conduction or radiation.



2.2 Fire watchers shall have fire extinguishing equipment readily available and be trained in its

use. They shall be familiar with facilities for sounding an alarm in the event of a fire. They shall

watch for fires in all exposed areas, try to extinguish them only when obviously within the

capacity of the equipment available, or otherwise sound the alarm. A fire watch shall be

maintained for at least a half hour after completion of welding or cutting operations to de tect

and extinguish possible smoldering fires.

2.3Authorization. Before cutting or welding is permitted, the area shall be inspected by the

individual responsible for authorizing cutting and welding operations. He shall designate

precautions to be followed in granting authorization to proceed in the form of a written hot

work permit.

2.4 Floors. Where combustible materials such as paper clippings, wood shavings, or textile fibers

are on the floor, the floor shall be swept clean for a radius of 35 feet (10.7 m). Combustible

floors shall be kept wet, covered with damp sand, or protected by fire -resistant shields. Where

floors have been wet down, personnel operating arc welding or cutting equipment shall be

protected from possible shock.

2.5 Prohibited areas. Cutting or welding shall not be permitted in the following situations:

In areas not authorized by management. In sprinklered buildings while such protection is impaired.

In the presence of explosive atmospheres (mixtures of flammable gases, vapors, liquids , or dusts with air), or explosive atmospheres that may develop inside uncleaned or improperly prepared tanks or equipment which have previously contained such materials, or that may develop in areas with an accumulation of combustible dusts.

In areas near the storage of large quantities of exposed, readily ignitable materials such as bulk sulfur, baled paper, or cotton.

2.6 Relocation of combustibles. Where practicable, all combustibles shall be relocated at least

35 feet (10.7 m) from the work site. Where relocation is impracticable, combustibles shall be

protected with flame proofed covers or otherwise shielded with metal or asbestos guards or

curtains.

2.7 Ducts. Ducts and conveyor systems that might carry sparks to distant combustibles shall be

suitably protected or shut down.

2.8 Combustible walls. Where cutting or welding is done near walls, partitions, ceiling or roof of

combustible construction, fire-resistant shields or guards shall be provided to prevent ignition.

2.9 Noncombustible walls. If welding is to be done on a metal wall, partition, ceiling or roof,

precautions shall be taken to prevent ignition of combustibles on the other side, due to

conduction or radiation, preferably by relocating combustibles. Where combustibles are not

relocated, a fire watch on the opposite side from the work shall be provided.



2.10 Combustible cover. Welding shall not be attempted on a metal partition, wall, ceiling or

roof having a combustible covering not on walls or partitions of combustible sandwich-type

panel construction.

2.11 Pipes. Cutting or welding on pipes or other metal in contact with combustible walls,

partitions, ceilings or roofs shall not be undertaken if the work is close enough to cause ignition

by conduction.

3. Management.

3.1 Management shall recognize its responsibility for the safe usage of cutting and welding equipment on its property and:

3.1.1Based on fire potentials of plant facilities, establish areas for cutting and welding,

and establish procedures for cutting and welding, in other areas. Designate an individual

responsible for authorizing cutting and welding operations in areas not specifically

designed for such processes.

3.1.2 Cutters or welders and their supervisors shall be suitably trained in the safe

operation of their equipment and the safe use of the process.

3.1.3 Advise all contractors about flammable materials or hazardous conditions of which

they may not be aware.

4. Supervisor.

4.1 The Supervisor:

4.1.1 Shall be responsible for the safe handling of the cutting or welding equipment and

the safe use of the cutting or welding process.

4.1.2 Shall determine the combustible materials and hazardous areas present or likely to

be present in the work location.

4.1.3 Shall protect combustibles from ignition by the following:

4.1.4 Have the work moved to a location free from dangerous combustibles.

4.1.5 If the work cannot be moved, have the combustibles moved to a safe distance

from the work or have the combustibles properly shielded against ignition.

4.1.6 See that cutting and welding are so scheduled that plant operations that might

expose combustibles to ignition are not started during cutting or welding.

4.1.7 Shall secure authorization for the cutting or welding operations from the

designated management representative.



4.1.8 Shall determine that the cutter or welder secures his approval that conditions are

safe before going ahead.

4.1.9 Shall determine that fire protection and extinguishing equipment are properly

located at the site.

5. Welding or cutting containers.

5.1 Used containers. No welding, cutting, or other hot work shall be performed on used drums,

barrels, tanks or other containers until they have been cleaned so thoroughly as to make

absolutely certain that there are no flammable materials present or any substances such as

greases, tars, acids, or other materials which when subjected to heat, might produce flammable

or toxic vapors. Any pipe lines or connections to the drum or vessel shall be disconnected or

blanked.

5.2 Venting and purging. All hollow spaces, cavities or containers shall be vented to permit the

escape of air or gases before preheating, cutting or welding. Purging with inert gas is

recommended.

6. Safe Work Practices

6.1 Accidental contact. When arc welding is to be suspended for any substantial period of time, such as

during lunch or overnight, all electrodes shall be removed from the holders and the holders carefully

located so that accidental contact cannot occur and the machine be disconnected from the power

source.

6.2 Torch valve. In order to eliminate the possibility of gas escaping through leaks or improperly closed

valves, when gas welding or cutting, the torch valves shall be closed and the gas supply to the torch

positively shut off at some point outside the confined area whenever the torch is not to be used for a

substantial period of time, such as during lunch hour or overnight. Where practicable, the torch and

hose shall also be removed from the confined space.

6.3 Railing. A welder or helper working on platforms, scaffolds, or runways shall be protected against

falling. This may be accomplished by the use of railings, safety belts, life lines, or some other equally

effective safeguards.

6.4 Welding cable. Welders shall place welding cable and other equipment so that it is clear of

passageways, ladders, and stairways.

6.5 Operators of equipment shall report any equipment defect or safety hazards and discontinue use of

equipment until its safety is assured.

7. Eye protection.



7.1 Helmets or hand shields shall be used during all arc welding or arc cutting operations,

excluding submerged arc welding. Helpers or attendants shall be provided with proper eye

protection.

7.2 Goggles or other suitable eye protection shall be used during all gas welding or oxygen

cutting operations. Spectacles without side shields, with suitable filter lenses are permitted for

use during gas welding operations on light work, for torch brazing or for inspection.

7.3 All operators and attendants of resistance welding or resistance brazing equipment shall use

transparent face shields or goggles, depending on the particular job, to protect their faces or

eyes, as required.

7.4 Helmets and hand shields shall be made of a material which is an insulator for heat and

electricity. Helmets, shields and goggles shall be not readily flammable and shall be capable of

withstanding sterilization.

7.5 Helmets and hand shields shall be arranged to protect the face, neck and ears from direct

radiant energy from the arc.

7.6 Helmets shall be provided with filter plates and cover plates designed for easy removal.

7.7 Goggles shall be ventilated to prevent fogging of the lenses as much as practicable.

7.8 All glass for lenses shall be tempered, substantially free from air bubbles, waves and other

flaws. Except when a lens is ground to provide proper optical correction for defective vision, the

front and rear surfaces of lenses and windows shall be smooth and parallel.

7.9 Lenses shall bear some permanent distinctive marking by which the source and shade may

be readily identified.

NOTE: In gas welding or oxygen cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to

use a filter or lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the operation.

8. Work in confined spaces.

As used herein confined space is intended to mean a relatively small or restricted space such as a tank,

boiler, pressure vessel, or small compartment of a ship.

8.1 Ventilation. Ventilation is a prerequisite to work in confined spaces. For ventilation

requirements see paragraph (c) of this section.

8.2 Securing cylinders and machinery. When welding or cutting is being performed in any

confined spaces the gas cylinders and welding machines shall be left on the outside. Before

operations are started, heavy portable equipment mounted on wheels shall be securely blocked

to prevent accidental movement



8.3 Lifelines. Where a welder must enter a confined space through a manhole or other small

opening, means shall be provided for quickly removing him in case of emergency. When safety

belts and lifelines are used for this purpose they shall be so attached to the welder's body that

his body cannot be jammed in a small exit opening. An attendant with a preplanned rescue

procedure shall be stationed outside to observe the welder at all times and be capable of

putting rescue operations into effect.

8.4 Electrode removal. When arc welding is to be suspended for any substantial period of time,

such as during lunch or overnight, all electrodes shall be removed from the holders and the

holders carefully located so that accidental contact cannot occur and the machine disconnected

from the power source.

8.5 Gas cylinder shutoff. In order to eliminate the possibility of gas escaping through leaks of

improperly closed valves, when gas welding or cutting, the torch valves shall be closed and the

fuel-gas and oxygen supply to the torch positively shut off at some point outside the confined

area whenever the torch is not to be used for a substantial period of time, such as during lunch

hour or overnight. Where practicable the torch and hose shall also be removed from the

confined space.

8.6 Warning sign. After welding operations are completed, the welder shall mark the hot metal

or provide some other means of warning other workers.

8.7 Ventilation in confined spaces.

8.7.1 Air replacement. All welding and cutting operations carried on in confined spaces

shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the accumulation of toxic materials or possible

oxygen deficiency. This applies not only to the welder but also to helpers and other

personnel in the immediate vicinity. All air replacing that withdrawn shall be clean and

respirable.

8.7.2 Outside helper. Where welding operations are carried on in confined spaces and

where welders and helpers are provided with hose masks, hose masks with blowers or

self-contained breathing equipment approved by the Mine Safety and Health

Administration and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, a worker

shall be stationed on the outside of such confined spaces to insure the saf ety of those

working within.

8.7.3 Oxygen shall never be used for ventilation.

9. Cleaning compounds.



9.1 Manufacturer's instructions. In the use of cleaning materials, because of their possible

toxicity or flammability, appropriate precautions such as manufacturer’s instructions shall be

followed.

9.2 Degreasing. Degreasing and other cleaning operations involving chlorinated hydrocarbons

shall be so located that no vapors from these operations will reach or be drawn into the

atmosphere surrounding any welding operation.

9. First-aid equipment. First-aid equipment shall be available at all times. All injuries shall be reported as

soon as possible for medical attention. First aid shall be rendered until medical attention can be

provided.

10. Cylinders and containers General Requirements

10.1 Flammable mixture. Mixtures of fuel gases and air or oxygen may be explosive and shall be

guarded against. No device or attachment facilitating or permitting mixtures of air or oxygen

with flammable gases prior to consumption, except at the burner or in a standard torch, shall be

allowed unless approved for the purpose.

10.2Maximum pressure. Under no condition shall acetylene be generated, piped (except in

approved cylinder manifolds) or utilized at a pressure in excess of 15 psig.

10.3 Apparatus. Only approved apparatus such as torches, regulators or pressure -reducing

valves, acetylene generators, and manifolds shall be used.

11. Personnel.

Workmen in charge of the oxygen or fuel-gas supply equipment, including generators, and oxygen or

fuel-gas distribution piping systems shall be instructed and judged competent by their employers for this

important work before being left in charge. Rules and instructions covering the operation and

maintenance of oxygen or fuel-gas supply equipment including generators, and oxygen or fuel-gas

distribution piping systems shall be readily available.

12. Approval and marking.

12.1 All portable cylinders used for the storage and shipment of compressed gases shall be

constructed and maintained in accordance with the regulations of the U.S. Department of

Transportation.

12.2Compressed gas cylinders shall be legibly marked, for the purpose of identifying the gas

content, with either the chemical or the trade name of the gas. Such marking shall be by means

of stenciling, stamping, or labeling, and shall not be readily removable. Whenever practical, the

marking shall be located on the shoulder of the cylinder.



12.3 All cylinders with a water weight capacity of over 30 pounds (13.6 kg) shall be equipped

with means of connecting a valve protection cap or with a collar or recess to protect the valve.

13. Storage of cylinders-general.

13.1 Cylinders shall be kept away from radiators and other sources of heat.

13.2 Inside of buildings, cylinders shall be stored in a well-protected, well-ventilated, dry

location, at least 20 (6.1 m) feet from highly combustible materials such as oil or excelsior.

Cylinders should be stored in definitely assigned places away from elevators, stairs, or

gangways. Assigned storage spaces shall be located where cylinders will not be knocked over or

damaged by passing or falling objects, or subject to tampering by unauthorized persons.

Cylinders shall not be kept in unventilated enclosures such as lockers and cupboards.

13.3 Empty cylinders shall have their valves closed.

13.4 Valve protection caps, where cylinder is designed to accept a cap, shall always be in place,

hand-tight, except when cylinders are in use or connected for use.

13.5Acetylene cylinders shall be stored valve end up.

14. Oxygen storage.

14.1 Oxygen cylinders shall not be stored near highly combustible material, especially oil and

grease; or near reserve stocks of carbide and acetylene or other fuel -gas cylinders, or near any

other substance likely to cause or accelerate fire; or in an acetylene generator compartment.

14.2 Oxygen cylinders stored in outside generator houses shall be separated from the generator

or carbide storage rooms by a noncombustible partition having a fire -resistance rating of at least

1 hour. This partition shall be without openings and shall be gastight.

14.3 Oxygen cylinders in storage shall be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or combustible

materials (especially oil or grease), a minimum distance of 20 feet (6.1 m) or by a

noncombustible barrier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-

half hour.

14.4 Cylinders, cylinder valves, couplings, regulators, hose, and apparatus shall be kept free

from oily or greasy substances. Oxygen cylinders or apparatus shall not be handled with oily

hands or gloves. A jet of oxygen must never be permitted to strike an oily surface, greasy

clothes, or enter a fuel oil or other storage tank.

14.5 When transporting cylinders by a crane or derrick, a cradle, boat, or suitable platform shall

be used. Slings or electric magnets shall not be used for this purpose. Valve -protection caps,

where cylinder is designed to accept a cap, shall always be in place.



14.6Cylinders shall not be dropped or struck or permitted to strike each othe r violently.

14.7Valve-protection caps shall not be used for lifting cylinders from one vertical position to

another. Bars shall not be used under valves or valve-protection caps to pry cylinders loose

when frozen to the ground or otherwise fixed; the use of warm (not boiling) water is

recommended. Valve-protection caps are designed to protect cylinder valves from damage.

14.8Unless cylinders are secured on a special truck, regulators shall be removed and valve -

protection caps, when provided for, shall be put in place before cylinders are moved.

14.9Cylinders not having fixed hand wheels shall have keys, handles, or nonadjustable wrenches

on valve stems while these cylinders are in service. In multiple cylinder installations only one key

or handle is required for each manifold.

14.10 Cylinder valves shall be closed before moving cylinders.

14.11 Cylinder valves shall be closed when work is finished.

14.12 Valves of empty cylinders shall be closed.

14.13 Cylinders shall be kept far enough away from the actual welding or cutting operation so

that sparks, hot slag, or flame will not reach them, or fire-resistant shields shall be provided.

14.14 Cylinders shall not be placed where they might become part of an electric circuit. Contacts

with third rails, trolley wires, etc., shall be avoided. Cylinders shall be kept away from radiators,

piping systems, layout tables, etc., that may be used for grounding electric circuits such as for

arc welding machines. Any practice such as the tapping of an electrode against a cyl inder to

strike an arc shall be prohibited.

14.15 Cylinders shall never be used as rollers or supports, whether full or empty.

14.16 A hammer or wrench shall not be used to open cylinder valves. If valves cannot be opened

by hand, the supplier shall be notified.

14.17 Cylinder valves shall not be tampered with nor should any attempt be made to repair

them. If trouble is experienced, the supplier should be sent a report promptly indicating the

character of the trouble and the cylinder's serial number. Supplier's instructions as to its

disposition shall be followed.

14.18 Fuel-gas cylinders shall be placed with valve end up whenever they are in use. Liquefied

gases shall be stored and shipped with the valve end up.

14.19 Before connecting a regulator to a cylinder valve, the valve shall be opened slightly and

closed immediately. The valve shall be opened while standing to one side of the outlet; never in



front of it. Never crack a fuel-gas cylinder valve near other welding work or near sparks, flame,

or other possible sources of ignition.

14.20 Before a regulator is removed from a cylinder valve, the cylinder valve shall be closed and

the gas released from the regulator.

14.21 Nothing shall be placed on top of an acetylene cylinder when in use which may damage

the safety device or interfere with the quick closing of the valve.

1910.253(b)(5)(iii)(F)

14.22 If cylinders are found to have leaky valves or fittings which cannot be stopped by closing

of the valve, the cylinders shall be taken outdoors away from sources of ignition and slowly

emptied.

14.22.1 A warning should be placed near cylinders having leaking fuse plugs or other

leaking safety devices not to approach them with a lighted cigarette or other source of

ignition. Such cylinders should be plainly tagged; the supplier should be promptly

notified and his instructions followed as to their return.

15. The cylinder valve shall always be opened slowly.

15.1 An acetylene cylinder valve shall not be opened more than one and one -half turns of the

spindle, and preferably no more than three-fourths of a turn.

15.2 Where a special wrench is required it shall be left in position on the stem of the valve while

the cylinder is in use so that the fuel-gas flow can be quickly turned off in case of emergency. In

the case of manifolded or coupled cylinders at least one such wrench shall always be available

for immediate use



WC Welding Services Inc. Waste Management

All employees will be instructed on the proper disposal methods of waste. Employees will be

encouraged to separate waste for future recycling to minimize the impact on the environment. 1. Clean bodies and clothes are essential to good health and such should be maintained 2. All trash and/or waste containers, packing and paper boxes, etc. must be put in the proper place 3. Nails protruding from boards, boxes or shipping containers, etc. must be removed or bent down

immediately. 4. Containers are provided for all used paper towels. Cigarette packages and butts, paper, candy

wrappers, etc. and must be used. 5. All work areas must be cleaned and kept neat. 6. Aisles, ramps, steps, platforms and other passageways must be kept clean and free from

obstruction. 7. Toilets and break areas are provided for personal needs and must be used for these pu rposes.

They are to be kept clean and orderly at all times. 8. Do not run up and down stairwells. Use provided handrails. Never loads up and/or downstairs

that block your vision while walking. Never leave obstructions in stairwells. 9. Observe and/or listen for ongoing traffic in corridors prior or exiting from an office into a

corridor. Never leave obstructions in corridors unattended. 10. All personal appliances - computers, calculators, etc. - should be turned off at the close of your

workday. 11. In the event of fire, notify the fire department and try to extinguish the fire prior to it becoming

uncontrollable. Report the incident to your supervisor and Safety Coordinator immediately. 12. Do not lean and/or tilt back on the rear legs of a work chair or place feet on desktops. 13. Close file and/or desk drawer immediately after placing and/or retrieving needed items 14. Electrical cords are not to be placed across employee walkways. 15. Do not store materials and/or boxes in walkways. 16. Only authorized employees shall operate office machinery and/or equipment. 17. Razor blades, thumbtacks, and other sharp objects shall not be thrown loosely into desk



drawers. Never leave knives or scissors on a desk unattended. 18. Do not place hands, fingers or feet inside protective guards or inside doors, desk or file wells

while attempting to work on energized equipment or while attempting to close a door or a file. 19. Card index files, dictionaries or other heavy objects should be kept off the top of f ile cabinets

and other high furniture. 20. Is smoking permitted in "safe areas" only? 21. Are NO SMOKING signs prominently posted for areas containing combustibles and flammables? 22. Are covered metal waste cans used for oily and paint soaked waste? 23. Are rubbish and litter disposed of daily? 24. Are paint spray booths, dip tanks, etc., and their exhaust ducts cleaned regularly? 25. Have weeds or other combustible material been removed from within 20 feet of any buildings? 26. For Wet Processes:

Are stand mats, platforms, or similar protection provided to protect employees from wet floors? 27. Are waste receptacles provided for waste, and are they emptied regularly? 28. Do your toilet facilities meet the requirements of applicable sanitary codes? 29. Are washing facilities provided? 30. Are all areas of your business adequately illuminated? 31. Are floor openings provided with toe boards and railings or a floor hole cover? 32. Are stairways in good condition and standard railings provided for every flight having four or

more risers? 33. Are portable wood ladders and metal ladders adequate for their purpose, in good condition, and

provided with secure footing? 34. The generation of waste will be expected at each jobsite and proper containers or dumpsters

will be provided



WC Welding Services Inc. Hazard Identification

1. Purpose: This Hazardous Identification and Risk Assessment section will provide all personnel with an understanding of the importance of considering all possible risks and ensuring safe operating procedures are in place during operations. 2. Policy: It is the policy of WC WELDING that all personnel will be trained and actively involved in Hazardous Identification and Risk Assessment during new hire orientation and annually during a refresher course. Along with personnel being trained all sub-contractors will also be trained and actively involved in WC WELDING’s HAZCOM program and will understand the use of JSA’s and Stop Work Authority (SWA) prior to being able to begin operations in the field on a well location. Pre-daily operations a safety meeting will occur to discuss who is doing what that day. During this meeting all involved parties will go over his/her job safety analysis (JSA) and a general consensus will be made of the operations that are about to begin. 3. Procedures: 3.1 Three Factors of a Risk Assessment:

1. Human Factor- save life, stop workplace injuries, illnesses, and increase staff morale.

2. Legal Requirements- meet legislative requirements, and OSHA.

3. Financial Factors- decrease the risk of prosecution and fines incurred, lower time loss, reduce absenteeism, increase potential for gaining shareholders, and increase productivity.

4. Legal Obligation-Employer:

It is the legal obligation of the employer to significantly reduce risk (per OSHA) by providing:

A safe working environment.

A safe system of work

Plant and substances in a safe condition.

Adequate facilities for the welfare of the employees.

Information, instruction, training, and supervision to ensure personnel is safe from injury.



4.1 Legal Obligation-Employee-Supervisor:

The supervisor will: Implement company policies and procedures.

Assist in the identification, assessment and control of hazards.

Investigate accidents and incidents.

Participate in informing, instructing, training and supervising employees. Ensure effective consultation.

Respond to occupational health, safety and welfare issues.

Maintain plant, equipment and housekeeping. Ensure correct personal protective equipment is used and maintained.

4.2 Legal Obligation-Employee:

The employee will: Take reasonable care to protect their own health and safety and that of others

who may be affected by their actions or omissions.

Cooperate with employers in ensuring health and safety.

Use equipment provided to protect health and safety. Obey reasonable instructions.

Ensure they are not affected by alcohol or another substance (hence endangering themselves or others).

Assist in resolving health and safety problems. 5. Hazard Management Process:

Identify the hazards

Assess the risks

Evaluate risks

Control the risks

Monitor and review

What is a HAZARD?

Is a physical entity (i.e. an energy or an environmental agent) which could produce injury or disease in people (or environmental damage, damage to property, etc.).

Something that has the potential to cause harm!.

5.1 Types of Hazards:



Health Hazards

Micro biological energy –Viruses, bacteria and fungi

Muscle energy –Physical, striking and inadvertent movement

Social / Psychological, stressors and behavior

Safety Hazards

Kinetic energy -Lifting equipment and use of motor vehicles

Chemical bonding energies -Fire and or explosion

Electrical energy -Electrical equipment or plant

Acoustic and mechanical vibrations–Noise, jack hammers, mobile plant (load shifting

equipment).

Mechanical power -Circular saw, shaft or blade turning

Nuclear particle radiation –X-rays

Chemical energy –Oxidizing reaction to spills

Gravitational potential energy –Falling from heights

The person actually doing the job is the best person to identify risk associated with performing that specific job task.

5.2 Hazard Identification:

Consultation with employees

Workplace Inspections

Pre-Start Checks

Incident Investigations

Audits

Your own experience

Analysis of incident statistics



This process should be used for: Routine & non-routine activities New processes Changes in operations Products or services as applicable

5.3 Methods to Identify Hazards:

Observation

Walk around the workplace, use checklist as a guide, have hazard, incident and injury reporting mechanisms in place and most importantly ensure staff is instructed on how to formally document hazards.

Consultation

Talk to shop staff and field personnel, seek assistance from specialists and other companies who complete similar tasks or who work in the same industry.

Consultation

Sharing information

Exchange of views between employers and their representatives

Genuine opportunity

Contribute effectively to any decision-making process

Eliminate or control risks to health and safety

Consultation works best when:

Identifying hazards

Assessing the risks

Developing control measures

Reviewing the effectiveness of control measures

Planning changes to the work environment, plant, equipment, work processes, work

organisation, work systems or chemicals in use.



6. Workplace Inspections: Workplace Inspections are a key process for identifying hazards in the workplace and eliminating them before they cause an accident or injury.

6.1 Types of inspection:

Continuous (Hazard reports)

Periodic (Recurring audits /checklists)

Intermittent (adhoc inspection walk arounds)

6.2 Inspection Checklist: A formal inspection checklist(s) that is specifically tailored to operations and maintenance requirements of the organization should be developed as follows:

Housekeeping

Plant, equipment and machinery

Work processes

Work arrangement (including shift work, overtime, stress factors)

The physical environment (i.e. temperature, lighting, space, noise)

OSHA management systems (policies and procedures)



WC WELDING HAZCOM INSPECTION Checklist

1.0 Outdoor Inventory / Storage

_____ Is all outdoor uncovered inventory clean of residuals that could enter storm water (such as oil, grease, solvents, and metal shavings)?

_____ Are all hazardous products covered to protect the area from rain or run-off?

_____ Are all hazardous products areas free of any leaks or spills?

2.0 Outdoor Storage of Chemicals and Raw Materials

_____ Are all outdoor drums, barrels, pails, and similar containers closed and tightly

sealed? _____ Are all outdoor drums, barrels, pails, and similar containers in good conditio n (no

signs of deterioration)? _____ Are all outdoor drums, barrels, pails, and similar containers non-leaking? _____ Is the water collected around tanks or in the secondary containment (if any) free

of sheen or discoloration?

3.0 Outdoor Industrial Equipment

_____ Are all uncovered compressors completely sealed so that no oil leaks can be

observed? _____ Are all forklifts and material-handling equipment maintained regularly to prevent

all leaks?

4.0 Waste Dumpsters / Waste Collection Areas

_____ Is all waste stored in covered, non-leaking dumpsters? _____ Are all metal shavings stored in either covered, non-leaking dumpsters, indoors

dumpsters or tightly sealed, non-leaking containers?

5.0 Storm Water Inlets/Drains

_____ Are all storm water inlets clean and free from materials and trash?

_____ Is the area around the drain free of any staining or spilled material? _____ Is the water observed in storm water drains/ditches free of any oil sheen,

discoloration, or any other sign indicating a release into storm water?



6.3 Hazard(s):

Obvious

Hidden

Developing Obvious-

Unguarded machinery Poor housekeeping Dust Noise Vibration Working at heights Load shifting equipment Chemicals

Hidden-

Potential energies such as thermal, kinetic, mechanical and electrical.

Psychological hazards such as stress, fatigue, lack of training, bullying and

harassment.

Biological hazards such as communicable diseases (blood borne viruses) What is RISK?

The probability of harm or damage occurring from exposure to a hazard, and the likely consequences of that harm or damage.

A chance of something happening that will impact on your objective. Assessing the RISK: What is the possibility of something occurring that will cause?

Injury



Illness

Damage Productivity loss

6.4 Three Important Factors Involved:

1. Likelihood- What is the probability of it happening?

2. Degree of Exposure- How often would I be exposed?

3. Consequence- If it happens, what will happen? 6.5 When Assessing the RISK:

Gather as much information as possible about each identified hazard.

Consider frequency and duration of exposure for all persons affected.

Use the information to assess the likelihood and consequences of each hazard

Use a risk assessment tool to calculate a risk score and prioritize against other hazards.

6.6 Likelihood & Exposure:

What is the likelihood of the hazard leading to an incident and possibly injury/damage?

Degree of Exposure How long? How often?

Are you or others exposed to the hazardous situation? 6.7 Consequences:

What are the consequences if the hazard results in an injury or damage? Employee Lost time

Punitive action

Improvement notices and or prosecution

Plant /department downtime

Poor publicity for the company



6.8 Considerations:

The number of times tasks are undertaken which could result in an incident?

The number of people performing the task(s)?

The likelihood of the incident occurring while the task is being performed?

What controls already exist? 7. Injury Analysis:

Who was injured?

Where did the accident happen?

What task was the employee doing?

How did the accident happen?

What part of the body was involved?

What type of injury occurred?

How severe was the injury?

What time did the accident occur?

8. In the event of an incident: How was the workplace environment, such as –

Exposure to noise

Dust

Fumes in the work areas

Thermal conditions

Lighting

Is judgment required?



A simple test for the manager to ask, “Is the job safe enough for me to do”?

“Would the way the work is being done be acceptable to an Inspector”?

After hazards are identified and potential solutions are addressed WC WELDING uses one of these tools below to assess the associated risk of each hazard.

All WC WELDING personnel are trained in the hazard identification process.

Also WC WELDING personnel is trained on how to use and maintain the appropriate PPE for every situation.

9. Risk Analysis & Types of Assessment Tools: Failure mode and effect analysis (FMEA) - (Processes or equipment)

(FMEA) is a risk assessment technique for systematically identifying potential failures in a system or a process.

It is widely used in the manufacturing industries in various phases of the

product life cycle.

The basic process is to take a description of the parts of a system, and list the consequences if

each part fails.

Hazard and operability (HAZOP) studies – (Design stage of a process)

Originally developed for use at manufacturing facilities such as oil refineries, offshore oil platforms, petrochemical and chemical plants, natural gas processing plants and power plants, its application has expanded to other areas as well.

Fault tree analysis – (identifying the causes or to analyse an incident)

Is a logical, structured process that can help identify potential causes of system failure before the failures actually occur.

Event tree analysis – (starts with the event and considers different scenarios)

An event tree is a visual representation of all the events which can occur in a system. As the number of events increases, the picture fans out like the branches of a tree.



Risk ranking matrix –AS/NZS 4360 Risk Management (Qualitative scales for Consequence and likelihood)

Qualitative risk analysis methods are used to set priority for various purposes including further analysis.

They are useful when reliable data for more quantitative approaches is not available.

10. Risk Rating:

Letter Risk Level Risk Control Measures

E Extreme Risk Immediate action required, operations must not start or be

stopped if already started. Identify and Implement controls to reduce risk to at least a

low level before beginning operations.

Highest level of corporate management needs to involved.

H High Risk Immediate action required, operations must not start or be stopped if already started.

Identify and Implement controls to reduce risk to at least a low level before beginning operations.

Senior site management needs to be involved.

M Medium Risk Complete risk assessment Identify hazards and implement controls to reduce risks. Management responsibility must be defined.

L Low Risk Identify hazards and implement controls as required.

Manage by routine processes

10.1 Pro’s of this method:

Provides a ranking of risk

Encourages the team to understand the hazard in order to rank the significance of the risk

10.2 Con’s of this method:

People guess levels of likelihood and consequence without sufficient analysis of the hazard or existing control.

It applies to a risk where the circumstances of occurrence are rare.



Method does not work well as a decision tool concerning the need for action on high consequence low probability risks.

Job safety analysis (JSA) –(Separates tasks performed into sub tasks)

This is WC WELDING’s preferred and recommended method to use both in the shop and in the field on location.

11. Risk Control: Hierarchy of Risk Controls-

Eliminate the risk - remove the hazard.

If not possible the risk must be minimized by using one or more of the other control options from the hierarchy.

The risk control measure selected must be the highest possible option within the hierarchy to minimize the risk to the lowest level as reasonably practicable.

Existing controls should be re-evaluated to determine if the most appropriate control measure is in place.

Evaluation of Control Methods-

Any control measures implemented to reduce risk in the workplace MUST be evaluated to ensure they are effective.

Control Measures must be evaluated by the OHSA Committee.

Should the controls prove to be ineffective -ensure that options for controlling the risk are re-

visited and improvements made.

Actions arising must be included in the corrective action register.

All corrective actions should be reviewed to ensure that new hazards have not been created

from solving the original hazard.



WC Welding Services Inc. Hazard Communication Program

1. Objective The objective of this program is to set forth policies and procedures concerning Hazard Communications which will enhance the safety and well-being of Healtheon employees. Furthermore, execution of this program is designed to provide for compliance with the Occupational Safety and Health Administration’s (OSHA) Hazard Communication Standard. 2. Assignment of Responsibility Responsible person will assume duties as Hazard Communication Officer. This position carries the responsibility of insuring this program is adhered to and that proper reporting is executed. 3. Program The ensuing items are to be followed to insure both compliance with the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard and the safety of our employees. The hazard communication program will be developed, implemented and maintained at each jobsite. 3.1 Hazardous Chemical List A list of hazardous materials and chemicals which are used in the course of the company's

normal business activities must be maintained and continually updated. This li st is to include all substances which require a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).

One copy of this list is to be kept in the front of each MSDS book and one copy is to be kept on file with the Hazard Communication Officer. For each chemical used in the workplace, an MSDS sheet must be available on that jobsite.

3.2Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)

All Material Safety Data Sheets must be kept in an organized fashion and must be placed in an

identified and accessible location for all employees to view at will. A duplicate set of MSDS information must be maintained by the Hazard Communication Officer.

MSDS books and the Hazardous Chemical List must be maintained and kept up to date. As obsolete MSDS's are replaced by updated copies, they must be retai ned in a separate file of obsolete MSDS's. Do not throw them away.

If a hazardous chemical or substance is received without a proper MSDS, the receiving person must immediately notify the Hazard Communication Officer. The manufacturer or distributor of the product must be contacted immediately and asked to fax the MSDS and mail a copy as a follow up. If, for some reason, the manufacturer or distributor is unable to produce a MSDS upon request, the Hazard Communication Officer should be notified immediately. Hazardous materials or substances received without an MSDS are to be returned to the sender.



3.3 Labeling

Each container of a hazardous chemical that is used in or around the work area must be properly labeled with the identity of the hazardous material, the appropriate hazard warnings, and the name and address of the manufacturer. Appropriate labels must be on all containers, regardless of size. Containers must be approved and recommended for storage and/or dispensing of the particular hazardous chemicals contained in them.

Worn and torn labels must be replaced. It is the responsibility of employees to report inappropriate labels to their supervisor. It is the responsibility of the Hazard Communication Officer to insure that appropriate labels are in place and that replacement labels are available.

Containers for materials that will be used within a particular work shift do not require labels.

3.4 Training

Employee training for this Hazard Communication Program consists of the following:

1. Each affected employee working for, or associated with, Healtheon is required to review

the training material with the Hazard Communication Officer and sign the

acknowledgment form which will be placed in the employee’s file. This training is to be

done during the new employee orientation process before the new employee actually

assumes status as an active employee. In addition to this training, affected employees

must be shown the locations of Material Safety Data Sheets, fire extinguishers, first aid

kits, and usage and storage of hazardous materials.

2. Fire extinguisher training may be provided to designated employees.

3. First Aid and CPR training will be provided as required in 29 CFR 1910.151.

4. If the management of Healtheon engages the services of contract labor personnel, and

exposure to hazardous materials is possible, the contract laborers must be made aware

of the locations of the Hazardous Chemical List and the MSDS information book.

3.5 Storage

All storage areas for hazardous substances are to be secured, properly ventilated, and identified by signs.

3.6 Non-Routine Tasks



Prior to performing non-routine tasks, such as a confined space entry, the SSHS must be informed by the supervisor directing employees to perform this non-routine task. Upon being informed that a non-routine task will take place, the SSHS will inform the potentially affected employees of hazardous chemicals to which they may be exposed as well as protective measures that may be taken to reduce chance of exposure (i.e., personal protective equipment (PPE), air testing, ventilation, respirators, etc.).

If a non-routine task is necessary, the SSHS will provide the following information about the activity as it relates to the specific chemicals expected to be encountered:

1. specific chemical name(s) and hazard(s);

2. personal protective equipment required and safety measures to be taken;

3. measures that have been taken to lessen the hazards including ventilation, respirators,

presence of other employees(s); and emergency procedures.

3.7 Other Personnel Exposures (Contractors)

The PSHM will provide other personnel or outside contractors with the following information as follows:

1. hazardous chemicals to which they may be exposed to while in the workplace;

2. measures to minimize the possibility of exposure;

3. location of the MSDS and labeling requirements for all hazardous chemicals;

4. and procedures to follow if they are exposed.

The SSHS will contact each contractor before work is started to gather and disseminate any information concerning chemical hazards the contractor is bringing into the workplace, and visa versa.



WC Welding Services Inc. Benzene Awareness

1. Purpose: The purpose of the Benzene Awareness section is to provide all employees with the associated hazards, and potential health risks of being exposed to Benzene. 2. Policy: It is the Policy of the WC Welding that all employees complete the Benzene awareness training portion of the new hire training orientation prior to being permitted to work in the field or shop. Annually a refresher course will be provided to all personnel. Fire extinguishers are readily available at all WC Welding shop(s) and inside every company vehicle. 3. Benzene Locations:

Petroleum refining sites

Tanks at producing pipeline & refineries

Field Maintenance 4. Benzene Properties:

Toxic

Colorless

Aromatic odor Not soluble in H2O

Flammable

Due to Benzene’s flammability smoking is prohibited in areas where it is present because vapors may form explosive mixtures in the air. 5. Benzene has many methods to enter the body:

Inhalation

Ingestion Absorption

Injection 6. Acute Health Effects:

Dizziness Headache

Narcosis

Nausea Drowsiness

7. Chronic Health Effects:



Myelotoxicity

General Weakness Aplastic Animea

Purpura

Pancytopenia Leukemia

8. Risk Management of Benzene Exposure:

Avoid benzene exposure

Engineering Controls Respiratory Protection

Protective Clothing Employees will be made aware of jobsites that contain Benzene, and site -specific training will be provided at the facility or work-site. This training will provide employees with knowledge of the facility/jobsite’s Emergency Action Plan (EAP). 9. Avoid Exposure:

Change work practices

Substitute products that do not contain Benzene 10. Engineering Controls:

Ventilation 11. Respiratory Protection:

When the exposures cannot be reduced below 1ppm but do not exceed 10ppm use of an air purifying respirator with a organic purifying cartridges is permitted. Emergency entry into atmospheres containing greater than 10ppm of benzene requires the use of an SCBA or airline respirator.

12. PPE:

Goggles Face Shield

Gloves

Apron

Rain Gear Boots

In order to minimize Benzene exposure an occupational medical monitoring program should be in place, and employees exposed to 0.5ppm or higher for 8hrs/day for more 30days/year should be monitored.



13. What is Acute Exposure?

Any measured exposure of more than 5ppm Or whenever the exposed person is exhibiting symptoms of headache, nausea, dizziness,

or drowsiness 14. Examples of High Benzene Cargo:

Benzene Gasoline Blending Stocks

White Spirits

Dripolene Tolune

Xylene

Benzene Mixtures Containing 10% or more Benzene



WC Welding Services Inc. Hydrogen Sulfide Awareness

Purpose: The primary purpose of this procedure is to protect WC Welding employees from hydrogen

sulfide exposure and to be able to identify possible sources of H2S on the jobsite.

Responsibilities:

No person shall enter an area where H2S concentrations are known or suspected to be greater than 10 parts per million (PPM) by volume in air in the employee-owners breathing zone without utilizing properly supplied air respiratory protection equipment. All subcontractor personnel working for WC Welding shall be required to comply with the same H2S safety requirements as do WC Welding personnel.

Policy:

H2S is an extremely toxic, colorless, flammable gas.

All names come form the characteristics of the gas, either its rotten egg odor or its corrosiveness.

Sour Gas

Sulfured Hydrogen

Black Damp

Hydrogen Sulfide

Rotten Egg Gas

Stink Damp

Sewer Gas

H2S is formed by the decomposition of organic animal and/or vegetable (previously living) materials.

It is found in natural gas and oil, sewers and cesspools (stagnant water) such as found in swamps

and are produced in a variety of industrial and biological processes.

Aerobic or anaerobic - with or without oxygen.

Physical/Chemical Properties:

Deadly, extremely toxic gas.

More deadly than carbon monoxide (CO), and second only to hydrogen cyanide (HCN) gas, which is

used for execution in gas chambers.

Heavier than air, specific gravity of 1.189 (air sp. gr.=1.00); therefore, H2S will have a tendency to be

found at ground or lower levels, i.e., pits, trenches, etc.

Readily dispersed by wind movement of air currents.



Exception: Mixture of up to 70% H2S mixed with 30% methane are still lighter than air until the mixture has had time to separate.

It is a colorless gas.

Odor of rotten eggs only in low concentrations – in high concentrations it rapidly deadens the sense

of smell – DO NOT DEPEND ON THE SENSE OF SMELL TO DETECT H2S.

The boiling point is -75 degrees Fahrenheit.

Vapor Pressure: 17.7 ATM @ 68 degrees Fahrenheit – 14.696 psia.

Hydrogen Sulfide is soluble in water and petroleum hydrocarbons. Solubility decreases as the fluid

temperature increases. There is a pH of approximately 4.

In the presence of water, Hydrogen Sulfide gas will form a corrosive acid and react with most

metals, causing metal loss, loss of strength, and metal fatigue. This metal loss could lead to failure

or be the primary cause of fatigue failures or stress-corrosion cracking (SCC).

Hydrogen Sulfide gas can cause failure due to Hydrogen Embrittlement (HE) or Sulfide Stress

Cracking (SSC). Under the right environment, some steel can crack almost instantly.

Hydrogen Sulfide gas forms an explosive/flammable mixture from 4.3% to 45.5% by volume of air.

Ignition Temperature: 500 degrees Fahrenheit, 260 degrees Celsius.

Vessels containing H2S may spontaneously ignite when the vessels are opened to the atmosphere.

Ignition is caused by reaction of pyrophoric iron sulfide with air. Conversion of sulfide to oxide

spontaneously generates enough heat to ignite flammable vapors. Special precautions must be

taken to prevent these spontaneous fires. It is recommended that the inside of tanks or vessels be

kept wet, with water, until the vessels are gas-free or until it has been determined that iron sulfide

does not exist in the vessel.

Burns with a blue flame and produces Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) gas, and like H2S, it can cause injury or

death to persons exposed to it.

Physiological Effects:

Concentrations Physiological Effects

.2 PPM Odor Threshold

10 PPM Obvious odor. Threshold Limit Value (TLS) – Time Weight Average (TWA). PEL/TVL – level of contaminant permissible for 8 hour period of constant exposure.

15 PPM Employee/owner’s 15 minute Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL), PEL/STEL – level of contaminant permissible or 15 minutes or less.



100 PPM Loss of sense of smell after 2-15 minutes of exposure. Difficult breathing after 1-4 hours of exposure.

150 PPM Throat and eye irritation after 15-30 minutes of exposure. Difficult breathing after 1-4 hours of exposure.

300 PPM Level Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (IDLH) per NIOSH – level of contaminant that one could escape within 30 minutes without respiratory protection and not experience any escape impairing or irreversible side effects.

500 PPM Dizziness, severe pain in eyes and head, breathing stops in a few minutes, prompt resuscitation needed, 1-4 hours of exposure = death.

700 PPM Quickly unconscious, will die without prompt rescue and artificial respiration, 30-60 minutes of exposure = death.

1000 PPM Immediate unconsciousness, possible permanent brain damage, artificial respiration needed immediately, 2-15 minutes of exposure = death.

If one inch would represent one PPM of gas, this would be like comparing one inch in 15.5 miles in

distance. If one second would represent one PPM of gas, this would be like comparing one second

to 11.5 days.

Symptoms of Exposure:

Entrance into blood stream through the lungs.

Reaction with blood is similar to carbon dioxide.

The initial reaction is increased breathing rate.

Symptoms of low level exposure (<200 PPM):

Dizziness

Nausea

Tight chest

Coughing

Dangers of high level exposure (>200 PPM):

Unconsciousness

Respiratory arrest

Cardiac arrest

Death

Effects of H2S depend upon:



Duration – the length of time the individual is exposed.

Frequency - how often the individual has been exposed.

Intensity – how much the individual was exposed to.

Individual Susceptibility – the individual’s physiological makeup.

Description of Sulfur Dioxide (SO2):

Physical/Chemical Properties

Chemical formula: SO2

Molecular weight: 64

Boiling point: 14 degrees Fahrenheit

Non-combustible (produced by burning H2S gas)

Heavier than air, specific gravity of 2.26

Sulfur Dioxide is a colorless gas that is very irritating to the eyes and lungs.

Sulfur Dioxide has a pungent odor and like H2S, it can cause injury or death to persons exposed to it.

Toxicity of Sulfur Dioxide (SO2):

The physiological effects on humans when inhalation of SO2 occurs, varies at different levels of

concentrations and may be as follows:

Concentrations Physiological Effects

0.3 – 1 PPM Detection level – pungent odor

2 PPM Threshold Limit Value (TLV) – Time Weight Average

5 PPM 15 minutes Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL) permitted by OSHA

6 – 12 PPM Irritation of the throat and nose

20 PPM Eye irritation

100 PPM Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH) set by NIOSH

Sources and Locations of Sulfur Dioxide (SO2):

Oil production and processing (look at H2S survey for the area)

When H2S is burned it produces SO2

Sour inlet gas or oil system

Enclosed buildings and processing vessels

Sour gas compressor and pump leaks



By-products of acidizing and cleaning operations

Amine treating units

Production and storage tanks

Other sources too numerous to name

Other Industries

Wastewater treatment facilities

Paper pulp factories

Asphalt operations and storage

Industries where putrefaction occurs (tanning, fishing, stockyards, etc.)

Emergency Procedure:

Personnel responsibilities during an H2S alarm or emergency shall be established by each WC

Welding location. These responsibilities shall include personnel securing the area, isolating the leak,

etc.

Personnel will not respond to an H2S alarm/leak alone. The “Buddy System” must always be used in

response to alarm situations. The “Buddy System” requires an additional person while one or more

persons are working where H2S concentrations exceed or may reasonable exceed 300 PPM. This

additional person should maintain visual and /or audible contact in a safe area, supplied with an

independent air supply, and equipped with appropriate rescue equipment.

Safe briefing areas shall be established for all manned H2S locations. Conspicuous signs shall

designate safe briefing areas.

H2S Detection Equipment:

Fixed H2S detection systems shall be considered for areas that may experience H2S leaks where

personnel are present on a daily basis or where the locations are near residences or other public

buildings.

Sensors shall be set to annunciate at 10PPM for a low alarm and at a maximum of 300 PPM for a

high alarm on fixed systems.

The system shall be calibrated at least every 90 days.

All H2S alarms shall be treated as an actual gas release.

H2S alarms shall be distinctive from all other alarms and shall be consistent.

Hand held detection instruments are to be utilized for spot checking areas. All electronic hand held

instruments shall be calibrated per the manufacturer’s specifications. All calibrations shall be

documented and retained on file.



See Business Partner’s (Employee-owner’s) Safety Manuel, Atmospheric Testing Instruments 3E-

0225.

Recommended Emergency Rescue:

Call for help and have a backup person present (or on the way) then don appropriate breathing

apparatus before attempting the rescue.

Remove the victim from contaminated area to a safe area with fresh air by moving crosswind then

upwind.

If the person is not breathing, begin mouth-to-mouth resuscitation immediately until normal

breathing has been restored or until medical attention is obtained. Administer cardiopulmonary

resuscitation (CPR) if necessary. When possible, replace mouth-to-mouth with a bag mask or

automatic oxygen resuscitator.

Oxygen Resuscitator Safe Operating Instructions

Turn on the unit – high pressure gauge should red 1800+, low pressure gauge should be at 10 liters.

Administering oxygen – check for proper seal, observe the chest rise.

Precautions for unit and oxygen – flammability of O2, high-pressure delivery.

Effectiveness compared to mouth-to-mouth – five times the oxygen content, pressure assisted delivery.

Treat for shock, keep the person warm and calm. Never leave the person alone.

All persons who are rendered unconscious must be taken to a hospital or doctor for examination

and evaluation.

If a medical examination is necessary, remove any H2S contaminated clothing prior to

transportation to a hospital.

Evacuation:

Exit contaminated area.

Crosswind then upwind.

Uphill if possible, H2S is heavier than air unless it is mixed with methane or gas lighter than air.

Don breathing protective gear if reentry is needed.

Comply with and complete the site specific SSHEP.

../Safety%20Forms/SSHEP%20Plan.doc



Training:

All training shall be documented

Additional training materials can be obtained from a Service District library and Safety Director.

Testing and Certification:

Project/ Safety Supervisor shall ensure that all testing is done in an ethical manner.

A written test shall be handed out after training material has been presented. The test is a closed

book test.

Any trainee who completes the test, missing more than three questions will be required to review

the training material with the instructor.

The instructor can present the test questions orally, one on one, with a trainee when necessary.

The Record of Training and written test shall be kept at the local service area office.



WC Welding Services Inc. Hexavalent Chromium Awareness

Purpose: The primary purpose of this procedure is to protect WC Welding employees from cadmium

exposure and to be able to identify possible sources of cadmium on the jobsite.

Responsibilities:


possible sources of cadmium on the jobsite and note them in a company JSA, in addition to

notifying all employees on site.

Policy:

Training

All Employee-owners with the potential of being exposed to Hexavalent Chromium shall be trained, initially and annually, in this procedure according to OSHA 1910.1026(I)(2). Additional training shall include Respiratory Protection Policy, Personal Protective Equipment Policy and the Site Safety Health Environmental Plan.

Additional training materials can be obtained from a Service District library and Safety

Director.

Every effort shall be made to protect employee/owner exposure to Hexavalent

Chromium.

This policy is available for employee/owners or their representative to review or copy at

the job site. Additional pertinent information can be obtained form the Safety Director.

Testing, Air Monitoring, Identifying, Maintenance, Ventilation, Protection Devices, and Communication

The client facility representative is solely responsible for:

Testing

Air monitoring

Identifying

Maintenance

Upkeep of ventilation systems

Protection devices

Decontamination and personal hygiene facilities

Communicating with WC Welding Supervision about the location of areas and surfaces,

which pose potential exposure to Hexavalent Chromium.

Employee/Owners will be monitored every six months if the initial monitoring shows

employee/owner exposure in accordance with OSHA 1910.1026(d)(2).

Respiratory%20Protection.doc

Personal%20Protective%20Equip.doc

../Safety%20Forms/SSHEP%20Plan.doc



Respirators must be used when engineering controls and work practices cannot reduce

employee exposure during work operations where engineering controls and work

practices are not feasible, and emergencies. Respirators will be provided to

employee/owners in accordance with OSHA 1910.134.

Exposure

The Supervisor is responsible for communicating with the client facility representative and WC Welding Safety Director concerns pertaining to identifying work areas and surfaces, which pose potential exposure to Hexavalent Chromium. The Supervisor is to ensure that the Employee Protection Program is implemented whenever Hexavalent Chromium levels are at 5 micrograms per cubic meter of air (5 ug/m3) and the Action Level of 2.5 ug/m3 calculated as an 8-hour time weight average and no employee/owner shall be exposed of the PEL higher than these listed levels in accordance with OSHA 1910.1026©. If at any time an employee/owner is suspicious or aware of potential exposures that are not addressed, the employee/owner is to contact the Supervisor who will then coordinate with the client representative and the WC Welding Safety Director in addressing the Employee-owners concerns.Once areas and surfaces of potential Hexavalent Chromium exposure have been identified, the Supervisor is to coordinate with the client facility representative and the WC Welding Safety Director to ensure Employee-owners are adequately protected from harmful exposure. This protection may include engineering controls, Respiratory Protection, Personal Protective Equipment Policy and additional training that may be needed.

Personal Protective Equipment will be provided at no cost to the employee/owner -in order to prevent emergency situations-1910.1027 (h), 1926.1127(h).

Additional Personal Protective Equipment may include:

A respirator appropriate for Hexavalent Chromium particles, including PAPR’s according

to OSHA 1910.1026 (g).

Suitable coveralls and gloves.

Activities should be conducted in well-ventilated areas to which access has been

restricted.

Plastic ground covers should be utilized to the extent possible to contain contaminants

and facilitate cleanup.

Gloves, respirators, coveralls, and rags should be decontaminated or placed in double

bags, sealed and held for proper disposal.

The need for Personal Medical Monitoring should be evaluated and provided as

required.

Personal Protective clothing exposed to Hexavalent Chromium should not be cleaned by:

Air blasting

Shaking





Any method that could create air borne Hexavalent Chromium particulate.

Surfaces shall be maintained as free as practicable of accumulation of chromium. All

spills and releases of chromium, shall be cleaned promptly methods of cleaning include

HEPA filtered vacuums, dry or wet sweeping, shoveling or other methods to minimize

exposure in accordance with OSHA 1910.1026 (j)-1910.1026 (j) (2) (i).

Employee/owners are to be notified within five working days, in writing, if they have identified unacceptable blood levels.

Personal Hygiene

All Employee-owners exposed to Hexavalent Chromium should wash their hands and

faces before eating, drinking or smoking.

No eating, drinking or tobacco products are allowed in the area where possible

Hexavalent Chromium exposure may occur.

Workers should shower and decontaminate before leaving work site.

Vehicles should not be parked in contaminated areas.

Employee-owners are to maintain an extremely high level of personal hygiene.

Possible sources of Exposure are:

Welding and cutting

Paints

Braising and welding filler material

Chromium plated steel

Chromate pigments and powders

The Job Safety Analysis (JSA) and pre job planning will include Hexavalent Chromium Awareness to ensure that work activity precautions are developed and communicated to each employee/owner involved.

Signage and barricades shall be placed at a sufficient distance to protect any employee/owner for entry in to the areas, which pose hazards from Hexavalent Chromium with in accordance with OSHA 1910.1026(e)(!)-(e)(3)(i).

All work activities involving Hexavalent Chromium are to be coordinated with the WC Welding Safety Director, who is responsible for administering, coordinating, reviewing, and updating this policy at least annually.

Medical surveillance shall be provided when an employee experiences signs or symptoms of the adverse health effects of Hexvalent Chromium (dermatitis, asthma, bronchitis, etc.). Medical evaluations will be provided at no cost to employees. Examinations will be performed by a



physician or under the supervision of a physician or other licensed health care professional in accordance with OSHA 1910.1026 (k) (1)-1910.1026 (k) (l) (ii).

WC Welding will maintain and make available an accurate record of all employee exposure monitoring, medical surveillance and training records in accordance with OSHA 1910.1026 (m).

OSHA References: OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1027 OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1127



WC Welding Services Inc. Cadmium Awareness

Purpose: The primary purpose of this procedure is to protect WC Welding employees from cadmium

exposure and to be able to identify possible sources of cadmium on the jobsite.

Responsibilities:


possible sources of cadmium on the jobsite and note them in a company JSA, in addition to

notifying all employees on site.

Policy:

Training

All Employee-owners with the potential of being exposed to cadmium shall be trained, initially and annually, in this procedure. Additional training shall include Respiratory Protection Policy, Personal Protective Equipment Policy, and the Emergency Response Policy.

All training shall be documented and maintained at the local service area office.

Additional training materials can be obtained from a Service District library and Safety

Director.

Every effort shall be made to protect employee/owner exposure to cadmium.

This policy is available for employee/owners or their representative to review or copy at

the job site. Additional pertinent information can be obtained form the Safety Director.

Testing, Air Monitoring, Identifying, Maintenance, Ventilation, Protection Devices, and Communication

The client facility representative is solely responsible for:

Testing

Air monitoring

Identifying

Maintenance

Upkeep of ventilation systems

Protection devices

Decontamination and personal hygiene facilities

Communicating with WC Welding Supervision about the location of areas and surfaces,

which pose potential exposure to cadmium.

Exposure

The Supervisor is responsible for communicating with the client facility representative and WC Welding Safety Director concerns pertaining to identifying work areas and



../Project%20and%20Employee%20%20Guidelines/Emergency%20Procedures%20Plan.doc



surfaces, which pose potential exposure to cadmium. The Supervisor is to ensure that the Employee Protection Program is implemented whenever cadmium levels are at 2.5 micrograms per cubic meter of air calculated as an 8-hour time weight average. If at any time an employee/owner is suspicious or aware of potential exposures that are not addressed, the employee/owner is to contact the Supervisor who will then coordinate with the client representative and the WC Welding Safety Director in addressing the Employee-owners concerns. Once areas and surfaces of potential cadmium exposure have been identified, the Supervisor is to coordinate with the client facility representative and the WC Welding Safety Director to ensure Employee-owners are adequately protected from harmful exposure. This protection may include engineering controls, Respiratory Protection, Policy, Personal Protective Equipment Policy, and additional training that may be needed for a safe completion of tasks.

Personal Protective Equipment-in order to prevent emergency situations-1910.1027(h), 1926.1127(h).

Additional Personal Protective Equipment may include:

A respirator appropriate for cadmium particles, including PAPR’s.

Suitable coveralls and gloves.

Activities should be conducted in well-ventilated areas to which access has been

restricted.

Plastic ground covers should be utilized to the extent possible to contain contaminants

and facilitate cleanup.

Gloves, respirators, coveralls, and rags should be decontaminated or placed in double

bags, sealed and held for proper disposal.

The need for Personal Medical Monitoring should be evaluated and provided as

required.

Personal Protective clothing exposed to cadmium should not be cleaned by:

Air blasting

Shaking

Any method that could create air borne cadmium particulate.

Employee/owners are to be notified within five working days, in writing, if they have identified unacceptable blood levels.

Personal Hygiene

All Employee-owners exposed to cadmium should wash their hands and faces before

eating, drinking or smoking.





No eating, drinking or tobacco products are allowed in the area where possible

cadmium exposure may occur.

Workers should shower and decontaminate before leaving work site.

Vehicles should not be parked in contaminated areas.

Employee-owners are to maintain an extremely high level of personal hygiene. Possible sources of Exposure are:

Welding and cutting

Paints

Braising and welding filler material

Cadmium plated steel

Cadmium alloys

Cadmium coated conduit or equipment

The Job Safety Analysis (JSA) and pre job planning will include Cadmium Awareness to ensure that work activity precautions are developed and communicated to each employee/owner involved.

Signage and barricades shall be placed at a sufficient distance to protect any employee/owner for entry in to the areas, which pose hazards from cadmium.

All work activities involving cadmium are to be coordinated with the WC Welding Safety Director, who is responsible for administering, coordinating, reviewing, and updating this policy at least annually.

OSHA References: OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1027 OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1127



Lead Awareness

1. Purpose: The purpose of the Lead section is to educate all WC WELDING employees on the hazards of working around lead based materials and how to safely monitor lead exposure. 2. Policy: It is WC WELDING’s policy that all employees shall be trained about the hazards of working in an environment where lead occurs and how to safely manage exposure. Training for Lead exposure is provided during new hire orientation and annually during a refresher course. All training will be documented. If for any reason WC welding employees are exposed to lead due to another contractor onsite the employees will be removed from site until the area is repaired or an initial exposure assessment is performed

3. Procedures:

Inorganic lead is typically found in paints and coatings. Lead is primarily an ingestion and/or inhalation hazard. Overexposure to lead can have serious short-term or longer-term health

effects. Activities in which exposure to inorganic lead can occur include:

Welding

Cutting

Sandblasting Burning of painted and/or coated surfaces

Exposures above the Action Level (AL) of 30micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air averaged over an 8hr workday triggers exposure monitoring, training, and medical surveillance requirements. The permissible exposure limit (PEL) is 50 micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air average over an 8hr workday. 4. Symptoms of Lead Exposure:

Loss of appetite Metallic taste in mouth

Anxiety

Stomach cramps Pale skin

Tiredness

Head ache Nervous irritability

Muscle and joint pain

Tremors Numbness



Dizziness 5.Short-term effects:

Seizures

Coma

Death Dependant on amount of lead exposed to

6. Long-term effects:

Lead builds up in the body over time Anemia

Damage to the nervous system

Damage to the kidneys and other organs Damage to the reproductive system

7. How do we control lead exposure?

Post warning signs

Restrict access to areas where lead is present Monitor air daily

Personal samples are the best way to determine an employees’ daily exposure to lead.

Install ventilation systems-Engineering Controls Implement job rotation

Practice proper housekeeping and hygiene

Annual physical- medical evaluation Upon the discovery of lead which is higher than the action level, monitoring is required every 6

months or at least 7 days apart, until 2 consecutive readings are below the action level.

Field personnel will use respirators while engineering or work practice controls are being installed, or when the exposure limit is not sufficiently reduced even after these devices are installed or an emergency occurs.

All personnel will be provided free of charge any PPE that is required to perform any job task.

Any materials that may need cleaning or may need to be sanitized will be collected weekly to be cleaned, inspected, repaired, and replaced.

If these items need to be repaired or replaced then they will be prior to being put back into use.

All personnel will be notified within 15 working days of the results of any air monitoring either by writing, email, or phone call.

If the results are above the PEL then a corrective action will be put in place to reduce or lower the exposure to a level that is below the PEL.

Prior to any operation beginning a site specific evaluation is to be completed which will determine the preliminary exposure level (if any).

If lead is present in higher amounts than the PEL then a corrective action plan will be put into



place to reduce/minimize the exposure to lead.

If necessary then engineering and work practice controls are utilized, air monitoring is started, and a description of each operation in which lead is emitted is to be recorded and documented.

In areas where the PEL is exceeded then warning signs will be installed warning all personnel of the present lead exposure

In areas where the PEL is exceeded all personnel are provided with lunch rooms, changing rooms, and rest rooms including showers.

WC WELDING’s Lead Exposure Plan is taught during new hire orientation and annually during a refresher course for all personnel.

If employees are working with lead based material or come in contact with it employees shall wash hand and face to minimize lead exposure.

8. Medical Surveillance Program (MSP):

The MSP is provided to all personnel that have been exposed to lead above the AL for more than 30days.

This program is provided to personnel free of charge, and will be completed by a licensed physician.

The MSP encompasses a preliminary medical exam, with: Blood sampling and monitoring should be performed semi-annually or at least

until 2 consecutive samples are acceptable.

While an employee is trying to remove lead from his/her body blood sampling and monitoring should be taken monthly.

Any personnel that has elevated levels of lead in his/her blood should immediately be removed from duty.

These results should be provided to the employee within 5 business days.

Also any personnel that has been medically relieved due to lead exposure is protected under Medical Removal Protection benefits.



WC Welding Services Inc. Blood Borne Pathogens 1. Purpose: The purpose of the Blood borne Pathogen Awareness Program Section is to train all personnel in the potential hazards of being exposed to human blood or other potentially infectious materials. 2. Policy: It is WC WELDING’s policy that all employees will be trained in Blood borne pathogen awareness during new hire orientation, and annually during a refresher course. 3. Procedure: What are Pathogens?

1. Parasite 2. Bacteria 3. Fungi 4. Virus

Certain pathogens can be found in the blood and other body fluids of infected individuals. These bloodborne pathogens may be transmitted when an individual is exposed to infected body fluids. The two most significant diseases caused by bloodborne pathogens are Hepatitis-B, which is caused by the Hepatitis-B Virus (HBV), and Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome (AIDS), which results from the Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV). Both of these diseases are dangerous, and even though there is only a slight possibility that crewmembers would be exposed, it is still important to provide them with information about the nature of bloodborne pathogens, which could cause these and other diseases. Such information can be obtained from a number of sources including local hospitals, doctors, state health departments, and the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 4. Hepatitis B (HBV) Immunization injection is available to all WC WELDING personnel free of charge.

Inflammation of the liver

Liver damage from mild – fatal Can live in a dry environment for at least 7 days

Very infectious

1/3 cases show no symptoms, 1/3 show flu-like symptoms, 1/3 show severe symptoms 6 to 10% of cases infectious for life (carrier state)

In the past, 140,000-300,000 new infections per year

5,000-6,000 deaths/yr from chronic liver disease Safe and effective vaccine is now available

Many health care workers (HCW) are not vaccinated

Approximately 400 HCW infected annually This is a decrease from 17, 000 in 1983 and 1,000 in 1994.

25% of infected develop acute hepatitis

How are they transmitted?

1. Air 2. Blood 3. Fecal



10-30% of health/dental workers show evidence of past HBV infection 5. Hepatitis C (HCV):

Affects 4 times more people than HIV

4 million Americans infected

Only 25% of those infected have been diagnosed In 1995, estimated 560-1120 cases among HCW in U.S.

Symptoms may or may not be present

Infection may lead to carrier state

Carrier state can develop with or without symptoms Carrier state can lead to chronic liver disease, cirrhosis (10 year latency), or cancer (alcohol is

strong co-factor)

Leading cause of liver transplant in U.S. 85% of Hepatitis C infections persist for life

70% develop chronic liver disease

Signs and symptoms may not appear until 10 years after infection

Onset of symptoms may present with severe liver disease No broadly effective treatment

No vaccine available

Blood transfusion prior to 1992 Commonly transmitted through drug use

Unprotected sex (multiple sexual partners)

Occupational exposure to blood o Risk is intermediate between HBV and HIV

6. Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV):

Attacks the human immune system

Can live in a dry environment for only a few hours > 1 million infections in U.S.

56 documented cases among HCW;

138 cases of possible occupational transmission 7. Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome (AIDS):

AIDS = Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome Results from destruction of the human immune system from infection with HIV

Some have no symptoms, or less severe symptoms

No vaccine available yet

HBV HIV



HCW cases 400/year 56

Risk of infection-needle stick 6-30/100 1/300

Vaccine Available Yes No

Infectivity Low Very High

Nucleic Acid RNA DNA

Carrier State >80% Variable { 10-50% }

Route Blood Blood

WC WELDING will ensure that all employees with occupational exposure participate in a training program which will be provided to that employee. If an emergency situation occurs where potential infectious materials are presented and differentiation between body fluid types is difficult, all body fluids shall be considered infectious. Contaminated surfaces shall be decontaminated with disinfectants immediately or as soon as possible. 8. Exposure Control Plan: The purpose of WC WELDING’s Exposure Control Plan is to eliminate or minimize personnel’s exposure to potentially hazardous materials such blood. All WC WELDING personnel will be given a copy of our exposure control plan in his/her employee handbook, and will also be able to download a copy of this document from the company website. 8.1 Methods Used to control Exposure:

Exposure determination

Controls Universal precautions (or equivalent system)

Engineering controls

Work practices Personal protective equipment

Housekeeping

Hepatitis B vaccination

Post exposure evaluation & follow-up Communication and training

Recordkeeping—health records kept during career plus 30yrs, training records for at least 3yrs.

Records are available upon request of employees. Medical records cannot be released without the written consent of the

employee. WC WELDING complies with the requirements involving transfer of

records set forth in OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1020(h)

8.2 Exposure Determination:

o Shall be made without regard to the use of PPE.

HCV HBV



o Do we have job classifications where ...

All employees are occupationally exposed?

List the classifications

Some employees are occupationally exposed?

List the classifications

List the tasks with exposure

o Determine exposure without regard for PPE the worker uses 9. First Aid:

WC WELDING will always have at least 1 first aid trained employee in the shop or in the field on

a job location. Good Samaritan: If employers have a distinct policy of 1st aid treatment that is only offered on a

voluntary basis by the trained individuals, these actions may be classified as “Good Samaritan”.

Collateral Duty: The employer made it part of the job duty for an employee to provide 1st aid, but the actual event would be rare. All elements of the BBP standard apply, but HBV vaccinations may be delayed until the first time there is a 1st aid incident involving blood or OPIM (regardless of whether there is an exposure incident). See WRD 92-6, corrective amendment.

Designated Responder: The employer makes 1st aid part of the job duty for an employee and exposure would be anticipated. All elements of BBP standard apply.



Every employee will be trained in BBP during new-hire orientation and will be re-trained annually.

10. Universal Precautions: The concept of universal precautions should direct all of your actions that in any way involve blood or other potentially infectious materials (OPIM). This concept assumes that there is no way to tell if a person is infectious or not. Remember that many people in highly infectious stages of these diseases may not know they are sick or infectious. These diseases cross all boundaries of class and income. Standard Precautions, Blood-body Fluid Precautions, and Body Substance Isolation are acceptable systems in lieu of universal precautions. 11. Engineering Controls:

• Isolate or remove the blood borne pathogen hazard from the workplace o A physical guard o Barrier o Environmental controls o Other devices

• Engineering controls are simply any machine or physical device that will isolate or remove BBP from the work area or workplace.

• These may come in the form of a physical guard or barrier or environmental controls. • Annual evaluation and documentation • Solicit input from patient care providers • Implement commercially available, effective and appropriate devices • Document justifications for not using safer devices

12. Physical Guard: Sharps disposal containers

Closable

Puncture resistant Leak proof

Labeled

13. Work Practice Controls (WPC): *are the actions that personnel take to minimize any exposure to blood or OPIM

Must be specific to each work space or location.

There must be enough specific directions with different sorts of procedures to ensure uniformity.

Every single procedure may not need a separate set of directions, you can combine similar tasks. Example—washing hands

Safe procedure in the event of an exposure incident.

14. PPE:



PPE is provided to all WC WELDING personnel free of charge at any time.

It is WC WELDING’s responsibility to clean and launder any items that may be exposed to blood or OPIM.

Gloves

Gowns

Shields Eye Protection

14.1 Gloves:

Must be carefully selected for their intended use. Important considerations are permeability to microorganisms, dexterity and durability.

Must be frequently changed because the will develop pinhole leaks that are not visible but can allow passage of microscopic organisms.

It is important that the gloves are located where they are used.

It is estimated that up to 8-12% of the users of latex gloves will develop an allergic dermatitis reaction. Some may even have stronger respiratory allergic reactions. Substitute materials must be found to accommodate sensitized individuals. Common substitute materials are nitrile and vinyl. If using latex, chose powder less and those with low-protein or antigen content

Thicker utility gloves are needed for tougher jobs where more abrasion is encountered. These gloves must be changed before they start to show wear. They must be disinfected in between uses.

14.2 Gowns:

Protective clothing could range from a laboratory coat to a fully encapsulated suit. Materials can range from the mid weight cotton fabric of a laboratory coat to fluid resistant material to waterproof material.

The amount of protection will depend on the risk and degree of potential splash. This requirement is performance based.

A laboratory coat is probably fine for a medical clinic laboratory. The fully encapsulated suit pictured above is appropriate for certain surgical procedures that create a lot of aerosol, such as sawing through bone.

Caps or hoods and /or shoe covers have to be worn in instances when gross contamination can reasonably be anticipated.

14.3 Shields/Eye Protection:

Face shields would be needed if risk and amount of potential splash or splatter to the face is substantial. The skin as well as the eyes needs to be protected.

Use of a respiratory mask in combination with an eye protection device is required for potential splashes, spray or spatters.

If the risk of splash is minimal, glasses with side shields would be required. The side shields must fit along the lenses. Some after market clip on shields leave wide gaps that splashes could get through.

Splash goggles may be required in higher risk situations.



15. Good House-Keeping:

The employer has to ensure that the worksite is maintained in a clean and sanitary condition. Hand washing stations are located in each restroom and also in the kitchen area, along with

soap, anti-septic solution, and paper towels.

An appropriate written schedule for cleaning and decontamination must be developed for the program.

The written procedure must include individual locations, how often, what specific cleaners and disinfectants are used and the specific cleaning procedures.

The disinfectant must be an EPA approved tuberculocidal or HIV/HBV effective disinfectant. The label on the product will have this information. Check with distributors or EPA maintains a listing of the products.

A dilution of household bleach to water of between 1:10 to 1:100 may be used. It should be made daily, older solutions lose potency.

Any equipment should be properly cleaned and decontaminated prior to being put back in service.

16. Waste:

Is blood soaked bandages etc… Disposal of regulated waste is specifically regulated in counties with large cities. You will need

to contact the local health department’s environmental section for these regulations.

Non regulated contaminated waste (by the county health department regulations) can usually be disposed of in the regular waste.

Waste containers must: Easily accessible Leak proof Maintained upright Labeled or color coded Replaced routinely Disposal County or City Health Dept. Regulations

17. Communication:

Signs and labels

Regulated waste

Containers with blood or OPIM Laundry

Biohazard symbol 18. Exposure Incident: *An exposure incident is a specific contact with blood or OPIM that is capable of transmitting a blood borne disease. *Non-intact skin: can include chapped or abraded skin and minor cuts.



Contact with blood or OPIM via:

Cuts, puncture, needle sticks Mucous membrane

Eye

Non-intact skin 18.1 Post Exposure Evaluation: WC WELDING Responsibility-

• Provide medical evaluation ASAP Testing for HBV, HCV, HIV HIV/HBV PEP when indicated

• Identify source individual, if possible Obtain consent for blood test

• Provide information to healthcare provider Routes of entry Employee’s job duties Copy of the regulation

• Insure that the healthcare provider provides to exposed employee: • Results of the source individuals test • Results of exposed employee’s test • Post exposure treatment as needed • Provided at no cost to employee

18.2 Medical Evaluation and Follow-up: Healthcare Providers Responsibility-

• Provide in writing to employer: Employee has been informed of the results Employee has been informed of any medical conditions resulting from exposure

• All specific findings or diagnoses are confidential to employee • Healthcare professional’s written opinion: Must only contain generic information. May not

contain any medical diagnosis or disease testing results. These are employees’ confidential medical information.



WC Welding Services Inc. Exposure Control Plan

POLICY

WC Welding is committed to providing a safe and healthful work environment for our entire staff. In

pursuit of this endeavor, the following exposure control plan (ECP) is provided to eliminate or minimize

occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens in accordance with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1030,

“Occupational Exposure to Bloodborne Pathogens.”

The ECP is a key document to assist our firm in implementing and ensuring compliance with the standard, thereby protecting our employees. This ECP includes:

3.7 Determination of employee exposure 3.8 Implementation of various methods of exposure control,

including: Universal precautions Engineering and work practice controls Personal protective equipment Housekeeping

3.9 Hepatitis B vaccination 3.10 Post-exposure evaluation and follow-up 3.11 Communication of hazards to employees and training 3.12 Recordkeeping 3.13 Procedures for evaluating circumstances surrounding an exposure incident

The methods of implementation of these elements of the standard are discussed in the subsequent pages of this ECP. PROGRAM ADMINISTRATION

* Christopher Schmidt is (are) responsible for the implementation of the ECP. Christopher

Schmidt will maintain, review, and update the ECP at least annually, and whenever necessary to include new or modified tasks and procedures. Contact location/phone number: (570) -677-7848

* Those employees who are determined to have occupational exposure to blood or other

potentially infectious materials (OPIM) must comply with the procedures and work practices

outlined in this ECP.



* Christopher Schmidt will maintain and provide all necessary personal protective equipment

(PPE), engineering controls (e.g., sharps containers), labels, and red bags as required by the

standard. Christopher Schmidt will ensure that adequate supplies of the aforementioned

equipment are available in the appropriate sizes. Contact location/phone number: (570)-677-

7848

* Christopher Schmidt will be responsible for ensuring that all medical actions required are

performed and that appropriate employee health and OSHA records are maintained. Contact

location/phone number: (570)-677-7848

* Christopher Schmidt will be responsible for training, documentation of training, and making the

written ECP available to employees, OSHA, and NIOSH representatives. Contact location/phone number: (570)-677-7848

EMPLOYEE EXPOSURE DETERMINATION

The following is a list of all job classifications at our establishment in which all employees have occupational exposure:

JOB TITLE DEPARTMENT/LOCATION

Welder Shop & in the field Laborer Shop & in the field

Supervisor Shop & in the field

Operator Shop & in the field

The following is a list of job classifications in which some employees at our establishment have occupational exposure. Included is a list of tasks and procedures, or groups of closely related tasks and

procedures, in which occupational exposure may occur for these individuals:

JOB TITLE DEPARTMENT/LOCATION TASK/PROCEDURE

Laborer Shop & in the field Handing Waste Materials

Welder Shop & in the field Handing Waste Materials

Supervisor Shop & in the field Handing Waste Materials

Part-time, temporary, contract and per diem employees are covered by the standard. How the



provisions of the standard will be met for these employees should be described in the ECP .

METHODS OF IMPLEMENTATION AND CONTROL

Universal Precautions

All employees will utilize universal precautions.

Exposure Control Plan

Employees covered by the bloodborne pathogens standard receive an explanation of this ECP during

their initial training session. It will also be reviewed in their annual refresher training. All employees

have an opportunity to review this plan at any time during their work shifts by contacting Christopher

Schmidt. If requested we will provide an employee with a copy of the ECP free of charge and within 15

days of the request.

Christopher Schmidt is responsible for reviewing and updating the ECP annually or more frequently if necessary to reflect any new or modified tasks and procedures which affect occupational exposure and to reflect new or revised employee positions with occupational exposure.

Engineering Controls and Work Practices

Engineering controls and work practice controls will be used to prevent or minimize exposure to bloodborne pathogens. The specific engineering controls and work practice controls used are listed below:

* All waste will stored in approved containers

* All waste will be incinerated or properly disposed of

* Nitrile gloves and disinfectants will be provided

* Sharps will be stored in approved containers

* Regular refresher training will be required

Sharps disposal containers are inspected and maintained or replaced by Christopher Schmidt every 30 days or whenever necessary to prevent overfilling.

This facility identifies the need for changes in engineering control and work practices through review of OSHA records, employee interviews, and committee activities. We evaluate new procedures or new products regularly by reading manuals, literature reviewed, supplier info, products considered



Both front line workers and management officials are involved in this process: Required and refresher training.

Christopher Schmidt will ensure effective implementation of these recommendations.

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

PPE is provided to our employees at no cost to them. Training is provided by Christopher Schmidt in the use of the appropriate PPE for the tasks or procedures employees will perform.

The types of PPE available to employees are as follows: Gloves, safety glasses, and FRC’s

PPE is located in shop storage and may be obtained through Christopher Schmidt by means of letting that person know they need the required PPE.

All employees using PPE must observe the following precautions:

* Wash hands immediately or as soon as feasible after removal of gloves or other PPE. * Remove PPE after it becomes contaminated, and before leaving the work area.

* Used PPE may be disposed of in Cintas bin for cleaning and placed in proper containers for

disposal.

* Wear appropriate gloves when it can be reasonably anticipated that there may be hand

contact with blood or OPIM, and when handling or touching contaminated items or surfaces;

replace gloves if torn, punctured, contaminated, or if their ability to function as a barrier is

compromised.

* Utility gloves may be decontaminated for reuse if their integrity is not compromised; discard

utility gloves if they show signs of cracking, peeling, tearing, puncturing, or deterioration. • Never wash or decontaminate disposable gloves for reuse.

• Wear appropriate face and eye protection when splashes, sprays, spatters, or droplets of

blood or OPIM pose a hazard to the eye, nose, or mouth. • Remove immediately or as soon as feasible any garment contaminated by blood or OPIM, in

such a way as to avoid contact with the outer surface.

The procedure for handling used PPE is as follows: Reusable PPE will be disinfected and disposable PPE will be placed in a proper waste container

Housekeeping

Regulated waste is placed in containers which are closable, constructed to contain all contents and prevent leakage, appropriately labeled or color-coded (see Labels), and closed prior to removal to prevent spillage or protrusion of contents during handling.

The procedure for handling sharps disposal containers is: All sharps will be placed in the

approved container and picked up by a medical waste disposal company.



The procedure for handling other regulated waste is: All waste is to be place in proper waste containers and will be incinerated or picked up by a proper disposal company.

Contaminated sharps are discarded immediately or as soon as possible in containers that are closable, puncture-resistant, leak proof on sides and bottoms, and labeled or color-coded appropriately. Sharps disposal containers are avai lable on the shop floor.

Bins and pails (e.g., wash or emesis basins) are cleaned and decontaminated as soon as

feasible after visible contamination.

Broken glassware which may be contaminated is picked up using mechanical means, such as a brush and dust pan.

Laundry

The following contaminated articles will be laundered by this company: Cintas Laundering will be performed by Cintas who will pickup clothes on Monday before 1PM at the shop.

* Handle contaminated laundry as little as possible, with minimal agitation

* Place wet contaminated laundry in leak-proof, labeled or color-coded containers

before transport. Use red bags marked with biohazard symbol for this purpose. * wear the following PPE when handling and/or sorting contaminated laundry: Nitrile

gloves, respirator, and eye protection

Labels

Christopher Schmidt will ensure warning labels are affixed or red bags are used as required if regulated waste or contaminated equipment is brought into the facility. Employees are to notify Christopher Schmidt if they discover regulated waste

containers, refrigerators containing blood or OPIM, contaminated equipment, etc. without proper labels.

HEPATITIS B VACCINATION Christopher Schmidt will provide training to employees on hepatitis B vaccinations, addressing the safety, benefits, efficacy, methods of administration, and availability.

The hepatitis B vaccination series is available at no cost after training and within 10 days of initial assignment to employees identified in the exposure determination section of this plan. Vaccination is encouraged unless: 1) documentation exists that the employee has previously received the series, 2) antibody testing reveals that the employee is immune, or 3) medical evaluation shows that vaccination is contraindicated.



However, if an employee chooses to decline vaccination, the employee must sign a declination form. Employees who decline may request and obtain the vaccination at a later date at no cost. Documentation of refusal of the vaccination is kept at WC Welding Services/WP Resources main office. Vaccination will be provided by a qualified physician at Wayne Memorial Hospital.

Following the medical evaluation, a copy of the health care professional's Written Opinion will be obtained and provided to the employee. It will be limited to whether the employee requires the hepatitis vaccine, and whether the vaccine was administered.

POST-EXPOSURE EVALUATION AND FOLLOW-UP

Should an exposure incident occur, contact Christopher Schmidt at the following number: (570)-677-7848

An immediately available confidential medical evaluation and follow-up will be conducted by qualified physician at Wayne Memorial Hospital. Following the initial first aid (clean the wound, flush eyes or other mucous membrane, etc.) the fol lowing activities will be performed.

Document the routes of exposure and how the exposure occurred.

Identify and document the source individual (unless the employer can establish that

identification is infeasible or prohibited by state or local law). Obtain consent and make arrangements to have the source individual tested as soon as

possible to determine HIV, HCV, and HBV infectivity; document that the source individual's test results were conveyed to the employee's health care provider.

If the source individual is already known to be HIV, HCV and/or HBV positive, new testing need not be performed.

• Assure that the exposed employee is provided with the source individual's test results and with information about applicable disclosure laws and regulations concerning the identity and infectious status of the source individual (e.g., laws

protecting confidentiality). • After obtaining consent, collect exposed employee's blood as soon as feasible after

exposure incident, and test blood for HBV and HIV serological status If the employee does not give consent for HIV serological testing during collection of blood for baseline testing, preserve the baseline blood sample for at least 90 days; if the exposed employee elects to have the baseline sample tested during this waiting period, perform testing as soon as feasible.

ADMINISTRATION OF POST-EXPOSURE EVALUATION AND FOLLOW-UP Christopher Schmidt ensures that health care professional(s) responsible for employee's hepatitis B vaccination and post-exposure evaluation and follow-up are given a copy of OSHA's bloodborne pathogens standard.



Christopher Schmidt ensures that the health care professional evaluating an employee after an

exposure incident receives the following:

* a description of the employee's job duties relevant to the exposure incident

* route(s) of exposure

* circumstances of exposure

* if possible, results of the source individual's blood test

* relevant employee medical records, including vaccination status

Christopher Schmidt provides the employee with a copy of the evaluating health care professional's written opinion within 15 days after completion of the evaluation.

PROCEDURES FOR EVALUATING THE CIRCUMSTANCES SURROUNDING AN EXPOSURE INCIDENT

Christopher Schmidt will review the circumstances of all exposure incidents to determine:

7) engineering controls in use at the time

8) work practices followed 9) a description of the device being used (including type and brand)

10) protective equipment or clothing that was used at the time of the exposure incident (gloves, eye shields, etc.) 11) location of the incident (O.R., E.R., patient room, etc.) 12) procedure being performed when the incident occurred

13) employee’s training

Christopher Schmidt will record all percutaneous injuries from contaminated sharps in the

Sharps Injury Log

If it is determined that revisions need to be made, Christopher Schmidt will ensure that appropriate changes are made to this ECP. (Changes may include an evaluation of safer devices, adding employees to the exposure determination list, etc.)

EMPLOYEE TRAINING All employees who have occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens receive training conducted by Christopher Schmidt the company safety coordinator. All employees who have occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens receive training on the epidemiology, symptoms, and transmission of bloodborne pathogen diseases. In addition, the training program covers, at a minimum, the following elements:

• a copy and explanation of the standard



• an explanation of our ECP and how to obtain a copy

• an explanation of methods to recognize tasks and other activities that may

involve exposure to blood and OPIM, including what constitutes an exposure

incident

• an explanation of the use and limitations of engineering controls, work practices, and PPE

• an explanation of the types, uses, location, removal, handling, decontamination, and disposal of PPE

• an explanation of the basis for PPE selection

• information on the hepatitis B vaccine, including information on its efficacy,

safety, method of administration, the benefits of being vaccinated, and that the

vaccine will be offered free of charge

• information on the appropriate actions to take and persons to contact in an emergency involving blood or OPIM

• an explanation of the procedure to follow if an exposure incident occurs,

including the method of reporting the incident and the medical follow-up that

will be made available

• information on the post-exposure evaluation and follow-up that the

employer is required to provide for the employee following an exposure

incident

• an explanation of the signs and labels and/or color coding required by the standard and used at this facility

• an opportunity for interactive questions and answers with the person conducting the training session.

Training materials for this facility are available at WC Welding Services/WP Resources main office. RECORDKEEPING

Training Records

Training records are completed for each employee upon completion of training. These documents will be kept for at least three years at WC Welding Services/WP Resources main office. The training records include:

* the dates of the training sessions

* the contents or a summary of the training sessions

* the names and qualifications of persons conducting the training

* the names and job titles of all persons attending the training

sessions

Employee training records are provided upon request to the employee or the



employee's authorized representative within 15 working days. Such requests should be addressed to Christopher Schmidt

Medical Records

Medical records are maintained for each employee with occupational exposure in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020, "Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records.” Christopher Schmidt is responsible for maintenance of the required medical records. These confidential records are kept at WC Welding Services/WP Resources main office for at least the duration of employment plus 30 years. Employee medical records are provided upon request of the employee or to anyone having

written consent of the employee within 15 working days. Such requests should be sent to

Christopher Schmidt

OSHA Recordkeeping

An exposure incident is evaluated to determine if the case meets OSHA’s Recordkeeping Requirements (29 CFR 1904). This determination and the recording activities are done by Christopher Schmidt

Sharps Injury Log

In addition to the 1904 Recordkeeping Requirements, all percutaneous injuries from contaminated sharps are also recorded in the Sharps Injury Log. All incidences must include at least: - the date of the injury - the type and brand of the device involved

- the department or work area where the incident occurred -an explanation of how the incident occurred.

This log is reviewed at least annually as part of the annual evaluation of the program and is

maintained for at least five years following the end of the calendar year that they cover. If a

copy is requested by anyone, it must have any personal identifiers removed from the report.



Facility Name:___________________________________________ 20__________

Sharps Injury Log

Date Where Incident Happened Description of Incident



HEPATITIS B VACCINE DECLINATION (MANDATORY)

I understand that due to my occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials I may be at risk of acquiring hepatitis B virus (HBV) infection. I have been given the opportunity to be vaccinated with hepatitis B vaccine, at no charge to myself. However, I decline hepatitis B vaccination at this time. I understand that by declining this vaccine, I continue to be at risk of acquiring hepatitis B, a serious disease. If in the future I continue to have occupational exposure to blood or other potentially

infectious materials and I want to be vaccinated with hepatitis B vaccine, I can receive the vaccination series at no charge to me.

Signed:__________________________________________________ Date:________________________



WC Welding Services Hand and Portable Powered Tools Program

1. Written Program. WC Welding Services will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.221 ·244, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation requires a written program for job safety, health that is endorsed and advocated by the highest level of management within this company and that outlines our goals and plans. This written program will be communicated to all required personnel. It is designed to establish clear goals. and

objectives.

2. General requirements. WC Welding Services shall be responsible for the safe condition of tools and equipment used its employees, including tools and equipment which may be furnished by employees. WC Welding Services will develop hand and powered tool operational procedures through the use of this document. After tool selection and evaluation, Tools will be used and maintained in a safe

condition. Supervisors shall ensure that the proper types of tools are utilized at each job site.

3. Tool Selection, Evaluation and Condition. The greatest hazards posed by tools usually result from misuse and or improper maintenance. Tool selection sometimes is not considered a priority when

arrangements are made to begin work. All employees will consider the following when selecting tools:

3.1 Is the tool correct for the type work to be performed?

3.2 Are guards installed properly and in good condition?

3.3 Are grounding methods sufficient when working in wet conditions?

3.4 Does the tool create sparks or heat? Has this been considered when working around

flammable substances?

3.5 Do impact tools such as chisels, wedges. or drift pins have mushroomed heads? The heads

can shatter on impact, sending sharp fragments flying I

3.6 Are wooden handled tools loose or splintered? This can result in the heads flying off and

striking the user/coworkers I

3.7 Are cutting tools sharp? Dull tools are more hazardous than sharp ones.

3.8 Is the tool used on the proper working surface? Tools used on dirty or wet working surfaces

can create a multitude of hazards.

3.9 Are tools stored properly when not being used? Saw blades, knives, scissors and like sharp

tools should be stored so that sharp edges are directed away from aisles and coworkers.

3.10 Is there sufficient clearance for tools requiring swinging motions such as hammers, axes,

picks, etc?

4. Power tool precautions. Power tools can be hazardous when improperly used, this company uses several types. These types are based on the power source they use: Electric, liquid fuel, hydraulic,



pneumatic, and powder-actuated. The following precautions will be taken by employees of this

company to prevent injury.

4.1 Power tools will always be operated within their design limitations.

4.2 Proper PPE such as eye protection, gloves and safety footwear, but not limited to, are

required during operation.

4.3 Store tools in an appropriate dry location when not in use.

4.4 Work only in well illuminated locations.

4.5 Tools will not be carried by the cord or hose.

4.6 Cords or hoses will not be yanked to disconnect it from the receptacle.

4.7 Cords and hoses will be kept away from heat, oils, and sharp edge s or any other source that

could result in damage.

4.8 Tools will be disconnected when not in use, before servicing, and when changing accessories

such as blades, bits and cutters.

4.9 Observers will be kept at a safe distance at all times from the work area.

4.10 Work will be secured with clamps or a vice where possible to free both hands to operate

tools.

4.10 To prevent accidental starting, employees should be continually aware not to hold the start

button while carrying a plugged in tool.

4.11 Tools will be maintained in a clean manner, and properly maintained in accordance with

the manufacturer’s guidelines.

4.12 Ensure that proper shoes are worn and that the work area is kept clean to maintain proper

footing and good balance.

4.13 Ensure that proper apparel is worn. Loose clothing, ties, or jewelry can become caught in moving parts.

4.14 Tools that are damaged will be removed from service immediately and tagged "Do Not

Use". They will be reported and turned over to Project Manager for repair or replacement.

4.15 Cracked saws. All cracked saws will be removed from service.

4.16 Grounding. Portable electric powered tools shall meet the electrical requirements of the

company Electrical Safety-Related Work Practices Program, and 29 CFR 1910.331 - 335.

4.17 Compressed air used for cleaning. Compressed air shall not be used for cleaning purposes except where reduced to less than 30 p.s.i. and then only with effective chip guarding and

personal protective equipment.



5. Methods of guarding. One or more methods of guarding shall be provided where required to protect the operator and other employees in the area from hazards such as those created by paint of operation, in running nip points, rotating parts, flying chips and sparks. Examples of guarding methods are; b arrier guards, two-hand tripping devices, electronic safety devices, etc. The guard shall be such that it does not

offer an accident hazard in itself. Employee's will:

5.1 Inspect tools without guards for signs of guard removal. If it is evident that a guard is required Tag-out the tool and obtain a replacement. Tools will not be energized during

inspection.

5.2 Inspect tools having guards for proper operation and maintenance prior to use. Tools will

not be energized during inspection.

5.3 Never remove a guard during use.

6. Portable circular saws. All portable, power-driven circular saws having a blade diameter greater than 2 in. will be equipped with guards above and below the base plate or shoe. The upper guard shall cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, except for the minimum arc required to permit the base to be tilted for bevel cuts. (Does not apply to circular saws used in the meat industry for meat cutting purposes). For

authorized use the following conditions must be met.

6.1 An upper guard must cover the entire blade of the saw.

6.2 A retractable lower guard must cover the teeth of the saw.

6.3 Except when it makes contact with the work material, the lower guard must automatically

return to the covering position when the tool is withdrawn from the work.

7. Powered abrasive wheel tools. Abrasive wheels shall be used only on tools/equipment provided with

safety guards.

7.1 Exceptions. These requirements do not apply to the following classes of wheels and

conditions:

7.2 Wheels used for internal work while within the work being ground.

7.3 Mounted wheels used in portable operations 2 inches and smaller in diameter.

7.4 Types 16, 17, 18, 18R, and 19 cones, and plugs, and threaded hole pot balls where the work

offers protection.

7.5 Guard covers. Employees will ensure that a safety guard covers the spindle end, nut and flange projections. The safety guard shall be mounted so as to maintain proper alignment with the wheel, and the strength of the fastenings shall exceed the strength of the guard.

7.5.1 Exception. Safety guards on all operations where the work provides a suitable measure of protection to the operator may be so constructed that the spindle end, nut and outer flange are exposed. Where the nature of the work is such as to entirely cover

the side of the wheel, the side covers of the guard may be omitted.



7.5.2 Exception. The spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be exposed on portable machines designed for, and used with, type 6, 11, 27, and 28 abrasive wheels, cutting

off wheels, and tuck pointing wheels.

7.6 Cup wheels. Cup wheels (Types 6 and 11) shall be protected by:

7.6.1 Safety guards as specified.

7.6.2 Special "revolving cup guards" which mount behind the wheel and turn with it. They shall be made of steel or other material with adequate strength and shall enclose the wheel sides upward from the back for one third of the wheel thickness. The mounting features shall conform with all regulations. It is necessary to maintain clearance between the wheel side and the guard. The clearance shall not exceed one-

sixteenth.

7.7 General safety precautions.

7.7.1 Before being mounted it should be inspected closely and sound- or ring- tested to be sure that it is free from cracks or defects. To test, wheels should be tapped gently with a light non-metallic instrument. If they sound cracked or dead they could fly apart in operation and so must not be used. A sound and undamaged wheel will give a clear

metallic tone or ring.

7.7.2 Employees will not locate themselves directly in front of the wheel as it

accelerates to full operating speed.

7.7.3 Employees will always use eye protection.

7.7.4 Power will be turned off when not in use.

7.7.5 Hand held grinders are never placed in vises.

7.7.6 Mounting and inspection of abrasive wheels.

7.7.6.1 Immediately before mounting, all wheels shall be closely inspected and sounded by the user using the ring test to make sure they have not been damaged in transit, storage, or otherwise. The spindle speed of the machine shall be checked before mounting of the wheel to be certain that it does not exceed the maximum operating

speed marked on the wheel.

7.7.6.2 Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and remain free under all grinding conditions. A controlled clearance between the wheel hole and the machine spindle (or wheel sleeves or adaptors) is essential to avoid excessive pressure from mounting and spindle expansion. To accomplish this, the machine spindle shall be made to nominal (standard) size plus zero minus .002 inch, and the wheel hole shall be made suitably

oversize to assure safety clearance under the conditions of operating heat and pressure.

7.7.6.3 All contact surfaces of wheels, blotters, and flangers shall be flat and free of

foreign matter.



7.7.6.4 When a bushing is used in the wheel hole it shall not exceed the width of the

wheel and shall not contact the flanges.

7.7.6.5 Excluded machinery. Natural sandstone wheels and metal, wooden, cloth, or paper discs, having a layer of abrasive on the surface are not covered by these

requirements.

8. Vertical portable grinders. Supervisors will ensure all employees are thoroughly familiar with, and use strict work practices in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Safety guards used on machines known as right angle head or vertical portable grinders shall have a maximum exposure angle of 180, and the guard shall be so located so as to be between the operator and the wheel during use. Adjustment of guard shall be such that pieces of an accidentally broken wheel will be deflected away

from the operator. (See 29 CFR 1910.243, Figure P-4.)

8.1 Other portable grinders. The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on other portable grinding machines shall not exceed 180 and

the top half of the wheel shall be enclosed at all times.

8.2 Bench Grinders. The upper peripheral guard (tongue guard) will be adjusted downward to within 1/4 inch of the wheel and the tool rest kept adjusted closely to the wheel with a

maximum clearance of 1/8 inch (29 CFR 1910.215).

9. Portable belt sanding machines. Supervisors will ensure that all belt sanding machines used by their personnel be provided with guards at each nip point where the sanding belt runs onto a pulley. These guards will effectively prevent the hands or fingers of the operator from coming in contact with the nip

points. The unused run of the sanding belt shall be guarded against accidental contact.

10. Pneumatic powered tools and hoses. Supervisors will ensure all employees are thoroughly familiar with, and use strict work practices in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Prior to use the

following requirements will be complied with.

10.1 Tool retainer. A tool retainer will be installed on each piece of utilization equipment which,

without such a retainer, may eject the tool.

10.2 Airhoses. Hose and hose connections used for conducting compressed air to utilization

equipment will be compatible with the pressure and service to which they are subjected.

11. Explosive actuated fastening tools.

11.1 General safety precautions: Supervisors will ensure all employees are thoroughly familiar with, and use strict work practices in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

11 .1.1 Operators and assistants using tools shall be safeguarded by wearing eye

protection.

11.1.2 Head and face protection shall be used, as required by working conditions.

11.1.3 Before using a tool, the employee will inspect it to determine to his satisfaction that it is clean, that all moving parts operate freely, and that the barrel is free from

obstructions.



11.1.4 When a tool develops a defect during use, the operator shall immediately cease

to use it, until it is properly repaired.

11.1.4.1 Tools will not be loaded until just prior to the intended firing time. Neither

loaded nor empty tools are to be pointed at any workmen.

11.1.4.2 No tools shall be loaded unless being prepared for immediate use, nor shall an

unattended tool be left loaded.

11.1.4.3 Misfire instructions (general). (1) Know the manufacturer’s instructions. (2) Hold the tool in the operating position for at least 30 seconds. (3) Try to operate the tool a second time. (4) Wait another 30 seconds, holding the tool in the operating position; then proceed to remove the explosive load in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

11.1.4.4 A tool will never be left unattended in a place where it would be available to

unauthorized persons.

11.1.4.5 Fasteners will not be driven into very hard or brittle materials including, but not limited to, cast iron, glazed tile, surface hardened steel, glass block, live rock, face brick,

or hollow tile.

11.1.4.6 Driving into materials easily penetrated will be avoided unless such materials are backed by a substance that will prevent the pin or fastener from passing completely

through and creating a flying-missile hazard on the other side.

11.1.4.7 Fasteners will not be driven directly into materials such as brick or concrete closer than 3 inches from the unsupported edge or corner, or into steel surfaces closer than one-half inch from the unsupported edge or corner, unless a special guard, fixture, or jig is used. (Exception: Low-velocity tools may drive no closer than 2 inches from an

edge in concrete or one-fourth inch in steel.)

11 .1.4.8 When fastening other materials, such as a 2X4 inch wood section to a concrete surface, it is permissible to drive a fastener of no greater than 7/32 inch shank diameter

not closer than 2 inches from the unsupported edge or corner of the work surface.

11.1.4.9 Fasteners will not be driven through existing holes unless a positive guide is

used to secure accurate alignment.

11.1.4.10 No fastener will be driven into a spa lied area caused by an unsatisfactory

fastening.

11.1.4.11 Tools will not be used in an explosive or flammable atmosphere.

11.1.4.12 All tools will be used with the correct shield, guard, or attachment

recommended by the manufacturer.



11.1.4.13Any tool found not in proper working order will be immediately removed from service and turned over to Project Manager. The tool will be inspected at regular

intervals and shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.

11.1.5 High-velocity tools. Only tools meeting the design specifications of 29 CFR 1910.243 will be used by this company. Employees contemplating purchase of high-velocity tools will consult the OSHA standard before final tool selection. The

manufacturer’s inspection criteria will be followed for pre -use inspection.

11.1.6 low-velocity tools. Only tools meeting the design specifications of 29 CFR 1910.243 will be used by this company. Employees contemplating purchase of low velocity tools will consult the OSHA standard before final tool selection. The

manufacturer’s inspection criteria will be followed for pre -use inspection.

11.1.7 low-velocity piston type tools. Only tools meeting the design specifications of 29 CFR 1910.243 will be used by this company. Employees contemplating purchase of low-velocity piston type tools will consult the OSHA standard before final tool selection. The

manufacturer’s inspection criteria will be followed for pre-use inspection.

12. Power lawnmowers. Supervisors will ensure all employees are thoroughly familiar with, and use

strict work practices in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

General requirements.

12.1 Power lawnmowers used by this company will have power-driven chains, belts, and gears so positioned or otherwise guarded to prevent the operator's accidental contact therewith,

during normal starting, mounting, and operation of the machine.

12.2 A shutoff device will be provided to stop operation of the motor or engine. This device will

require manual and intentional reactivation to restart the motor or engine.

12.3 All positions of the operating controls will be clearly identified.

12.4 The words, "Caution. Be sure the operating control(s) is in neutral before starting the engine," or similar wording shall be clearly visible at an engine starting control point on self -propelled mowers.

12.5 The mower blade will be enclosed except on the bottom and the enclosure shall extend to

or below the lowest cutting point of the blade in the lowest blade position.

12.5.1 Guards which must be removed to install a catcher assembly will be affixed to the mower near the opening stating that the mower will not be used without either the

catcher assembly or the guard in place.

12.5.2 The word "Caution." or stronger wording, will be placed on the mower at or near

each discharge opening.

12.5.3 Proper precautions will be taken when refueling mowing equipment.

12.5.4 Mowing equipment will never be left unattended while running.



12.5.5 Will constantly be mindful of persons working near the operation of the mower.

13. Jacks.

13.1 The operator will make sure that the jack used has a rating sufficient to lift and sustain the

load.

13.2 The rated load will be legibly and permanently marked in a prominent location on the jack

by casting, stamping, or other suitable means.

13.3 In the absence of a firm foundation, the base of the jack will be blocked. If there is a

possibility of slippage of the cap, a block shall be placed in between the cap and the load.

13.4 The operator will watch the stop indicator, which shall be kept clean, in order to determine

the limit of travel. The indicated limit will never be overrun.

13.5 After the load has been raised, it will be cribbed, blocked, or otherwise secured at once.

13.6 Hydraulic jacks exposed to freezing temperatures shall be supplied with an adequate

antifreeze liquid.

13.7 All jacks shall be properly lubricated at regular intervals.

13.8 Inspections. Each jack will be thoroughly inspected at times which depend upon the service

conditions. Inspections will be not less frequent than the following:

13.8.1 For constant or intermittent use at one locality, once every 6 months.

13.8.2 For jacks sent out of shop for special work, when sent out and when returned.

13.8.3 For a jack subjected to abnormal load or shock, immediately before and

immediately thereafter.

13.9 Repair or replacement shall be examined for possible defects before instal lation.

13.10 Jacks which are out of order will be tagged-out accordingly, reported to ________ , and

will not be used until repairs are made.

14. Handheld Cutting Tools and Knives. Employees utilizing knives and other cutting implements shall receive demonstrations relating to proper care, the types of implements associated with their individual work duties, and proper sharpening of cutting implements, including knives and scissors. Job specific training for employees who use handheld cutting tools and knives in the regular conduct of duties will be conducted. The training will involve demonstrations and a reasonable amount of time to practice

proper work techniques prior to employees being required to work at full capacity. '

14.1 Classroom training. Each employee will receive training on the following subjects:

• Cutting techniques;

• Knife care and maintenance;

• Proper knife sharpening techniques;



• Hazards of improper knife handling;

• Types of knives associated with individual work duties;

• Maintaining sharp cutting edges on knives and other cutting implements.

14.1.1 Safe Cutting techniques include:

• Match the type of knife to the task;

• Keep blades well sharpened;

• Always cut away from your body;

• Use knives with textured grips to reduce slippage;

• Use handles that distribute the pressure over the fleshy part of the palm;

• Use a retractable knife blade when possible;

• Never use a knife as a screwdriver;

• Never work on the same object with a co-worker who is using a knife;

• Never store open knives in drawers;

• Always store knives separately from other tools, with blades turned down;

• Never leave a knife lying around;

• Ensure belt sheaths are over the hip with blade facing to back;

• Ensure gloves allow the ability to "feel" knives;

• Never exert high pressure while using a knife (obtain a better knife);

14.2 On-the-job training. Following the classroom training, employees shall be assigned to work with a qualified co-employee who can provide on-the-job training. This on-the-job training will

be monitored by the program manager and the departmental supervisor at regular intervals.

14.3 Employee conditioning. In those jobs where handheld cutting tools or knives are identified as having the potential for development of Cumulative Trauma Disorders (CTD), new or reassigned employees to those jobs shall be given the opportunity to condition

muscle/tendon/nerve groups.

15. Switches and controls. Employees will determine the following before using a hand-held power tool.

15.1 Circular saws, chain saws and percussion tools. All hand-held powered circular saws having a blade diameter greater than 2 inches, electric, hydraulic or pneumatic chain saws, and percussion tools without positive accessory holding means shall be equipped with a constant pressure switch or control that will shut off the power when the pressure is released. All hand -



held gasoline powered chain saws shall be equipped with a constant pressure throttle control

that will shut off the power to the saw chain when the pressure is re leased.

15.2 All hand-held powered drills, tappers, fastener drivers, horizontal, vertical, and angle grinders with wheels greater than 2 inches in diameter, disc sanders with discs greater than 2 inches in diameter, belt sanders, reciprocating saws, saber, scroll, and jig saws with blade shanks greater than a nominal one-fourth inch, and other similarly operating powered tools shall be equipped with a constant pressure switch or control, and may have a lock-on control provided

that turnoff can be accomplished by a single motion of the same finger or fingers that turn it on.

15.3 Other hand-held powered tools.

15.3.1 All other hand-held powered tools, such as, but not limited to, platen sanders, grinders with wheels 2 inches in diameter or less, disc sanders with discs 2 inches in diameter or less, routers, planers, laminate trimmers, nibblers, shears, saber, scroll, and jig saws with blade shanks a nominal one-fourth of an inch wide or less, will be equipped with either a positive "on-off' control, or other controls as described by paragraphs 7.1,

and 7.2 of this SPI.

15.3.2 Saber, scroll, and jig saws with nonstandard blade holders may use blades with shanks which are non-uniform in width, provided the narrowest portion of the blade

shank is an integral part in mounting the blade.

15.3.3 Blade shank width shall be measured at the narrowest portion of the blade shank when saber, scroll, and jig saws have nonstandard blade holders. OSHA defines nominal

in this subparagraph as ± 0.05 inch.

15.3.4 Equipment used by this company will have the operating control on hand-held power tools located so as to minimize the possibility of its accidental operation, if such

accidental operation would constitute a hazard to employees.

15.3.5 Applicability. Section 14.3 of this SPI does not apply to concrete vibrators, concrete breakers, powered tampers, jack hammers, rock drills, garden appliances, household and kitchen appliances, personal care appliances, medical or dental

equipment, or to fixed machinery.

16. Initial training. Training shall be conducted prior to job assignment. This employer shall provide training to ensure that the purpose, function, and proper use of tools to be used in the normal function of their jobs is understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, and usage is acquired by employees. This standard practice instruction shall be provided to,

and read by all employees receiving training. The training shall include, as a minimum the following:

16.1 Types of tools appropriate for use.

16.2 Recognition of applicable hazards associated with the work to be completed.

16.3 Tool determination and additional requirements.

16.4 Procedures for removal of a tool from service.



16.5 All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where tools which could present a hazard to other than the user, will be instructed to an awareness level

concerning hazards.

16.6 Tools identification. Tools having identification numbers will be checked for legibility.


training.

17. Refresher training. This standard practice instruction shall be provided to, and read by all employees receiving refresher training. The training content shall be identical to initial training. Refresher training will be conducted on an annual basis or when the following conditions are met, which ever event occurs

sooner.

17.1 Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever (and prior to) there being a change in their job assignments, a change in the type of tools used, or when a

known hazard is added to the work environment.

17.2 Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in

the employee's knowledge or use of tools.

17.3 The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised



training.

18. Definitions.

Explosive-actuated fastening tool terms

(1) Hammer-operated piston tool-Iow-velocity type. A tool which, by means of a heavy mass hammer supplemented by a load, moves a piston designed to be captive to drive a stud, pin, or fastener into a work surface, always starting the fastener at rest and in contact with the work surface. (2) High-velocity tool. A tool or machine which, when used with a load, propels or discharges a stud, pin, or fastener, at velocities in excess of 300 feet per second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the barrel, for the purpose of impinging it upon, affixing it to, or penetrating another object or material. (3) Low-velocity piston tool. A tool that utilizes a piston designed to be captive to drive a stud, pin, or fastener into a work surface. It will not cause such stud, pin, or fastener to have a mean velocity in excess of 300 feet per second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the barrel. (4) Stud, pin, or fastener. A fastening device specifically designed and manufactured for use in explosive-actuated fastening tools. (5) To chamber. To fit properly without the use of excess force, the case being duly supported.



(6) Explosive powerload, also knlown as load. Any substance in any form capable of producing a propellant force. (7) Tool. An explosive-actuated fastening tool, unless otherwise indicated, and all accessories pertaining thereto. (8) Protective shield or guard. A device or guard attached to the muzzle end of the tool, which is designed to confine flying particles.

Abrasive wheel terms

(1) Mounted wheels. Mounted wheels, usually 2 inch diameter or smaller, and of various shapes, may be either organic or inorganic bonded abrasive wheels. They are secured to plain or threaded steel mandrels. (2) Tuck pointing. Removal, by grinding, of cement, mortar, or other nonmetallic jointing material. (3) Tuck pointing wheels. Tuck pointing wheels, usually Type 1, reinforced organic bonded wheels have diameter, thickness and hole size dimension. They are subject to the same limitations of use and mounting as Type 1 wheels. Limitation: Wheels used for tuck pointing should be reinforced, organic bonded. (4) Portable grinding. A grinding operation where the grinding machine is designed to be hand held and may be easily moved from one location to another. (5) Organic bonded wheels. Organic wheels are wheels which are bonded by means of an organic material such as resin, rubber, shellac, or other similar bonding agent. (6) Safety guard. A safety guard is an enclosure designed to restrain the pieces of the grinding wheel and furnish all possible protection in the event that the wheel is broken in operation. (7) Reinforced wheels. The term reinforced as applied to grinding wheels shall define a class of organic wheels which contain strengthening fabric or filament. The term reinforced does not cover wheels using such mechanical additions as steel rings, steel cup backs or wire or tape winding. (8) Type 11 flaring cup wheels. Type 11 flaring cup wheels have double diameter dimensions 0 and J, and in addition have thickness, hole size, rim and back thickness dimensions. Grinding is always performed on rim face, W dimension. Type 11 wheels are subject to all limitations of use and mounting listed for Type 6 straight sided cup wheels definition. (9) Type 6 straight cup wheels. Type 6 cup wheels have diameter, thickness, hole size, rim thickness, and back thickness dimensions. Grinding is always performed on rim face, W dimension. Limitation: Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less than one -fourth T dimension. In addition, when unthreaded hole wheels are specified, the inside flat, K dimension, must be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange. (10) Type 1 straight wheels. Type 1 straight wheels have diameter, thickness, and hole size dimensions and should be used only on the periphery. Type 1 wheels shall be mounted between flanges. Limitation: Hole dimension (H) should not be greater than two-thirds of wheel diameter dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical, centerless, or surface grinding applications. Maxi mum hole size for all other applications should not exceed one-half wheel diameter. Jack terms

Jack Terms

(1) Jack. A jack is an appliance for lifting and lowering or moving horizontally a load by

application of a pushing force.



Note: Jacks may be of the following types: Lever and ratchet, screw and hydraulic.

(2) Rating. The rating of a jack is the maximum working load for which it is designed to lift safely

that load throughout its specified amount of travel.

Note: To raise the rated road of a jack, the point of application of the toad, the applied force, and the length of lever arm should be those designated by the manufacturer for the particular

jack considered,



WC Welding Services Inc. Mobile Equipment

1. Purpose: The purpose of the Mobile Equipment is to educate all WC WELDING employees on the methods used to safely operate equipment both onshore and offshore. 2. Policy: It is WC WELDING’s policy that only trained competent personnel will operate equi pment. These personnel must be qualified/certified by one of the following:

1. Certification by an accredited crane operator testing organization. 2. Qualification by an audited employer program. 3. Qualification by the U.S. Military 4. Licensing by a government entity. 5. On-the-job training

3. Procedures:

All manufacturers’ procedures associated with the operational function of the crane and attachments must be complied with.

All equipment used will follow manufacturer’s specified limitations, if these specifications are unavailable than a professional engineer may calculate the limitations.

No unauthorized personnel shall be permitted to ride on equipment unless specifically made for that reason.

These calculations must be documented, posted on all equipment, and easily visible to the operator while sitting at control station.

Equipment shall be equipped with properly functioning reverse alarms.

Eye protection is required if equipment does not have an enclosed cab.

Seat belts shall be worn at all times if equipped.

Equipment shall only be used for its intended use and shall not exceed its manufacturers rating.

The equipment shall not be loaded beyond its established load limit and shall be secured for transport.

These calculations must include: rated load capacities, and recommended operating speeds.

The hazardous area included in the crane’s swing radius must be marked with warning lines, railings, or some other similar type of protective warning barrier.

Any alteration to equipment or lifting machinery which may potentially affect safe operation is strictly prohibited unless the manufacturer provides a written endorsement or a certified profession engineer provides written consent that the safety factor has not been reduced to an unsafe level.

The use of a crane or derrick to hoist employees on a personal platform is prohibited, except when the erection, use, and dismantling of conventional means of reaching the work site is more hazardous.

Cranes or derricks used to lift personnel must be equipped with an “anti -two-blocking” device



per OSHA 29 CFR 1926.550.

The supervisor must be notified to conduct JSA to review procedures prior to personnel lifts.

When working with cranes, employees must face the crane and stand away from the lift in full view of operator and/or signalman.

All lifts, rigging, and slings must be inspected, be maintained in good working condition, and be properly rated for the intended load. Cranes must be load-marked per OSHA 29 CFR 1910.179.

Prior to use or prior to each shift (whichever comes first), all crane machinery, apparatus, and appliances (including ropes, chains, slings, control mechanisms, pressurized lines, hooks and latches, wire rope, electrical apparatus, tires (when used) and ground conditions ) must be inspected by a competent person, as indicated in the company’s HSE policy.

Crane and equipment inspection records will be completed monthly by a competent person and will be documented and maintained for at least 3 months and must include:

o Items checked, o Results of inspection o Name and signature of the inspector

Operators will have access to a 5BC rated fire extinguisher in cab or operator station of equipment.

The crane operator has the ability to stop work or refuse any load at any time if there is a safety concern.

Prior to beginning a job, a risk assessment must be conducted to clearly define the work zone. o This work zone will be defined with boundaries and flags if necessary, and will

encompass a full 360degree area around the maximum working radius. o Also this Hazard Assessment will ensure that all equipment is kept at a minimum of 20’

clearance from power lines.

Should any part of the crane, load, or load l ine be closer than this 20’ minimum then at least 1 of the following 3 safety tasks must be completed to ensure safe operations:

o Ensure power lines have been de-energized and visibly grounded. o Ensure equipment, load, or load line breaks the 20’ minimum barrier to the power line o Determine lines voltage and minimum approach distance from Table A below.

Voltage (kV)

Distance (ft)

0 - 0.75 4

.75 -50 6

50 - 345 10

345 - 750 16

750 - 1,000 20

>1,000 Per Utility Co.

A minimum 20’ clearance is required between any part of the crane or load and any lines rated at 50kV

Any alteration to equipment or lifting machinery which may potentially affect safe operation is strictly prohibited unless the manufacturer provides a written endorsement.



Onshore ground conditions must be inspected and should be firm, drained and graded to provide sufficient support for the crane and supporting materials.

During assembly/disassembly manufacturer’s procedures must be followed.

Only trained, competent personnel will operate cranes, and a trained/competent supervisor will be present during the assembly/disassembly of crane or other related equipment.

All equipment shall be shut off before fueling begins 4. Suspended Loads:

A safe distance must be maintained when a load is suspended in the air. Employees must not go between the load and the other object where they may be trapped or

crushed.

Non-conducting taglines must be used to control a suspended load. 5. Procedures for Using Taglines:

Taglines must be attached before a load is lifted.

Taglines will be used to control all suspended loads.

If taglines are impractical during final positioning of the load, caution must be taken to ensure that no part of the person’s body guiding the load is between the load and any stationary object.

Hand-held taglines must be constructed of a non-conductive material such as a ½” rope or a 1” nylon strap. Chains or steel cables are not acceptable.

No attempt to guide a load will be made with the tagline wrapped around a hand or waist.

A tagline with a knot in the end will not be used. A tagline must be of sufficient length so that no part of the person guiding the load will under

any load at any time.

The person holding the tagline must never be positioned between a suspended load and a stationary object.

When hoisting a load with a winch truck, a snub line from the load to the truck may be used in lieu of a hand tagline. However, in such cases, a swamper (flagman) must be used.

6. Inspection:

The on-site safety representative shall inspect all equipment and machinery prior to use, during use, and post use to insure that the items are safe to continue operating with.

Any findings will be immediately repaired or tagged defective and removed from location prior to operations resuming.

Safety devices must be installed on all equipment, and in working order. These devices include but are not limited to:

Crane level indicator, Boom stops,

Jib stops,

Foot pedal brake locks, Horns

An annual inspection of any hoisting machinery shall be completed by a “competent person”



and the employer shall keep on file the inspection report for each piece of machinery or equipment.

If the crane or derrick motor is for some reason enclosed, then daily tests will be performed and recorded to insure that no toxic/hazardous gases are present in the atmosphere.

7. Operating Certificate (Offshore):

An operating certificate is required on offshore platforms. Only those personnel who are certified crane operators will be authorized to operate the cranes on offshore platforms.

8. Signal Man:

Always use a designated signal person to move and spot loads. o Must use proper hand signals (per ANSI standard for the type of crane in use)

Note the term person (singular), use only one signal person!



WC Welding Services Inc. Crane Safety Program

1. Written Program:

WC Welding Services, Inc. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to regulatory standards that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace. regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and

objectives.

2. General Requirements. WC Welding Services, Inc. will establish crane safety operational procedures through the use of this document. This standard practice instruction applies to cranes used in conjunction with other material handling equipment for the movement of material. The types of cranes

covered are:

2.1 Draught ______________________ 2.2 Draught______________________ 2.3 _____________________________ 2.4 _____________________________ 2.5 _____________________________

3. Initial Training:

Training shall be conducted prior to job assignment. This employer shall provide training to ensure that the purpose, function, and proper use of cranes is understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, and usage is acquired by employees. This standard practice instruction shall be provided to, and read by all employees receiving training. The training shall include,

as a minimum the following:

3.1 Preoperational inspection requirements of the crane to be used.

3.2 Specific operational requirements of the crane to be used.

3.3 Principals of crane operations.

3.4 Recognition of applicable hazards associated with the work to be completed.

3.5 Load determination and balancing requirements.

3.6 Procedures for removal of a crane from service.

3.7 All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where cranes may be

utilized, shall be instructed to an awareness level concerning hazards associated with cranes.

3.8 Physical and mental requirements of operators. Crane operators will be screened for physical and mental impairments that could result in a improperuse. Operators will me et as a

minimum, the following requirements before being certified to operate cranes.



• Be drug and alcohol free during any lifting event. • Be thoroughly trained in all facets of the required lift. • Have a mature and safe attitude at all times. • Have good depth perception (essential for load spotting). • Have good hearing and vision (corrected or uncorrected). • Have no history of unsafe acts in the workplace. • Have the ability to react quickly in an emergency. • Take no medication that will interfere with the operation. • Understand the requirements for all phases of the lift. 3.8 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain each employee's name and dates of

training.

3.9 Crane trainers. The following employees or position titles will receive training and as

required, serve as crane trainers. Qualified trainers will consist of

4. Refresher Training:

This standard practice instruction shall be provided to, and read by all employees receiving refresher training. The training content shall be identical to initial training. Refresher training will be conducted on

an annual basis or when the following conditions are met whichever event occurs sooner.

4.1 Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever (and prior to) there being a change in their job assignments, a change in the type of crane used, equipment being lifted, lifting procedures, or when a known hazard is added to the lifting environment.

4.2 Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of crane procedures.

4.3 The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised methods

and procedures, as necessary.


training.

5. Safe Operating Practices for Operators:

Whenever any crane is used, the following safe practices (as a minimum) shall be observed:

1. Always check warning devices and signals before use. 2. Always document and maintain inspection records. 3. Always ensure cranes shall not be loaded in excess of their rated capacities. 4. Always ensure the new location support the weight? 5. Always keep employees clear of loads about to be lifted and suspended loads. 6. Always keep suspended loads clear of all obstructions. 7. Always lockout before maintenance or repairing cranes. 8. Always position the hook directly over the load before lifting.



9. Always test brakes by a short lift to ensure control. 10. Before being lifted, loads will be checked for proper balance. 11. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations. 12. Frequently inspect cranes exposed to adverse conditions. 13. Hands must not be placed between the suspension means and the load during lifting. 14. Know where you're going to set the load down! 15. Know your travel path in advance of the lift 16. Loads will in all cases be properly balanced to prevent slippage. 17. Move loads only after being signaled by the designated, qualified signaler. 18. Never allow riders on loads or hooks. 19. Never allow unauthorized persons to operate cranes. 20. Never attempt to operate a crane or hoist that is suspected to be unsafe. 21. Never carry loads over workers. 22. Never carry loads past workers (they must yield right of way). 23. Never use a cranes that are damaged or defective in any way. 24. Operators must watch the signalers. 25. Shock loading is prohibited. 26. Signalers must keep line-of-sight with the operator. 27. Signalers must watch the load. 28. Test all hoist controls and brakes at the beginning of each shift.

6. Safe Operating Practices for Signalers:

Whenever any crane is used, the following safe practices (as a minimum) shall be observed:

1. Ensure that only one person is the designated signaler and certified. 2. Ensure the operator acknowledges every signal. 3. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Know the new location will support the weight. 5. Maintain line-of-sight with the operator. 6. Operators must watch the signalers. 7. Plan in advance where the load is going. 8. Stop the operation any time comprehension is lost.

7. Leaving or Parking Hoists or Cranes:

Whenever leaving or parking hoists or cranes, the following safe practices (as a minimum) shall be

observed:

1. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Make a visual check for any dangerous condition. 3. Place all controls in the "off" position. 4. Place main power switch in the "off' position. 5. Raise all hooks to - but not through - limit switches. 6. Report all cranes that are not in operation immediately. 7. Report any defects immediately. 8. Tag out defective equipment immediately.



8. Handling Sling Loads: The following general safe practices (as a minimum) shall be observed when handling slung loads:

1. Always keep hands and fingers clear of untensioned loads. 2. Always keep suspended loads clear of all obstructions. 3. Always keep suspended loads clear of employees. 4. Always pad or protect slings from sharp edges of the load. 5. Always think before you affect a load. 6. Determine the history of the care and usage of the sling. 7. Determine the number of Sling legs (if used) and load requirements. 8. Ensure you know rated capacity of the sling. 9. Ensure you know the angle the sling makes with the horizontal line. 10. Ensure you know the size, weight, and center of gravity of the load. 11. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations. 12. Never load in excess of the rated capacity. 13. Never pull a Sling from a suspended load under tension. 14. Never shorten with knots, bolts or other makeshift devices. 15. Never use a sling that is damaged in any way.

9. Estimating the Weight of Loads:

Lifting will not be conducted until load weights have been determined. When estimating load weights operators will stay within 75% of the cranes rated capacity. When estimating loads (or manufacturer recommendation) Never attempt a load lift based solely on a guess. The following methods may be used

to estimate the weight of loads.

1. Check equipment nomenclature plates. 2. Check shipping papers. 3. Consult with the equipment manufacturer. 4. Estimate weight using weights of similar loads. 5. Use a dynamometer. 6. Use industry standard tables or charts.

10. Personal Protective Equipment:

Supervisor will ensure that a Job Hazard Analysis is conducted for specific lifting operations. Operators will use the required PPE in the conduct of lifting operations. Protective clothing and equipment

considerations:

1. Ensure PPE is appropriate for the particular hazard(s). 2. Ensure PPE is kept clean, fully functional, and sanitary. 3. Maintained all PPE in good condition. 4. Properly store PPE when not in use.

11. Crane Inspections:



Where not otherwise delineated, crane inspections will be conducted in accordance with this section.

11.1 Crane inspectors. The following employees or position titles will receive training and as

required, serve as crane inspectors. Company qualified inspectors will consist of the following:

Crane Inspectors

Program Manager

Safety Officer

First Line Supervisor

11.2 Inspection intervals.

11.2.1 Daily inspections. Cranes will be inspected each day before being used, the crane will inspected in accordance with OSHA, Consensus Standards, and

Manufacturer recommendations.

11.2.2 Periodic inspections. Supervisors will determine and schedule additional inspections periodically during crane use, where service conditions warrant. A thorough periodic inspection shall be made on a regular basis, to be determined on the basis of, frequency of crane use; severity of service conditions; nature of lifts being made; experience gained on the service life of cranes used in similar circumstances, and OSHA, Consensus Standards, and Manufacturer

recommendations.

11.2.3 Scheduled inspections. The Project Manager will coordinate inspection dates and times with all assigned crane inspectors. The inspections will be conducted on a regular basis. Such inspections shall in no event be at intervals greater than once every 12 months.

11.3 Inspection documentation:

Cranes inspections will be documented as having been inspected. Scheduled inspections will be

documented as having been conducted.

1. Identify items that were inspected. 2. Show the status of the inspected items. 3. Provide the signature of the inspector. 4. Show the date. 5. File it and maintain it 6. Review the manufacturer’s specific inspection requirements 11.4 Inspection documentation storage. Inspection records and certifications shall be

maintained with the Site Safety Officer.



11.5 Damaged/unserviceable Cranes. Cranes found to be damaged or unserviceable will be

immediately removed from service.

12. Daily Checks:

The following items (as a minimum) shall be checked prior to use of any crane:

1. Check for air or hydraulic fluid leakage. 2. Check for load capacity stenciling on both sides of unit. 3. Check for twisted, broken or kinked cables or chains . 4. Check the operation of the crane; controls & movement. 5. Inspect for deformed, cracked, or stretched hooks. 6. Inspect for serviceable safety latches. 7. Observe correct drum spooling as the hook is raised. 8. Operate empty hook till it actuates the upper limit switch. 9. Operate hoist and trolley brakes, ensure no excessive coasting. 10. Visually inspect all units for integrity, leaks etc. 11 . Review the manufacturer’s specific requirements.

13. Monthly Checks:

The following items (as a minimum) shall be checked monthly:

1. Follow any additional recommendations of the manufacturer. 2. Inspect for twisted, broken or kinked cables or chains. 3. Inspect hooks for cracks, missing or broken parts. 4. Measure hooks for deformation or stretching. 5. Measure lifting chains for excessive stretch, twisting etc. 6. Review the manufacturers specific inspection requirementsl 7. Visually inspect all critical items. 8. Review the manufacturers specific requirements.

14. Periodic Checks:

Review the manufacturers specific inspection requirements. The following items (as a minimum) shall

be checked at periodic inspections (1 to 12 month intervals) :

1. Interval dependent on the type of activity performed. 2. Interval dependent on the severity of service. 3. Interval dependent on the environmental conditions. 4. As a minimum the inspection should cover:

Chain Or Cable Reeving Hook Condition Electrification Hoist Drives Travel Drives Brakes Limit Switches Couplings Rails Balance Controls Warning Devices End Stops Signage



15. Periodic CMAA Inspection Recommendations:

Class description typical schedule

A Standby or infrequent service annually

B Light service - 2-5 lifts hr. Annually

C moderate service - 50% capacity, 5-10 lifts hr. Annually

D Heavy service - 50% capacity, 10-20 lifts hr. Semiannually

E Severe service - near capacity, 20+ lifts hr. Quarterly

F Continuous severe service - near capacity

and continuous service throughout day bi-monthly

Note: Different conditions may suggest different intervals.

16. New, Idle, Altered, Used Cranes:

The use status of cranes will drive specific requirements for periodic maintenance and se rvicing. The status of the crane will be determined based on manufacturer recommendations and consultation with specific regulatory standards. Prior to initial or reintroduction into service cranes will be tested and inspected completely using the criteria applicable to periodic inspections. A report will be generated and

kept on file for future reference. The manufacturers specific requirements will be reviewed!

17. Preventive Maintenance:

Preventative maintenance procedures will be developed and used for specific cranes. Maintenance procedures will be determined on the basis of. frequency of crane use; severity of service conditions; nature of lifts being made; experience gained on the service life of cranes used in similar circumstances.

and OSHA. Consensus Standards, and Manufacturer recommendations.

Typical requirements include:

1. Adjusting the brakes. 2. Adjusting the operation of limit switches. 3. Checking and filling the gear case:s to the proper levels. 4. Cleaning and lubricating the wire rope (cable) and load chain. 5. Cleaning or replacing pitted or burned electrical contacts. 6. Cleaning or replacing the air and fluid filters. 7. Inspecting the operation of all controls and warning systems.



8. Lubricating the bearings, gears, pinions. linkages, shafts. etc. 9. Replacing any contaminated oils.

18. Preoperational Testing Requirements:

Preoperational tests will be conducted prior to use of any crane. Testing requirements will be determined on the basis of, frequency of crane use; severity of service conditions; nature of lifts being made; experience gained on the service life of cranes used in similar circumstances, and OSHA,

Consensus Standards, and Manufacturer recommendations. Typical requirements include:

Preoperational Tests - General:

1. Check for obstructions in the travel path of the crane. 2. Check upper and lower limit switches. 3. Ensure all emergency disconnects are known before any test. 4. Ensure that the manufacturers recommendations are followed. 5. If you have a checklist - follow it 6. If you're not familiar with the cranes' operation get help. 7. Inspect all electrical controls for proper operation. 8. Never unwind the spool completely 9. Observe for smooth operation of the components. 10. Test all controls to determine proper operation.

Preoperational Tests - Hooks:

1. Replace if deformation or cracks are found. 2. Check for proper function of the safety latch. 3. Inspect for twists from the plane of the unbent hook. 4. Check for proper swivel. 5. Hook repair is generally not recommended. 6. Emergency hook repair must be performed only under competent supervision. 7. After any hook repairs, the hook must be load tested before being returned to normal service.

Preoperational Tests - Rope:

1. Broken or worn outside wires. 2. Corroded or broken wires at end of connections. 3. Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end connections. 4. Reduction in rope diameter (replace if found). 5. Severe kinking, crushing, cutting or unstranding.

19. Lockout Tagout Considerations:

Lockout Tagout will be conducted when maintenance or servicing is performed on any crane. Lockout requirements will be determined on the basis of, OSHA, Consensus Standards, and Manufacturer

recommendations. Typical requirements include:



1. Review requirements for the individual crane. 2. Integrate lock out and maintenance requirements. 3. Ensure training in adequate for level of maintenance. 4. Ensure written programs are established and reviewed. 5. Carefully select lockout devices, ask the manufacturer for recommendations. 6. Do not necessarily assume devices are interchangeable between different types of cranes.



WP Resources Forklift Policy

Purpose:

Accidents resulting from powered industrial truck operation can result in severe personal injury

or death, major property damage and major damage to company products. This poses a serious

problem for workers and their employer. The OSHA Powered Industrial Trucks Standard

establishes uniform requirements to make sure that hazards associated with the use of

Powered Industrial Trucks are evaluated, and that this hazard information and training is

transmitted to all affected workers. Policy:

WP Resources will ensure that the requirements of the OSHA Standard for powered industrial trucks will be adhered to. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; employee training, authorization, safety requirements, fire protection, new purchase designs, maintenance, and general operation of fork trucks, tractors, platform lift trucks, motorized hand trucks, and other specialized industrial trucks used within our facility.

Responsibility:

The company Safety Officer is Christopher Schmidt he is solely responsible for all facets of this program and has full authority to make necessary decisions to ensure success of the program. The Safety Officer will develop written detailed instructions covering each of the basic elements in this program, and is the sole person authorized to amend these instructions. This company has expressly authorized the Safety Officer to halt any operation of the company where there is danger of serious personal injury. This policy includes respiratory hazards.

Contents of the Powered Industrial Trucks Program

• Written Program. Development and maintenance of a written powered industrial trucks program. • Training Program. Development and implementation of the employee training program regarding;

authorization, use, operator maintenance, and associated hazards. • Operations Program. Development and implementation of the operations program regarding;

authorization, use, operator maintenance, and associated hazards. 3.3 Configuration Program. Development and implementation of the vehicle configuration program regarding; modifications or additions to vehicles which affect capacity, and safe operation.

Powered Industrial Trucks Program

• Written Program. This standard practice instruction will be maintained in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.178 and updated as required. Where no update is required this document will be reviewed

annually. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it.

It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives.



• Training program. Operator training. Only trained and authorized operators shall be permitted to operate a powered industrial truck. Employees will be trained in accordance with the following guidelines.

The company Safety Administrator, individual supervisor, or select trainers, (once trained) will have the authority to provide training on the operation of powered industrial trucks.

2.2 Employees of WP Resources will not operate a powered industrial truck (PIT) unless they have received training in accordance with this standard practice instruction.

1. Personnel rotated within the company will have their training verified prior to being

allowed to operate a PIT.

2. Employee personnel records will be annotated with the date, title, and specifics of said

training.

3. Any employee who refuses such training will not be permitted to operate a

PIT. • Operations Program.

2. Trucks shall not be driven up to anyone standing in front of a fixed object.

3. No person shall be allowed to stand or pass under the elevated portion of any truck,

whether loaded or empty.

4. Unauthorized personnel shall not be permitted to ride on powered industrial trucks. A safe place to ride shall be provided where riding of trucks is authorized.

5. Arms or legs are prohibited from being placed between the uprights of the mast or outside

the running lines of the truck.

• When a powered industrial truck is left unattended, load engaging means shall be fully lowered,

controls will be neutralized, power shut off, and brakes set. Wheels will be blocked if the truck is parked

on an incline.

A powered industrial truck is unattended when the operator is 25 ft. or more away from

the vehicle which remains in his view, or whenever the operator leaves the vehicle and it is not

in his view.

When the operator is dismounted and within 25 ft. of the truck still in his view, the load

engaging means will be fully lowered, controls neutralized, and the brakes set to prevent

movement.

• A safe distance shall be maintained from the edge of ramps or platforms while on any elevated

dock, platform, or freight car. Trucks will not be used for opening or closing freight doors.



• Brakes will be set and wheel blocks in place to prevent movement of trucks, trailers, or railroad cars

while loading or unloading. Fixed jacks may be necessary to support a semitrailer during loading or

unloading when the trailer is not coupled to a tractor. The flooring of trucks, trailers, and railroad cars

will be checked for breaks and weakness before they are driven onto. • The operator will ensure sufficient headroom under overhead installations, lights, pipes, sprinkler

system, etc. before operating the vehicle in these areas.

• An overhead guard will be used as protection against falling objects. It should be noted that an

overhead guard is intended to offer protection from the impact of small packages, boxes, bagged

material, etc., representative of the job application, but not to withstand the impact of a falling capacity

load. • A load backrest extension will be used whenever necessary to minimize the possibility of the load

or part of it from falling rearward. • Only approved industrial trucks will be used in hazardous locations.

• Whenever a truck is equipped with vertical only, or vertical and horizontal controls elevatable

with the lifting carriage or forks for lifting personnel, the following additional precautions will be taken

for the protection of personnel being elevated.

5. Use of a safety platform firmly secured to the lifting carriage and/or forks.

6. Means shall be provided whereby personnel on the platform can shut off power to the

truck.

1. Such protection from falling objects as indicated necessary by the operating conditions

will be provided.

3.13 Fire aisles, access to stairways, and fire equipment wi ll be not be obstructed at any time.

3.14 General requirements. Operators:

3.14.1 Will obey Plant/Site speeds and other traffic regulations at all

times.

3.14.2 Will operate loaded trucks with forks no more than 6-8 inches above the ground, with

the load carried low and tilted back.

3.14.3 Will not raise or lower loads while moving.

3.14.4 Will not carry anything on the overhead guard.



3.14.5 Will use all plant/Site observation mirrors

3.14.6 Will ensure vehicle sound/illuminated warning devices are operational.

3.14.7 Will yield right of way to pedestrians, emergency vehicles, and avoid pedestrian lanes.

3.14.8 Will drive cautiously on uneven or slippery surfaces.

3.14.9 Will ensure the load is pointed uphill where the gradient is greater than 10 percent.

3.14.10 Will ensure fire protection equipment is carried with the vehicle and is in proper

working order.

3.15 Prestart requirements. Operators:

3.15.1 Will verify that all brakes, controls, gauges, lights, seat belts, and routine operational

features are in proper working order. They shall be examined before and after each shift.

Defects when found shall be immediately reported and corrected.

3.15.2 Will remove the truck from service any time it is found to be in need of repair,

defective, or in any way unsafe, the truck will be taken out of service until it has been restored

to safe operating condition.

3.15.3 Will check for leaks and perform necessary operator maintenance before starting vehicle. 3.15.4 Will report deficiencies to maintenance.

3.15.5 Will ensure they know the load capacity and stay within it.

3.15.6 Will be cognizant of the planned route and aware of areas wi th inadequate headroom, lighting,

obstructions, and floor surface problems.

3.15.7 Will wear the same level of personal protective equipment as the personnel they are directly

working with.

3.15.8 Will not engage in stunt driving or horseplay.

3.15.9 Will slow down for wet and slippery floors.

3.15.10 Will properly secure dockboard or bridgeplates before they are driven over. Dockboard or

bridgeplates will be driven over carefully and slowly and their rated capacity never exceeded.

3.15.11 Will approach any elevators slowly, and then enter squarely after the elevator car is properly



leveled. Once on the elevator, the controls shall be neutralized, power shut off, and the brakes set until

the desired level is reached. 3.15.12 Motorized hand trucks must enter elevators or other confined areas with load end forward. 3.15.13 Running over loose objects on the roadway surface shall be avoided. 3.15.14 While negotiating turns, speed shall be reduced to a safe level by means of turning the hand

steering wheel in a smooth, sweeping motion. Except when maneuvering at a very low speed, the hand

steering wheel shall be turned at a moderate, even rate. 3.15.15 Will use extreme care tilting the load forward or backward, particularly when high tiering. Tilting

forward with load engaging means elevated, shall be prohibited except to pick up a load. An elevated

load shall not be tilted forward except when the load is in a deposit position over a rack or stack. When

stacking or tiering, only enough backward tilt to stabilize the load shall be used.

3.16 Loading/Unloading requirements. Operators:

3.16.1 Will ensure load is within the trucks rated capacity.

3.16.2 Will place load squarely on forks until load touches carriage.

3.16.3 Will ensure load is stable and centered on forks, and stack or tie loose or uneven loads

(or ensure proper personnel accomplish this prior to loading).

3.16.4 Will secure the vehicle when not in use to prevent unauthorized personnel from

operating the vehicle.

3.16.5 Will tilt the mast back to lift load.

3.16.6 Will proceed straight into trailers or rail cars to load/unload.

3.16.7 Will ensure if loading/unloading onto trucks that the wheels are chocked, brakes are

engaged, and loading platform is positioned properly.

3.16.8 Will ensure if loading/unloading onto or from racks the proper safe weight or height-to-

load ratio is maintained.

3.16.9. Will ensure if loading/unloading onto or from stacked materials the proper safe weight

or height-to-load ratio is maintained.

3.17 Parking requirements. Operators:



3.17.1 Must select flat parking surfaces, away from traffic where the vehicle does not block,

doors, pedestrian routes, aisles, exits, etc.

3.17.2 Must not leave a truck unattended or be more than 25 feet from the vehicle without:

3.17.2.1 Fully lowering load-engaging means, neutralizing controls, shutting off

power, setting the brakes, and removing the keys.

3.17.2.2 Blocking the wheels if parked on an incline.

3.18 Refueling requirements. Operators:

3.18.1 Refuel only in assigned, ventilated areas containing no ignition

sources.

3.18.2 Turn off engine.

3.18.3 Have fire suppression and cleanup equipment available.

3.18.4 Extinguish smoking materials.

3.18.5 Use acid-resistant material-handling equipment and wear corrosion-resistant PPE during battery charging/changing.

3.18.5.1 Remove battery cap slowly and leave open.

3.18.5.2 Pour acid into water, not water into acid.

3.18.6 Follow the vehicle manufacturer's instructions for gas or propane

fueling.

3.18.7 Never use open flame to check fuel level.

3.18.8 Try to prevent spills, clean any spills promptly, replace fuel cap before starting

or moving vehicle.

3.18.9 Take empty propane tanks to an authorized compressed gas container disposal/storage area and follow company policy for disposal/storage.

4. Configuration program.

4.1 No modifications or additions which affect capacity and safe operation shall be performed without the manufacturers prior written approval. Capacity, operation, maintenance instruction



plates, tags, or decals shall be changed accordingly.

4.2 If the truck is equipped with front-end attachments other than factory installed attachments, the truck will be marked to identify the attachments and show the approximate

weight of the truck and attachment combination at maximum elevation with load laterally centered.

4.3 All nameplates and markings will be verified as being in place and maintained in a legible condition.

4.4 When it is needed to determine a proper configuration to purchase a powered industrial

truck, WP Resources will adhere to the following guidelines. The atmosphere or location

where the truck will be used will have to be classified as to whether it is hazardous or

nonhazardous prior to the consideration of the type industrial truck to be purchased. The

proposed manufacturer should be consulted to determine the most suitable vehicle. The

following is a list of designation types.

4.4.1 D designated units are diesel powered units.

4.4.2 IDS designated units are diesel powered units that are provided with additional

safeguards to the exhaust, fuel and electrical systems.

4.4.3 The DY designated units are diesel powered units that have all the safeguards of the IDS units and in addition do not have any electrical equipment including the ignition and are equipped with temperature limitation features.

4.4.4 The E designated units are electrically powered units that have minimum

acceptable safeguards against inherent fire hazards.

4.4.5 The ES designated units are electrically powered units that, in addition to all of

the requirements for the E units, are provided with additional safeguards to the

electrical system to prevent emission of hazardous sparks and to limit surface

temperatures. They may be used in some locations where the use of an E unit may not

be considered suitable.

4.4.6 The EE designated units are electrically powered units that have, in addition to all

of the requirements for the E and ES units, the electric motors and all other electrical

equipment completely enclosed. In certain locations the EE unit may be used where the

use of an E and ES unit may not be considered suitable.

4.4.7 The EX designated units are electrically powered units that differ from the E, ES,

or EE units in that the electrical fittings and equipment are so designed, constructed and

assembled that the units may be used in certain atmospheres containing flammable

vapors or dusts.

4.4.8 The G designated units are gasoline powered units having minimum acceptable



safeguards against inherent fire hazards.

4.4.9 The GS designated units are gasoline powered units that are provided with

additional safeguards to the exhaust, fuel, and electrical systems. They may be used in

some locations where the use of a G unit may not be considered suitable.

4.4.1 0 The LIP designated unit is similar to the G unit except that liquefied petroleum gas is used for fuel instead of gasoline.



WP Resources Aerial Work Platforms and Scissor Lifts

Purpose:

To ensure the safety of all personnel operating/utilizing an aerial work platform and/or scissor lift.

Policy:

All personnel operating/utilizing an aerial work platform and/or scissor lift must:

Adhere to all applicable manufacturers’ guidelines/requirements;

Adhere to all applicable Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) guidelines/requirements; and Adhere to all applicable WP Resources procedures (see below)

Training: Mandatory training and certification is required for any WP Resources employee who must use an aerial/scissor lift. Training will be conducted in two parts first will be a class describing basic operations of the equipment followed by a quiz. Hands on training will follow and certification granted given the employee passes.

OSHA Requirements

Scissor Lifts

Scissor lifts that have extendable platforms (or extend beyond the equipment’s wheelbase) are not covered by the aerial lift OSHA requirements (1926.453). See attached OSHA interpretation letter.

However, since scissor lifts are mobile, they do meet the definition of scaffold (1926.451) the specific requirements for mobile scaffolds in the scaffold standard (1926.452(w) must be met. Please refer to attached regulations for details. In brief:

3.14 Must be braced by cross, horizontal or diagonal braces. 3.15 Must be plumb, level, and squared. 3.16 Scissor lifts with wheels should be locked with positive wheel and/or

wheel and swivel locks to prevent movement of the lift while it is use in a stationary manner.

3.17 Power systems used to propel the scissor lift shall be designed for such use. 3.18 Must be stabilized to prevent tipping during movement. 3.19 Employees shall not be allowed to ride in the scissor lift unless the

following conditions are met: • The surface on which the lift is being moved is within 3 degrees of

level and free of pits, holes, and obstructions. • The height to base width ratio of the lift during movement is two to



one or less, unless the lift is designed and constructed to meet or exceed national recognized stability test requirements.

• Outrigger frames, when used, are installed on both sides of the scaffold. • When power systems are used the propelling force is applied

directly to the wheels and does not produce a speed in excess of 0.3 mps.

3.20 No employee is on any part of the scaffold which extends outward

beyond the wheels, casters, or other supports. 3.21 Platforms shall not extend outward beyond the base supports of

the scaffold unless outrigger frames or equivalent devices are used to ensure stability.

3.4 When leveling the scissor lift is necessary, screw jacks or equivalent means shall be used.

3.5 Caster stems and wheel stems shall be pinned or otherwise secured in lift legs or adjustment screws.

3.6 Before a lift is moved, each employee on the lift shall be made aware of the move.

Aerial Lifts

1. Must conform to ANSIA92.2-1969 in design and construction.

2. Includes extensible boom platforms, aerial ladders, articulating boom platforms, and vertical towers.

3. Any lift that is “field modified” for use other than that intended by the

manufacturer must have been certified in writing by the manufacturer or by equivalent entity.

4. Aerial ladders shall be secured in the lower traveling position by locking device on top of the truck cab, and the manually operated device at the base of the ladder before the truck is moved for highway travel.

5. For extensible and articulating boom platforms, lift controls shall be tested

each day prior to use to ensure they are working properly. 6. Only authorized persons shall operate an aerial lift.

7. Belting off to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment while working from

an aerial lift shall not be permitted.

8. Employees shall always stand firmly on the floor of the basket and shall not sit or climb on the edge of the basket or use planks, ladders, or other devices for a work position.

9. A body belt shall be worn and a lanyard attached to the boom or basket

when working from an aerial lift. (As of January 1, 1998, Subpart M stipulated body belts are not acceptable part of a personal fall arrest system. The use of a body belt in a tethering system or in a restraint system is acceptable).

10. Boom and basket limit specified by the manufacturer shall not be exceeded.

11. The brakes shall be set and when outriggers are used, they shall be positioned on pads or a solid surface. Wheel chocks shall be installed before using an



aerial lift on an incline provided it is safe to do so.

12. The aerial truck shall not be moved when the boom is elevated in a working position with men in the basket, except for equipment which is specifically designed for this type of operation.

13. Articulating boom and extensible boom platforms (i.e., personnel carriers) shall

have both platform (upper) and lower controls. Controls must be clearly marked and the lower controls shall not be operated unless permission is obtained from the employee in the lift except in an emergency.

14. Climbers shall not be worn while performing work from an aerial lift.

15. The insulated portion of an aerial lift shall not be altered in any manner that will reduce the insulating value.

16. Before moving an aerial lift for travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected to

see that it is properly cradled and outriggers are in stowed position. 17. All electrical tests shall conform to ANSI A92.2-1969

18. Bursting safety factor: the provisions of ANSI standard A92.2-1969

section 4.9 shall apply to all critical hydraulic and pneumatic components. Critical components are those in which failure would result in a free fall or rotation of the boom. All noncritical components shall have a bursting safety factor of at least 2:1

Inspection: All equipment will be inspected at the beginning of each shift and undergo Scheduled maintenance after 500 hours of use. Inspections will include a walk around looking for and checking all of the following. Vehicle Components:

1. Steering and Brakes 2. Correct Fluid Levels (Oil, Hydraulic, Fuel and Coolant) 3. Fluid Leaks 4. Battery and charger 5. Wheels and Tires 6. Horn, Gauges, Lights, and Backup Alarms 7. Lower-Level Controls

Lift Components: 1. Guardrail Systems 2. Personal Protective Devices 3. Loose and/or Missing Parts 4. Operating and Emergency Controls 5. Outriggers and Stabilizers 6. Mechanical Fasteners and Locking Pins 7. Fiberglass and other Insulating Components 8. Hydraulic, Air, Pneumatic, Fuel, and Electrical systems 9. Missing or Unreadable Signs and Placards 10. Cable and Wiring Harnesses

company hse for wc welding services 2014

Documents